may/InterimDataTool
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity

Commiting initial Git version.

Browse Source
This commit is contained in:
May Doušak 2023-01-18 09:47:43 +01:00
parent 476894f6ad
commit 0b4c44ebc6
40708 changed files with 9158370 additions and 4 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

46
README.md
View File

@ -1,5 +1,43 @@
# InterimDataTool
# ESS Interim Data Analysis Tool for Windows OS
This repository contains the tool and R portable that allows users to run the interim data analysis without any R knowledge or other software prerequisities besides using Windows.
This is just a simple C# wrapper that runs (provided) R portable.
R portable is sourced from Sourceforge.net: https://sourceforge.net/projects/rportable/
## How to use the tool
### End users
Please use the zip file provided via MyESS.
If for some reason that is not available, they can use the `Tool.zip` file from the `end_users/` subdirectory in this repository.
### Developers
The `Tool/` subdirectory contains the source code for the GUI tool.
After compilations make sure to create the following directory structure under (!) the final executable (say `tool.exe`):
- tool.exe
- `R/` should contain a copy of `R_portable` directory contents
- `Tool_files/` should contain a copy of `TOOL_FILES` directory contents
**Important information**
`TOOL_FILES` only contains old demo scripts and is not updated regularly in this repository. Please use the appropriate GIT repository for the latest versions of scripts!
## LICENSE
Gnu GPL V2. Please see included LICENSE file.
## AUTHORS
European Social Survey WP8 team:
- Joost Kappelhof
- Roberto Briceno.Rosas
- May Doušak
Programming:
- May Doušak
## SUPPORT
may.dousak@fdv.uni-lj.si or the appropriate MyESS folder
ESS Interim data analysis tool source.
Just a simple C# wrapper for portable R.

3
R_portable/R/App/AppInfo/Launcher/R-Portable.ini Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
[Launch]
ProgramExecutable=R-Portable\bin\i386\rgui.exe
ProgramExecutable64=R-Portable\bin\x64\rgui.exe

BIN
R_portable/R/App/AppInfo/appicon.ico Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 45 KiB

BIN
R_portable/R/App/AppInfo/appicon_16.png Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 697 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/AppInfo/appicon_32.png Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 1.3 KiB

26
R_portable/R/App/AppInfo/appinfo.ini Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
[Format]
Type=PortableApps.comFormat
Version=3.5
[Details]
Name=R Portable
AppID=R-Portable
Publisher=R Development Core Team
Homepage=http://r-project.org/
Category=Education
Description=R: A Language and Environment for Statistical Computing
Language=Multilingual
[License]
Shareable=true
OpenSource=true
Freeware=true
CommercialUse=true
[Version]
PackageVersion=4.0.0.0
DisplayVersion=4.0.0
[Control]
Icons=1
Start=R-Portable.exe

11
R_portable/R/App/AppInfo/pac_installer_log.ini Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
[PortableApps.comInstaller]
Info1=Do not delete or modify this file. It may be necessary for this app to function correctly.
Info2=This file was generated by the PortableApps.com Installer wizard and modified by the official PortableApps.com Installer TM Rare Ideas, LLC as the app was installed.
Info3=This file should be excluded from git repositories by using the appropriate gitignore.
Run=true
WizardVersion=3.5.16.0
PackagingDate=2020-04-30
PackagingTime=7:51:55
InstallerVersion=3.5.16.0
InstallDate=2020-05-19
InstallTime=10:49:31

736
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/CHANGES Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,736 @@
Windows-specific changes to R
CHANGES IN R VERSIONS > 2.15.0:
* Windows-specific changes will now be announced in the common NEWS
file.
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.15.0:
NEW FEATURES:
* The 32-bit and 64-bit builds are now treated equally, as it is
anticipated that 64-bit R will soon be (if not already) the more
commonly used. This entails:
The Rterm or Rgui title mentions 32-bit as well as 64-bit.
The desktop icons are labelled R i386 and R x64.
R CMD INSTALL for a package with compiled code will fail if
compilation fails for any of the installed sub-architectures: use
--no-multiarch to override this.
* postscript(file = "|cmd") now works on Windows.
* file.symlink() is now implemented on NTFS file systems on Vista
or later, for accounts which have suitable permissions (and most
will not). It can link existing directories, and existing-or-not
files.
* There is a new function Sys.junction() to create junction points
on NTFS file systems.
* C-level error formats now use the trio library, and so for
example output 1.53e-11 (as required by C99) rather than
1.53e-011.
INSTALLER:
* The installer has many fewer options with more files always being
installed, as a few Mb of file space is nowadays no longer an
issue.
* It is now possible to select '64-bit Files' from the standard
installer even on a 32-bit version of Windows.
PACKAGE INSTALLATION:
* As the current toolchain uses only 32-bit executables, it is
possible to compile a package for both architectures on 32-bit
Windows provided both architectures of R have been installed: use
Rcmd INSTALL --compile-both.
* Rcmd INSTALL --merge-multiarch will work (but do a normal
install) if only one architecture is installed.
BUG FIXES:
* Due to a race condition, some graphics changes were not flushed
to the display if another graphics window was closed at nearly
the same time. (Reported by Michael Sumner.)
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.14.2:
NEW FEATURES:
* bitmap() and dev2bitmap() look for gswin64c.exe (as used by
64-bit GhostScript), in preference to gswin32c.exe.
INSTALLATION:
* The sources (and packages) can now be compiled using the multilib
toolchain developed for R 2.15.x: see the MULTI macro in
MkRules.dist. This toolchain is used for the CRAN binary
distribution.
PACKAGE INSTALLATION:
* The preferred toolchain has changed since the one used for R
2.12.0 to 2.14.1: see the'R Installation and Administration
manual'. Compiled code (except DLLs) may be incompatible with
previous toolchains (and compiled C++ code almost certainly will
be: users of Rcpp take care).
Ensure that the settings in MkRules.local are appropriate to the
toolchain you use.
* There is a new macro (aka make variable) SHLIB_PTHREAD_FLAGS.
This is set to -pthread on builds using toolchains which support
it, and should be included in both PKG_CPPFLAGS (or the Fortran
or F9x equivalents) and PKG_LIBS.
BUG FIXES:
* Using a prompt of more than 80 characters in readline() could
cause a buffer overflow in Rterm. (Reported by Henrik
Bengtsson.)
* Some of the custom messages in the installer were corrupted: add
a BOM mark to the file as now required by Unicode Inno Setup.
(PR#14816)
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.14.1:
NEW FEATURES:
* The Save as menu item on the script editor adds extension .R to a
file name without an extension.
* In package parallel, detectCores(logical = FALSE) makes an
OS-dependent attempt to find the number of physical cores. It
usually succeeds, even on XP.
PACKAGE INSTALLATION:
* The directory pointed to by USER_LOCAL can now have
architecture-specific sub-directories lib/i386 and lib/x64.
BUG FIXES:
* The fix for PR#14543 caused stack problems with outputting large
R objects (e.g., data frames of 25,000 items). (PR#14698)
* In a double-byte locale (Chinese, Japanese, Korean), grep() and
friends might have used byte-wise matching of strings in the
native encoding. (PR#14622)
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.14.0:
NEW FEATURES:
* The yLineBias of the windows() family of devices has been changed
from 0.1 to 0.2: this changes slightly the vertical positioning
of text (including axis annotations). This can be overridden by
setting the new "ylbias" graphical parameter. This was done for
consistency with other devices such as pdf().
* R CMD build once again attempts to preserve file permissions on
Windows.
* There is support for cairographics-based devices using the same
code as on Unix-alikes. This can be selected by the new type
argument of the bitmap devices bmp(), jpeg(), png() and tiff(),
and devices svg(), cairo_pdf() and cairo_ps() are now available
on Windows.
These are not compiled in by default when building from source:
see the instructions in the 'R Installation and Administration
Manual'.
* All the Windows-specific graphics devices now have a family
argument. If non-empty this specifies an initial family to be
used for fonts 1-4. If empty the fonts specified in the Rdevga
configuration file are used for the Windows GDI devices and
"sans" for cairographics-based devices.
This will generally be a Windows font name such as "Lucida
Bright" or one of the device-independent names ("sans", "serif"
and "mono"). Outside Western Europe you may need to select a
family that better supports your locale such as "Arial MS
Unicode" or one specific to Chinese/Korean/Thai ....
* There is a new antialias argument to windows(), win.print() and
the bitmap devices. This is an option that can be set in
windows.options() to set the default for windows() (and
win.graph()).
This gives a hint to the Windows plotting system. Whether
anti-aliasing is actually used principally depends on the OS
settings: this argument should at least be able to turn it off.
The default behaviour (unchanged from before) is that Windows
will use anti-aliasing for screen devices (and bitmap devices, as
they plot on a hidden screen) if ClearType has been enabled. For
those not using ClearType, windows.options(antialias =
"cleartype") will make this the default, and it will probably
give more legible plots.
The argument can also be used for the cairographics-based
versions of the bitmap devices.
* The 'Update packages ...' menu item now runs
update.packages(ask="graphics", checkBuilt=TRUE).
* R CMD INSTALL preserves the package-directory modification time
when it restores an earlier install of the package.
* File extensions .xz, .rda and .RData have been added to those
which default to binary transfer for download.file().
* install.packages() and R CMD check have a small delay after
removing a directory to counteract some interference from
anti-virus software.
* There is a Danish translation of the RGui menus.
INSTALLATION:
* Compilation of C and Fortran code now uses the optimization flag
-mtune=core2: this will improve performance a few percent on
recent CPUs at the expense of those which are several years old.
Its effect is particularly evident on 64-bit builds.
This can be overridden when building from the sources: see the
EOPTS macro defined in file MkRules.dist.
* Where both 32- and 64-bit versions of R are installed, the file
association for .RData files defaults to 64-bit R (it defaulted
to 32-bit in R 2.12.x and 2.13.x).
* There is preliminary support for 'multilib' toolchains which use
options --m32 or --m64 to select the architecture; set the
appropriate macros in MkRules.local.
It is the intention to move to such a toolchain when they become
mature enough.
PACKAGE INSTALLATION:
* Rzlib.dll (sometimes used in packages _via_ $(ZLIB_LIBS)) does
not include the buggy gzio interface from zlib 1.2.5.
DEFUNCT:
* zip.unpack() (deprecated in R 2.13.0) is defunct: use unzip()
instead.
BUG FIXES:
* Raster drawing on win.metafile() (or copying a plot that includes
a raster image from another device to a Metafile) now does not
crash. (Reported by Stefan Gelissen.)
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.13.2:
BUG FIXES:
* The fix for PR#14583 caused inconsistent behaviour in other
areas, e.g. PR#14628, extra lines appearing in image displays,
and uneven bases on histograms. (PR#14632).
* Opening large numbers of windows() graphics devices could cause
some of them to fail to redraw (PR#14668).
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.13.1:
NEW FEATURES:
* R CMD build no longer attempts to preserve file permissions on
Windows, because Windows (unlike POSIX-compliant OSes) stops
read-only files being deleted in version-control directories.
* shell.exec() now interprets files relative to the current working
directory (rather than R_HOME).
* file.info() now accepts 'file' names with trailing directory
separators, even though such names are invalid on Windows.
* The windows() family of devices now supports() per-pixel alpha
for raster images.
BUG FIXES:
* Launching the PDF manuals from the Rgui menus did not work on
some versions of Windows.
* The windows() screen device would sometimes fail to plot
(visibly) points with pch=".". PR#14583
* system() and related functions sometimes failed when run in Rgui.
* Saving to PDF from the menu of a windows() device used defaults
for family, fg and bg from ps.options() rather than pdf.options()
(but the factory-fresh defaults were the same).
* Shutting down the R session cleaned up the temporary directory
before closing all graphics devices. On Windows this
necessitated changing the working directory, so some devices
(e.g., tiff()) could write files in the wrong directory if closed
during shutdown. The order has been reversed.
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.13.0:
WINDOWS VERSION:
* Windows 2000 is no longer supported. (It went end-of-life in
July 2010.)
NEW FEATURES:
* win_iconv has been updated: this version has a change in the
behaviour with BOMs on UTF-16 and UTF-32 files - it removes BOMs
when reading and adds them when writing. (This is consistent
with Microsoft applications, but Unix versions of iconv usually
ignore them.)
* Support for repository type win64.binary (used for 64-bit Windows
binaries for R 2.11.x only) has been removed.
* The installers no longer put an 'Uninstall' item on the start
menu (to conform to current Microsoft UI guidelines).
* Running R always sets the environment variable R_ARCH (as it does
on a Unix-alike from the shell-script front-end).
* The defaults for options("browser") and options("pdfviewer") are
now set from environment variables R_BROWSER and R_PDFVIEWER
respectively (as on a Unix-alike). A value of "false" suppresses
display (even if there is no false.exe present on the path).
* If options("install.lock") is set to TRUE, binary package
installs are protected against failure similar to the way source
package installs are protected.
* file.exists() and unlink() have more support for files > 2GB.
* The versions of R.exe in R_HOME/bin/i386,x64/bin now support
options such as R --vanilla CMD: there is no comparable interface
for Rcmd.exe.
* A few more file operations will now work with >2GB files.
* The environment variable R_HOME in an R session now uses slash as
the path separator (as it always has when set by Rcmd.exe).
* Rgui has a new menu item for the PDF 'Sweave User Manual'.
DEPRECATED:
* zip.unpack() is deprecated: use unzip().
INSTALLATION:
* There is support for libjpeg-turbo _via_ setting JPEGDIR to that
value in MkRules.local.
Support for jpeg-6b has been removed.
* The sources now work with libpng-1.5.1, jpegsrc.v8c (which are
used in the CRAN builds) and tiff-4.0.0beta6 (CRAN builds use
3.9.1). It is possible that they no longer work with older
versions than libpng-1.4.5.
BUG FIXES:
* Workaround for the incorrect values given by Windows' casinh
function on the branch cuts.
* Bug fixes for drawing raster objects on windows(). The symptom
was the occasional raster image not being drawn, especially when
drawing multiple raster images in a single expression. Thanks to
Michael Sumner for report and testing.
* Printing extremely long string values could overflow the stack
and cause the GUI to crash. (PR#14543)
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.12.2:
NEW FEATURES:
* Building badly-written vignettes which used the default device
(pdf(file = "Rplots.pdf")) could leave the device open and hence
the file Rplots.pdf could not be removed on Windows: all devices
are now closed.
BUG FIXES:
* In some circumstances the caret (cursor) could be positioned
incorrectly. (PR#14460)
* When loading Rconsole from disk, a spurious warning message was
sometimes shown.
* In R 2.12.1, system() sometimes passed an empty input stream to
the new process rather than allowing user input.
* The internal method for untar() does a better job of unravelling
symbolic links in the tarball (but still with many limitations).
* The graphical dialog version of select.list() could cause later
dialogs to fail if Windows events were not processed between the
calls.
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.12.1:
NEW FEATURES:
* system() and system2() with output redirected to a character
vector now give a warning if the command returns a non-zero error
code. (This is what a Unix-alike does as from R 2.12.0.)
* system() and system2() no longer discard output from the command
to stdout and stderr as often as they used to, and more cases of
system2() are implemented.
* stdout is now flushed after echoing the input line.
* The internal implementation of tar() (package utils) is now
supported on Windows.
INSTALLATION:
* The MSI installer is now made by an R script, and there is now
support for 64-bit builds. (Unlike the Inno Setup installer,
there are separate MSI installers for 32- and 64-bit Windows.)
It is now built using WiX 3.x rather than WiX 2.0. (As a result
it is about 25% smaller.)
BUG FIXES:
* Some warning/error messages from dyn.load() could be masked in
Rgui on Windows 7, as that OS can return messages containing
carriage returns and Rgui does not support overwriting.
* Filenames could not be specified using backslashes in Sweave().
* In R 2.12.0, system(intern = TRUE) captured stderr on Rterm when
it was documented to only do so on Rgui.
* Rgui in R 2.12.0 (only) did not always handle lines containing
carriage returns (\r) correctly: sometimes random characters
where shown.
Since carriage returns have been supported in Rgui, the cursor
positioning after outputting a line containing a carriage return
had been unreliable.
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.12.0:
NEW FEATURES:
* A sub-architecture is used for 32-bit (i386) as well as 64-bit
(x64) builds. 32-bit packages containing compiled code need to
re-installed for this release (64-bit packages built for 2.11.x
will most likely still work).
Architecture-specific files (such as Rgui.exe and Rscript.exe)
are now in R_HOME/bin/i386 or R_HOME/bin/x64.
Because many people expect it, there is an executable
R_HOME/bin/R.exe, which accepts --arch and launches either
R_HOME/bin/i386/R.exe or R_HOME/bin/x64/R.exe, and analogously
for Rscript.exe. If not specified by their argument --arch,
these check the environment variable R_ARCH for the architecture
to use.
* The Rgui console now has an optional blinking caret (cursor) to
assist screen readers for the visually impaired.
* normalizePath() now signals a warning instead of an error when
the input path does not exist. It attempts partial
normalization, or if that fails, returns the original input.
* All the Rcmd sub-commands except config and Sd2d are now handled
internally rather by shell scripts.
* Rcmd has a new sub-command texify to run MiKTeX's texify.exe with
arguments to find files such as Sweave.sty. See the examples in
?Sweave.
* system(intern = FALSE) now returns 127 (the same as Unix-alikes)
rather than -1 if the command cannot be run, and (like
Unix-alikes) no longer gives a warning.
* Rscript -e and similar use a temporary file, and now work harder
to ensure that filename is not the same as some other
simultaneous R process.
INSTALLATION:
* The preferred toolchain for 32-bit builds (including packages) is
now based on gcc 4.5.0: see the 'R Installation and
Administration Manual'.
* It is now possible to build R and the standard installer without
Perl: only maintainer-mode tasks now need Perl.
64-bit NEWS:
* The 32- and 64-bit distributions have been merged:
There is a combined installer (called R-<version>-win.exe). When
used under 32-bit Windows this works as before and installs
32-bit R. When used under 64-bit Windows there are options to
install either or both of 32- and 64-bit R: the default is to
install both.
The default package type is "win.binary" on both 32- and 64-bit
builds: a single repository contains binary packages for both
architectures. This is in place for CRAN, CRAN extras and BioC:
type = "win64.binary" can still be used for any repositories
which follow the R 2.11.x convention. With the default filters
(see ?available.packages) packages will only be offered if they
are available for the current architecture.
The default personal library, e.g. ~/R/win-library/2.12 is now
the same for both 32- and 64-bit R.
* The recommended 64-bit toolchain has been changed to one that
does not add leading underscores. See <URL:
http://cran.r-project.org/bin/windows/Rtools/>. Any static or
import libraries for external software used in installing
packages will need to be re-compiled for this toolchain, but the
use of DLLs is unaffected.
* For those building R from the sources, the 64-bit Tcl binary
distribution for 2.12.x is in file R64a_Tcl_8-5-8.zip and
contains e.g. directory Tcl/bin64 and not Tcl/bin.
PACKAGE INSTALLATION:
* The deprecated environment variable RHOME is no longer set when a
package is installed: use R_HOME instead (and depend on R (>=
2.9) ).
* Package installation, including configure.win scripts, can use
${R_HOME}/bin${R_ARCH_BIN} as a portable way to find the binaries
such as Rscript.exe.
BUG FIXES:
* R.exe when used in place of Rterm.exe set the environment
variables set by R CMD. Conversely, R CMD BATCH did not.
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.11.1 patched:
BUG FIXES:
* file.rename() now waits for the rename to complete before
returning, so that operations on the new filename will not fail.
* Sys.info() and win.version() now report Windows 7 as such (and
not as Vista), and Sys.info() now reports the machine type as
"x86-64" on 64-bit platforms.
* serialize() to a raw vector works around the dismal performance
of Windows' memory manager by allocating much larger chunks of
memory less frequently.
* readClipboard() could cause a segfault with certain clipboard
data.
* A fix intended for Mac OS X was incorrectly applied to Windows,
so iconv(x, from, "") in a C locale was interpreted as requesting
translation to UTF-8.
* system(intern=TRUE) often returned 0 rather than an error status
if the command could not be found, if run from Rterm or from Rgui
with show.output.on.console = FALSE.
* memory.limit() did not allow sizes greater than 4095 on 64 bit
builds. (PR#14372)
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.11.1:
NEW FEATURES:
* The Rgui console, pagers and editor on the 64-bit build now have
a title bar icon.
* The outer frame/console for Rgui/Rterm mentions '(64-bit)' to
make it easier to distinguish running copies of R.
* The package entries in listbox shown by the Install package(s)
... menu are now explicitly sorted in the current locale (as they
were in most previous releases, but not in 2.11.0).
* R CMD INSTALL can install zipfiles as binary packages.
* Errors in the Rconsole file are ignored: silently on startup,
with a warning when Rconsole is loaded interactively.
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.11.0:
NEW FEATURES:
* There is now a native x64 Windows port, with a binary installer
and binaries of packages available on CRAN. See the 'R
Administration and Installation Manual' and the 'R for Windows
FAQ'.
* Rcmd cmd (or R CMD cmd) now runs an arbitrary 'cmd' if 'cmd' is
not one of the builtin commands, and does not have extension
'.sh' or '.pl' (when it is run as a shell or Perl script
respectively). This is done by passing 'cmd' to the command
interpreter determined by the COMSPEC environment variable (which
in a vanilla Windows system points to cmd.exe).
* X11() and x11() gain additional arguments to be more similar to
the Unix X11() device.
* file.rename() can work across volumes (by copy-and-delete).
* The main HTML help page now links to this CHANGES file.
(Suggested by Henrik Bengtsson.)
* strftime(format = "%z") now gives the timezone names used by the
Olson database and not those used by Windows.
* iconv(to = "ASCII") no longer transliterates, but iconv(to =
"ASCII//TRANSLIT") will. This makes tools::showNonASCII() work
the same way as on other platforms.
* readRegistry() can look at either the 32- or 64-bit view of the
Registry on 64-bit Windows.
INSTALLATION:
* The Tcl timezone files (3Mb on disc) are now an optional part of
the installation: they would be very rarely used with R.
* RSetReg.exe has been updated to (un)set the version-specific keys
in the same way as the main installer, and to have the optional
argument /Personal to (un)set the per-user rather than the
per-machine keys (which need administrative access).
* When building R, the recommended way is now to supply a file
R_HOME/src/gnuwin32/MkRules.local instead of editing MkRules:
there is now no MkRules file in the distribution, but one is
generated during the build process.
MkRules.local can be generated by copying and editing
MkRules.dist.
* The MSI installer defaults to an all-user (per machine) install
(by setting the ALLUSERS property to 1). This can be changed at
installation, and it can be built for a user-mode install (see
MkRules.dist).
BUG FIXES:
* Using ESC to interrupt a system() call could cause R to become
unstable.
* 0^1i (which should be complex NAN) was incorrect.
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.10.1 patched:
BUG FIXES:
* Some of the MDI toolbar buttons (e.g., "Open Script") did not
return the focus to the console if the user cancelled the action.
* system() (and hence shell()) did not always set the standard file
handles properly, so some programs would not run.
* setWinProgressBar() did not check the type of its 'title' and
'label' arguments and might have crashed if they were
mis-specified. It now does, thanks to a report by Greg Snow.
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.10.1:
BUG FIXES:
* The installer did not properly record help type choices in
R_HOME/etc/Rprofile.site.
* Rcmd INSTALL once again uses --no-restore, for consistency with
the Unix version and R 2.9.2.
* The HTML package index was not constructed properly when the
library path was specified with backslashes. (Patch submitted by
Gabor Grothendieck.)
CHANGES IN R VERSION 2.10.0:
NEW FEATURES:
* windows() now has a parameter fillOddEven (default TRUE), which
controls the mode used for polygon fills of self-intersecting
shapes.
* The functions arrangeWindows() and getWindowsHandles() have been
added to give more programmatic control to the appearance of
windows in an R session.
* A 'Windows' menu has been added to the SDI version of the R GUI,
and the corresponding menu in the MDI version has been expanded
slightly.
* The libpng library has been updated to version 1.2.40.
* The remaining Perl scripts build, check, Rprof, Sd2Rd in
R_HOME/bin now have extension .pl.
* Rcmd (or R CMD) can now run .sh (shell) and .pl (Perl) scripts
anywhere on the path (as well as .bat and .exe files as before).
PACKAGE INSTALLATION:
* Rcmd SHLIB (which is used by Rcmd INSTALL) now calls make without
a target, rather than target 'all'. This is now the same as on
Unix, and was announced in the NEWS file for 2.9.0.
* Help files are no longer zipped: rendering as text, HTML, latex
or examples is now done when needed.
Options --use-zip and --use-zip-help in R CMD INSTALL are no
longer available and --auto-zip only zips data (or not).
Help in packages installed under 2.9.x may not work correctly,
and a warning is given when such a package is attached by
library(). Re-installation of all packages is strongly
recommended (use update.packages(checkBuilt = TRUE)).
Binary packages are installed without CHM help if they contain it
(as those intended for 2.9.x may).
* It is possible to install source packages without Rtools provided
they have no compiled code and no configure.win or cleanup.win
script.
INSTALLATION:
* Support for memory profiling is enabled in a standard build (this
can be changed by editing config.h).
* CHM help is no longer supported.
* The help default for the standard installer is HTML help rather
than CHM help.
* The categories in the installers have been simplified. Now the
files to support installation of source packages are always
installed (they are now only 0.7Mb), and there are no longer
categories 'chtml', 'html/help', 'latex' and 'Rd'.
BUG FIXES:
* Rcmd open now works as documented: previously Rcmd open.exe was
required.
* cat(x, file=) in Rgui tried to interpret UTF-8-encoded strings
for the console rather than converting them to the native
encoding.

340
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/COPYING Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
received the program in object code or executable form with such
an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
special exception, the source code distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may
be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
`Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
Public License instead of this License.

7618
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/MD5 Executable file
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

97
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/README Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
THE BASIC R README
(See "doc/FAQ" and "doc/RESOURCES" for more detailed information
- these files are only in the tarballs)
(See "INSTALL" for help on installation)
1. INTRODUCTION
This directory contains the source code tree for R, which is a
language which is not entirely unlike (versions 3 and 4 of) the S
language developed at AT&T Bell Laboratories by Rick Becker, John
Chambers and Allan Wilks.
R is free software distributed under a GNU-style copyleft.
The core of R is an interpreted computer language with a syntax
superficially similar to C, but which is actually a "functional
programming language" with capabilities similar to Scheme. The
language allows branching and looping as well as modular programming
using functions. Most of the user-visible functions in R are written
in R, calling upon a smaller set of internal primitives. It is
possible for the user to interface to procedures written in C or
Fortran languages for efficiency, and also to write additional
primitives.
The R distribution contains functionality for a large number of
statistical procedures. Among these are: linear and generalized
linear models, nonlinear regression models, time series analysis,
classical parametric and nonparametric tests, clustering and
smoothing. There is also a large set of functions which provide a
flexible graphical environment for creating various kinds of data
presentations.
A package specification allows the production of loadable modules for
specific purposes, and several thousand contributed packages are made
available through the CRAN sites (see
https://CRAN.R-project.org/mirrors.html for the current members).
2. HISTORY
R was initially written by Robert Gentleman and Ross Ihaka of the
Statistics Department of the University of Auckland. In addition, a
large group of individuals has contributed to R by sending code and bug
reports.
Since mid-1997 there has been a core group who can modify the R source
code archive, listed in file doc/AUTHORS.
R 1.0.0 was released on 29 February 2000 and 2.0.0 on 4 October 2004.
R 3.0.0 came out on 3 April 2013.
This file has been minimally revised since the release of R 1.0.0.
3. PRESENT STATUS
The present version implements most of the functionality in the 1988
book "The New S Language" (the "Blue Book") and many of the
applications. In addition, we have implemented a large part of the
functionality from the 1992 book "Statistical Models in S" (the "White
Book") and the 1998 book "Programming with Data" (the "Green Book").
All the R functions have been documented in the form of help pages in
an "output independent" form which can be used to create versions for
HTML, PDF, text etc. A 1900+ page Reference Index (a collection of
most of the help pages: there is also a 3300+ page version with all
the help pages, including recommended packages) can be obtained in
PDF. The manual `An Introduction to R' provides a more user-friendly
starting point, and there is an FAQ, a draft `R Language Definition'
manual and more specialized manuals on admininstration, data
import/export and extending R. See INSTALL for instructions on how to
generate these documents.
4. GOALS
Our aim at the start of this project was to demonstrate that it was
possible to produce an S-like environment which did not suffer from
the memory-demands and performance problems which S has. Somewhat
later, we started to turn R into a "real" system, but unfortunately we
lost a large part of the efficiency advantage in the process, so have
revised the memory management mechanism and implemented delayed
loading of R objects. A lot of performance tuning has been done,
including the ability to use tuned linear-algebra libraries.
Longer-term goals include to explore new ideas: e.g. virtual objects
and component-based programming, and expanding the scope of existing
ones like formula-based interfaces. Further, we wish to get a handle
on a general approach to graphical user interfaces (preferably with
cross-platform portability), and to develop better 3-D and dynamic
graphics.
Sincerely,
The R Core Team.

226
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/README.R-4.0.0 Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,226 @@
R 4.0.0 for Windows
===================
This distribution contains a binary distribution of R- to run on
Windows XP and later (including 64-bit versions of Windows) on ix86
and x86_64 chips. It is designed to be as close as possible to the
implementation on Unix, but see the list of differences below. The
port was by Guido Masarotto, Brian Ripley and Duncan Murdoch.
Installation
============
The distribution is distributed as an installer R-4.0.0-win.exe. Just
run this for a Windows-style installer.
For more details, including command-line options for the installer and
how to uninstall, see the rw-FAQ. If you are reading this as part of
an installed version of R, that is both a file rw-FAQ in this directory
and a file doc\html\rw-FAQ.html.
Usage
=====
There are two versions of the R executable in R-4.0.0\bin\i386 (32-bit)
and R-4.0.0\bin\x64 (64-bit). By default only the first is
installed on 32-bit versions of Windows, and both on 64-bit OSes.
GUI:
Rgui.exe runs as a standard Windows GUI executable and provides an R
console in its own window. It takes the standard R command-line
arguments; these are most easily set by making a shortcut to
...\R-4.0.0\bin\i386\Rgui.exe (or x64\Rgui.exe) and adding the
arguments in the Target field. Set the 'Start in' field of the
shortcut to the directory you want to use as the working directory
(where workspaces and files are saved to and loaded from). The
installer creates a shortcut on the desktop for you (by default).
You have a choice of interface: SDI (separate windows) or MDI
(multiple child windows in one large window). MDI is the default:
select SDI by adding --sdi in the Target field: this can also be
selected from the installer.
Command-line editing is available: see Help | Console for details.
The menus provide shortcuts to some R commands such as help, help.start,
apropos, ls, load, save.image, search.
The 'load' menu items (Source R code, Display file, Load Workspace)
keep track of the directory that was last used, and start their dialog
boxes from that directory the next time they are used. That directory
can be made the working directory by the File | Change dir menu item.
All the 'save' menu items start dialog boxes at the current working
directory: this includes 'Save Workspace' and the various ways to save
graphics, as well as saving the workspace at the end of the session.
Note that a few of the text help files use accented Western European.
To see all the characters you must use an appropriate font
(European-language True Type fonts should be OK). To check if your
preferred font has these characters, try "help(text)" and look at the
examples.
TERMINAL/BATCH:
Rterm.exe will run from a command line such as a 'Command Prompt'
window running the standard shell, cmd.exe, as well as the ports of
bash and tcsh that we use. Its primary purpose is to allow batch
operation, but it does provide all the facilities needed for
interactive use, including command-line editing (see the file
README.Rterm).
Batch use: At its simplest, Rterm.exe can be used in a batch mode by
commands like
Rterm.exe --no-restore --no-save < infile > outfile 2>&1
although users will probably want to set up simple .bat or .cmd files
to run batch jobs. You can also use it via R CMD BATCH: see ?BATCH or
R CMD BATCH --help.
Use with ESS: You can use Rterm.exe to provide inferior R-mode in ESS
under NTEmacs. The pager is automatically set to "console" so text
help will be displayed in emacs buffers.
GRAPHICS:
The screen device is called windows(). This is launched
automatically, and can also be launched explicitly by windows() from
both Rgui.exe and Rterm.exe. A printer device can be opened using
win.print(), and graphs drawn as metafiles by win.metafile().
The graphics device pops up a separate window which has two menus. The
device's File menu allows saving or printing or to run dev.off().
The History menu allows the recording of plots. When plots have been
recorded they can be reviewed by PgUp and PgDn, saved and replaced.
Recording can be turned on automatically (the Recording item on the
list) or individual plots can be added (Add or the INS key).
The whole plot history can be saved to or retrieved from an R variable
in the global environment.
The format of recorded plots may change between R versions.
Recorded plots should NOT be used as a permanent
storage format for R plots.
There is only one graphics history shared by all the windows devices.
Customization
=============
Environment variables can be set as NAME=value at the end of the
command line, including in a shortcut. They can also be set (as
NAME=value lines) in the file .Renviron in the working directory, or
if that does not exist HOME\.Renviron.
Many aspects of the console (size, appearance, font, font size,
colours) can be customized by editing the file etc\Rconsole, and a
copy with a user's settings can be put in her HOME directory or in the
working directory. (The exact sequence is to search the directory
pointed to by the first found of the environment variables R_USER then
HOME, then the Windows "personal" directory (typically
'C:\Users\username\My Documents' on recent versions of Windows and
'C:\Documents and Settings\username\My Documents' on XP) then
{HOMEDRIVE}{HOMEPATH} then the working directory, finally R_HOME\etc.
This also applies to .Renviron and other uses of 'HOME' in our
documentation.) The file contains a description of the settings that
can be altered. See also ?Rconsole.
An alternative way to edit the Rconsole file is to use the GUI
preferences item on the Edit menu in Rgui.exe. This can change some
of the settings (for example colours, font and window sizes) on the
current running console.
The mapping between Windows fonts and the font number used in R's
graphics can be set by editing the file etc\Rdevga, and a copy with a
user's settings can be put in the HOME or working directory (see the
description of Rconsole). This mapping applies to both the screen
device and the printer device.
Many R defaults can be set in the file R_HOME\etc\Rprofile or a user's
file .Rprofile. In particular:
- The pager is set by options(pager=). The default is "internal"
which brings up a separate console-like window. The internal pager
can use a single window or a different window for each topic shown
(configurable in Rconsole). Other possibilities we have used are
"notepad" and "console" to list the files in the console (Rgui.exe)
or terminal window (Rterm.exe).
Adding packages
===============
Binaries for many packages are available under
CRAN/bin/windows/contrib. These are zip files which should be
unpacked in R-4.0.0\library. The simplest option is use the items on
the Packages menu to install from a zip file or to download from CRAN.
Private libraries of packages can be used and can be specified by the
environment variable R_LIBS. (Separate directories by ";" in this
version.) They will not be linked to HTML help. In more detail, to
use packages installed in directory R:\libraries\gm, set
R_LIBS=R:\libraries\gm
in the environment or your .Renviron file or on the command line, or
add the line
.libPaths("R:/libraries/gm")
to your .Rprofile or at the end of R_HOME\etc\Rprofile.
To install a package from source code you need the source-package
distribution installed from R-4.0.0-win32.exe (but not the R sources).
The 'R Installation and Administration' manual contains detailed
instructions.
Differences from Unix versions of R
===================================
- R can be interrupted by Esc in Rgui and by Ctrl-C or Ctrl-Break in Rterm:
Ctrl-C is used for copying in the GUI version. C-c C-c works
under NTemacs.
- Command-line editing is always available, but is simpler than
under readline-based input on Unix. For Rgui.exe, see the menu item
'Help | Console', for Rterm.exe the file README.Rterm.
- Paths to files can be specified with "/" or "\\".
- system() is enhanced here and does not automatically use a shell.
See its help page and that of shell().
- graphics device bmp() is available in this version.
Using package tcltk
===================
The package tcltk supports building graphical interfaces with Tcl/Tk.
"Support Files for Package tcltk" needs to be selected from the
installer for this to work; alternatively you can use an existing
installation of Tcl/Tk 8.6.x by following the instructions in the
rw-FAQ.
Building From Source
====================
See the 'R Installation and Adminstration' Manual
(doc\manual\R-admin.html).
Feedback
========
Please send comments and bug reports to
R-windows@r-project.org

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin/tcl86.dll Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin/tk86.dll Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.

276
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/ArrowButton.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,276 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ArrowButton</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ArrowButton</B>
- Button widget with an arrow shape.
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ArrowButton</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activebackground">-activebackground</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activeforeground">-activeforeground</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-armcommand">-armcommand</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-arrowbd">-arrowbd</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-arrowrelief">-arrowrelief</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-clean">-clean</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dir">-dir</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-disarmcommand">-disarmcommand</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipadx">-ipadx</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipady">-ipady</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
ArrowButton can be of two types following <B>type</B> option:
for <B>button</B> type, it is standard button with an arrow drawn on it;
for <B>arrow</B> type, it is an arrow like scrollbar's arrow.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-armcommand"><B>-armcommand</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton when mouse button 1 is pressed
over the ArrowButton. When <B>repeatdelay</B> or <B>repeatinterval</B> option is positive
integer, this command is repeatedly called if mouse pointer is over the button and until
mouse button 1 is released.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-arrowbd"><B>-arrowbd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
When ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>, specifies the border width of the
arrow. Must be 1 or 2.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-arrowrelief"><B>-arrowrelief</B></A></DT>
<DD>
When ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>, specifies the relief of the arrow.
Must be <B>raised</B> or <B>sunken</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-clean"><B>-clean</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a level of quality, between 0 and 2, for the arrow.
If 0, the arrow is drawn with its maximum width and height.
If 1, the base of arrow is arranged to be odd to have same edges.
If 2, the base of arrow is arranged to be odd and the orthogonal to be (base+1)/2 to
have 'straight' diagonal for edges.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton. This command
is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the ArrowButton
window.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dir"><B>-dir</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the direction of the arrow: <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B>, <B>left</B>
or <B>right</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-disarmcommand"><B>-disarmcommand</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton when mouse button 1 is released.
This command is called even if pointer is not over the ArrowButton, and always before
the command specified by <B>command</B> option.
It is typically used in conjuntion with <B>armcommand</B>, <B>repeatdelay</B> and
<B>repeatinterval</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a desired height for the ArrowButton. The value is in screen units.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipadx"><B>-ipadx</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a minimun pad between the ArrowButton border and the right and left side
of the arrow. The value is in screen units.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipady"><B>-ipady</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a minimun pad between the ArrowButton border and the top and bottom side
of the arrow. The value is in screen units.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies one of three states for the ArrowButton: <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>,
or <B>disabled</B>.
<DL><DT>If ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>button</I>:</DT>
<DD>In normal state the ArrowButton is displayed using the
<B>foreground</B> and <B>background</B> options. The active state is
typically used when the pointer is over the ArrowButton. In active state
the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>activeforeground</B> and
<B>activebackground</B> options. In disabled state the <B>disabledforeground</B> and
<B>background</B> options determine how the ArrowButton is displayed.
</DD>
<DT>If ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>:</DT>
<DD>Only colors of arrow change. The background of ArrowButton is always
displayed using <B>troughcolor</B> option.
In normal state the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>background</B> option. The active
state is typically used when the pointer is over the ArrowButton. In active state
the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>activebackground</B> option. In disabled state
the ArrowButton is displayed with a dark stipple.
</DD>
</DL>
Disabled state means that the ArrowButton
should be insensitive: the default bindings will refuse to activate
the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Determines the type of the ArrowButton: <B>button</B> for standard button look, or
<B>arrow</B> scrollbar's arrow look.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a desired width for the ArrowButton. The value is in screen units.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
</DT><DD>
If ArrowButton <B>state</B> is not disabled, this invoke the commands of the button.
ArrowButton is redisplayed with active color and sunken relief, and
<B>armcommand</B> is called. Then ArrowButton is redisplayed with
normal color and its defined relief, and <B>disarmcommand</B> then <B>command</B>
are called.
<P><B>invoke</B> is called when ArrowButton has input focus and user press the space bar.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

228
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/BWidget.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,228 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>BWidget</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<IMG SRC="constr.gif" WIDTH="40" HEIGHT="40"> Under construction ...<BR>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>BWidget</B>
- Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#XLFDfont"><B>XLFDfont</B></A>
<I>cmd</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#assert"><B>assert</B></A>
<I>exp</I>
?<I>msg</I>?
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#badOptionString"><B>badOptionString</B></A>
<I>type</I>
<I>value</I>
<I>list</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#bindMouseWheel"><B>bindMouseWheel</B></A>
<I>widget</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#classes"><B>classes</B></A>
<I>class</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#clonename"><B>clonename</B></A>
<I>menu</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#focus"><B>focus</B></A>
<I>option</I>
<I>path</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#get3dcolor"><B>get3dcolor</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>bgcolor</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#getname"><B>getname</B></A>
<I>name</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#grab"><B>grab</B></A>
<I>option</I>
<I>path</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#inuse"><B>inuse</B></A>
<I>class</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#library"><B>library</B></A>
<I>class</I> ?<i>class ...</i>?
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#lreorder"><B>lreorder</B></A>
<I>list</I>
<I>neworder</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#parsetext"><B>parsetext</B></A>
<I>text</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#place"><B>place</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>w</I>
<I>h</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#write"><B>write</B></A>
<I>filename</I> ?<i>mode</i>?
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#wrongNumArgsString"><B>wrongNumArgsString</B></A>
<I>string</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
Description text
</P>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="XLFDfont">BWidget::<B>XLFDfont</B></A>
<I>cmd</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="assert">BWidget::<B>assert</B></A>
<I>exp</I>
?<I>msg</I>?
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="badOptionString">BWidget::<B>badOptionString</B></A>
<I>type</I>
<I>value</I>
<I>list</I>
</DT><DD>
Return a proper error string for a <i>value</i> of <i>type</i> that doesn't
match <i>list</i>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindMouseWheel">BWidget::<B>bindMouseWheel</B></A>
<I>widget</I>
</DT><DD>
Bind the given <i>widget</i> with the standard mouse wheel bindings.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="classes">BWidget::<B>classes</B></A>
<I>class</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns a list of classes needed by the given <i>class</i>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="clonename">BWidget::<B>clonename</B></A>
<I>menu</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="focus">BWidget::<B>focus</B></A>
<I>option</I>
<I>path</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="get3dcolor">BWidget::<B>get3dcolor</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>bgcolor</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getname">BWidget::<B>getname</B></A>
<I>name</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="grab">BWidget::<B>grab</B></A>
<I>option</I>
<I>path</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="inuse">BWidget::<B>inuse</B></A>
<I>class</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns true or false if the given <i>class</i> is being used by the
current running program.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="library">BWidget::<B>library</B></A>
<I>class</I>
?<i>class ...</i>?
</DT><DD>
Returns a string of code that contains all the libraries needed to
use the widgets given by <i>class</i>. Each class's code and the
code of its dependent classes is appended to the string and returned.
This is mostly useful for saving BWidgets to another project.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="lreorder">BWidget::<B>lreorder</B></A>
<I>list</I>
<I>neworder</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="parsetext">BWidget::<B>parsetext</B></A>
<I>text</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="place">BWidget::<B>place</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>w</I>
<I>h</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Used to position and resize the widget specified by
<I>path</I>. <I>w</I> and <I>h</I> are used to specify the requested
width and height of the <I>path</I> widget for use by <B>wm
geometry</B> (set to 0 to use current values). The placement of the widget relative to other widgets or
the screen is controlled by additional arguments:
<DL>
<DT><B>at</B> <I>x</I> <I>y</I></DT>
<DD>Place the widget specified by the <I>path</I> argument at screen
position x,y. See <B>wm geometry</B> for information about window
placement values.</DD>
<DT><B>center</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
<DD>Place the <I>path</I> widget centered against <I>widget</I> or against the
root widget if <I>widget</I> is not given.</DD>
<DT><B>left</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
<DT><B>right</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
<DD>Place the <I>path</I> widget either left or right of the
reference widget (or the root widget if <I>widget</I> is not
specified). If the reference widget's position is such that the newly
placed window might be obscured then the opposite side will be tried.</DD>
<DT><B>above</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
<DT><B>below</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
<DD>As for left/right above, this option causes the widget to be
placed either above or below the reference widget with the opposite
placement being attempted if the newly placed widget will not be visible.
</DL>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="write">BWidget::<B>write</B></A>
<I>filename</I>
?<i>mode</i>?
</DT><DD>
Writes the currently used set of BWidget class code to the given
<i>filename</i>. All the code necessary to run the BWidgets
currently in use is written to the file. This is mostly useful
for saving BWidget code to another project as a single file instead
of the entire BWidget package.
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><A NAME="wrongNumArgsString">BWidget::<B>wrongNumArgsString</B></A>
<I>string</I>
</DT>
<DD>
Returns a standard error string for the wrong number of arguments.
<i>string</i> is appended to the standard string.
</DD>
</DL>
</BODY></HTML>

307
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/Button.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,307 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Button</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Button</B>
- Button widget with enhanced options
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Button</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activebackground">-activebackground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activeforeground">-activeforeground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
</TD>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
</TD>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-compound">-compound</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-style">-style</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-armcommand">-armcommand</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-disarmcommand">-disarmcommand</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-name">-name</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-relief">-relief</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-underline">-underline</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
Button widget extends the Tk button with new options.
<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options,
a new relief style, callback for <B>arm</B>/<B>disarm</B>, and
<B>repeatdelay</B>/<B>repeatinterval</B> options has been added.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-armcommand"><B>-armcommand</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button when mouse button 1 is pressed over the
Button. When <B>repeatdelay</B> or <B>repeatinterval</B> option is positive integer,
this command is repeatedly called if mouse pointer is over the Button and until mouse
button 1 is released.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button. This command
is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the Button
window.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies one of three states for the default ring: <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>,
or <B>disabled</B>. In active state, the button is drawn with the platform specific
appearance for a default button. In normal state, the button is drawn with the platform
specific appearance for a non-default button, leaving enough space to draw the default
button appearance. The normal and active states will result in buttons of the same size.
In disabled state, the button is drawn with the non-default button appearance without
leaving space for the default appearance. The disabled state may result
in a smaller button than the active state.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-disarmcommand"><B>-disarmcommand</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button when mouse button 1 is released.
This command is called even if pointer is not over the Button, and always before
the command specified by <B>command</B> option.
It is typically used in conjuntion with <B>armcommand</B>, <B>repeatdelay</B> and
<B>repeatinterval</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a desired height for the Button.
If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the Button then the value is in
screen units;
for text it is in lines of text.
If this option isn't specified, the Button's desired height is computed
from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.<BR>
Option not available when widget is <I>themed</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-name"><B>-name</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a standard name for the button. If the option <B>*<I>name</I>Name</B> is
found in the resources database, then <B>text</B> and <B>underline</B> options
are extracted from its value.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-relief"><B>-relief</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget. Acceptable values are standard values for
button relief (<B>raised</B>, <B>sunken</B>, <B>flat</B>, <B>ridge</B>, <B>solid</B>, and <B>groove</B>) and <B>link</B>, which specifies that button relief is <B>flat</B> when pointer
is outside the button and <B>raised</B> when pointer is inside.<BR>
This option has only the following effect if the widget is <I>themed</I>:
The value <B>link</B> used a style <B>Toolbutton</B> while any other value uses the standard effect.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies one of three states for the Button: <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>,
or <B>disabled</B>. In normal state the Button is displayed using the
<B>foreground</B> and <B>background</B> options. The active state is
typically used when the pointer is over the Button. In active state
the Button is displayed using the <B>activeforeground</B> and
<B>activebackground</B> options. Disabled state means that the Button
should be insensitive: the default bindings will refuse to activate
the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
In this state the <B>disabledforeground</B> and
<B>background</B> options determine how the Button is displayed.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-underline"><B>-underline</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the label of the button.
0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed, 1 to the next character,
and so on.
<BR>The binding <B>&lt;Alt-<I>char</I>&gt;</B> is automatically set on the toplevel
of the Button to call Button::<B>setfocus</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the Button then the value is in
screen units;
for text it is in characters.
If this option isn't specified, the Button's desired width is computed
from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
</DT><DD>
If Button <B>state</B> is not disabled, this invoke the commands of the Button.
Button is redisplayed with active color and sunken relief, and
<B>armcommand</B> is called. Then Button is redisplayed with
normal color and its defined relief, and <B>disarmcommand</B> then <B>command</B>
are called.
<P><B>invoke</B> is called when Button has input focus and user press the space bar.
</DD></DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">BINDINGS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Invoke"><I>&lt;&lt;Invoke&gt;&gt;</I></A>
</DT><DD>
Invoke the <B>invoke</B> widget command.
</DD></DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
</BODY></HTML>

266
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/ButtonBox.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ButtonBox</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ButtonBox</B>
- Set of buttons with horizontal or vertical layout
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ButtonBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-homogeneous">-homogeneous</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-orient">-orient</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-pady">-pady</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-spacing">-spacing</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
<i>index</i> ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
<I>index</I>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
ButtonBox layouts Button horizontally or vertically.
Some commands take an <I>index</I> as argument indicating on which
Button it work. This index may be specified in any of the following forms:
<P>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT>
<I>number</I>
<DD>
Specifies the Button numerically, where 0 corresponds
to the first added Button, 1 to the next, and so on.
<DT>
<B>end</B> or <B>last</B>
<DD>
Indicates the last item added.
<DT><B>default</B>
<DD>
Indicates the default Button.
<DT>
<i>name</i>
<DD>
Indicates the button whose <b>-name</b> option is <i>name</i>.
<DT>
<i>text</i>
<DD>
Indicates the button whose <b>-text</b> option is <i>text</i>.
</DL>
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-background"><B>-background</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a default background color for all added buttons and for the frame.<BR>
For <I>themed</I> wigets, the button color is not set.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the default button of the button box. The value is an integer
referencing the n-th added button, starting from 0.
If this value is -1 (the default), all button wil be drawn with their -default
option set to disabled, and this value can not be changed. <BR>If this value is
not -1, the associated button is drawn with -default option set to active and
the others are drawn with -default option set to normal. The value can be changed
by configure.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-homogeneous"><B>-homogeneous (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies wether or not buttons must have the same width for horizontal layout.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-orient"><B>-orient (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the orientation of the button box. If this option is <B>horizontal</B>
(the default), buttons are added from top to bottom.
If this option is <B>vertical</B>, buttons are added from left to right.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a default value for the -padx option of all added buttons.<BR>
Option has no effect for <I>themed</I> wigets.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-pady"><B>-pady</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a default value for the -pady option of all added buttons.<BR>
Option has no effect for <I>themed</I> wigets.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-spacing"><B>-spacing</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the default spacing between buttons. This value can be changed before each
call to <B>add</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a state for all the buttons in the button box. Can be any state supported by buttons.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Add a button to the button box.
<P>
See <A HREF="Button.html"><B>Button</B></A> for description of options.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Delete the button at <i>index</i> from the button box.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Return the numerical index corresponding to the item.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
<I>index</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Insert a new button into the button box before the given index.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Invoke the Button given by <I>index</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
<I>index</I>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the
item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
returns a list describing the current options for the item.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Set the focus to the Button given by <I>index</I>.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

410
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/ComboBox.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,410 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ComboBox</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ComboBox</B>
- ComboBox widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ComboBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-command</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragenabled</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragendcmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragevent</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-draginitcmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragtype</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropcmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropenabled</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropovercmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-droptypes</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-editable</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-show</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-takefocus</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-xscrollcommand</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-autocomplete">-autocomplete</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-autopost">-autopost</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-bwlistbox">-bwlistbox</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-expand">-expand</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-hottrack">-hottrack</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-images">-images</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-listboxwidth">-listboxwidth</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-modifycmd">-modifycmd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-postcommand">-postcommand</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-values">-values</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#clearvalue"><B>clearvalue</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#get"><B>get</B></A></DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getentry"><B>getentry</B></A></DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getlistbox"><B>getlistbox</B></A></DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getvalue"><B>getvalue</B></A></DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#icursor"><B>icursor</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#post"><B>post</B></A></DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setvalue"><B>setvalue</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#unpost"><B>unpost</B></A></DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
ComboBox widget enables the user to select a value among a list given by
the <B>values</B> option. The list of possible values can be popped by
pressing the ArrowButton or by clicking in the entry when <B>editable</B>
value of the ComboBox is <B>false</B>.<BR> If <B>editable</B> value of the
ComboBox is <B>true</B> and the entry has the focus, the user can press the
top and bottom arrow keys to modify its value. If the current value exactly
match a value in the list, then the previous (for top arrow key) or then
next (for bottom arrow key) value in the list is displayed. If the current
value match the beginning of a value in the list, then this value is
displayed. If the current value doesnt match anything, then the first
value is displayed.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL>
<DT><A NAME="-autocomplete"><B>-autocomplete</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies whether or not the combobox should attempt to auto-complete
the value in the entry field as the user types. If true, the combobox
will fill in a value that it finds in its value list as the user types
into the entry.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><A NAME="-autopost"><B>-autopost</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies whether or not the combobox should post the drop down as
the user types. If true, the combobox will post and scroll to the
entry that most closely matches the user entry.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><A NAME="-bwlistbox"><B>-bwlistbox</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies that the combobox should use a BWidget listbox in its drop
down instead of the standard Tk option. This option is enabled by
default if the <b>-images</b> option is not empty.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-expand"><B>-expand</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the value expansion behavior for the window. It must be
<B>none</B> (default) or <B>tab</B>. If <B>tab</B> is specified, then
a Tab binding is added to attempt to expand the current value based on
the other values in <B>-values</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the window, in lines. If zero or less,
then the desired height for the window is made just large enough to hold
all the elements in the listbox.
</DD>
<DL>
<DT><A NAME="-hottrack"><B>-hottrack</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The selection in the drop down listbox will follow the mouse cursor
as it moves.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><A NAME="-images"><B>-images</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A list of images that correspond to the <b>-values</b> option. Each
image will be drawn next to its value in the drop down. This option
enables the <b>-bwlistbox</b> by default as it is needed to display
images.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><A NAME="-listboxwidth"><B>-listboxwidth</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the width of the listbox in the drop down. Defaults to the
same size as the combobox.
</DD>
</DL>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-modifycmd"><B>-modifycmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a Tcl command called when the user modify the value of the ComboBox by selecting it in the listbox or pressing arrow key.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-postcommand"><B>-postcommand</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a Tcl command called before the listbox of the ComboBox is mapped.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-values"><B>-values</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the values to display in the listbox of the ComboBox.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Set bindings on the entry widget.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="clearvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>clearvalue</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Clears the current text of the ComboBox.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no
<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
options for <I>pathName</I>. If <I>option</I> is specified with no
<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named
<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more
<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the
given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command
returns an empty string. <I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted
by the creation command. Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="get"><I>pathName</I> <B>get</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current contents of the entry.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getentry"><I>pathName</I> <B>getentry</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Returns the path to the contained entry widget.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getlistbox"><I>pathName</I> <B>getlistbox</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Returns the path to the listbox in the drop down.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>getvalue</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Returns the index of the current text of the ComboBox in the list of values,
or -1 if it doesn't match any value.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="icursor"><I>pathName</I> <B>icursor</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the
character given by <i>index</i>. Returns an empty string.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="post"><I>pathName</I> <B>post</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Post the drop down.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>setvalue</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Set the text of the ComboBox to the value indicated by <I>index</I> in the list of values.
<I>index</I> may be specified in any of the following forms:
<P>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT>
<B>last</B>
<DD>
Specifies the last element of the list of values.
<DT><B>first</B>
<DD>
Specifies the first element of the list of values.
<DT>
<B>next</B>
<DD>
Specifies the element following the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
of values.
<DT><B>previous</B>
<DD>
Specifies the element preceding the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
of values.
<DT>
@<I>number</I>
<DD>
Specifies the integer index in the list of values.
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="unpost"><I>pathName</I> <B>unpost</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Unpost the drop down.
</DD></DL>
<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR>
When Entry of the ComboBox has the input focus, it has the following bindings, in addition
to the default Entry bindings:
<UL>
<LI>Page up set the value of the ComboBox to the first value.
<LI>Page down set the value of the ComboBox to the last value.
<LI>Arrow up set the value of the ComboBox to the previous value.
<LI>Arrow down set the value of the ComboBox to the next value.
<LI>If <B>-autopost</B> is enabled, Escape unposts the listbox.
</UL>
If the listbox is not mapped and ComboBox is not editable or disabled,
mouse button 1 on the Entry cause the listbox to popup, as if the user press the ArrowButton.
</BODY></HTML>

328
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/Dialog.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,328 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Dialog</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Dialog</B>
- Dialog abstraction with custom buttons
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Dialog</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="ButtonBox.html">OPTIONS from <B>ButtonBox</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-homogeneous</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-spacing</TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-anchor">-anchor</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-cancel">-cancel</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-geometry">-geometry</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-image">-image</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-modal">-modal</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-place">-place</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-separator">-separator</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-transient">-transient</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#draw"><B>draw</B></A>
?<I>focus</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#enddialog"><B>enddialog</B></A>
<I>result</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
<I>index</I>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#withdraw"><B>withdraw</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
Dialog widget enables the user to create a dialog box.
Some commands take an <I>index</I> as argument indicating on which
Button it work. This index is the same specified for equivalent ButtonBox command:
<P>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT>
<I>number</I>
<DD>
Specifies the Button numerically, where 0 corresponds
to the first added Button, 1 to the next, and so on.
<DT>
<B>end</B> or <B>last</B>
<DD>
Indicates the last item added.
<DT><B>default</B>
<DD>
Indicates the default Button.
</DL>
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-anchor"><B>-anchor (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the anchor point of the ButtonBox.
Must be one of <B>w</B>, <B>e</B>, <B>n</B>, <B>s</B> or <B>c</B>.
If <B>side</B> option is set to <I>top</I> or <I>bottom</I>,
<B>anchor</B> values <I>n</I>, <I>s</I> and <I>c</I> have the same effect.
If <B>side</B> option is set to <I>left</I> or <I>right</I>,
<B>anchor</B> values <I>w</I>, <I>e</I> and <I>c</I> have the same effect.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-bitmap"><B>-bitmap (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a bitmap to display at the left of the user frame.
<B>image</B> option override <B>bitmap</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-cancel"><B>-cancel</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the number of the cancel button of the Dialog. When user presses Esc or the windows close button,
this button is invoked.<BR>
If set to <B>-1</B>, Esc does not invoke anything.
The window close button <I>destroys</I> the dialog in this case and returns <B>-1</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the number of the default button of the Dialog.
When user press Return in the Dialog, this button is invoked.
</DD>
</DL>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-geometry"><B>-geometry</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Set the <B>geometry</B> used when method <B>draw</B> is called.
See <B>wm geometry</B> for a parameter description.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-image"><B>-image (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies an image to display at the left of the user frame.
<B>image</B> option override <B>bitmap</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-modal"><B>-modal</B></A></DT>
<DD>
This option must be <B>none</B>, <B>local</B> or <B>global</B>. The value of this option
specifies the grab mode of the dialog and how works Dialog::<B>draw</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is placed relative to its parent. If empty, it is
placed relative to the root window. Also see <B>place</B> option.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-place"><B>-place</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies where to draw the Dialog toplevel relative to the dialog's
parent. Must be one of <B>none</B>, <B>center</B>, <B>left</B>, <B>right</B>,
<B>above</B>, <B>below</B>. Default value of <B>place</B> is <I>center</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-separator"><B>-separator (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies wether or not to draw a separator between the user frame and the ButtonBox.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies where to draw the ButtonBox relative to the user frame. Must be one of
<B>top</B>, <B>left</B>, <B>bottom</B> or <B>right</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Title of the Dialog toplevel.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-transient"><B>-transient (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies if the Dialog Toplevel should be a transient window or not. Default
value of <B>transient</B> is <I>true</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Add a button to the button box of the dialog box. Default -command option is
<I>Dialog::enddialog $path index</I> where <I>index</I> is number of button added.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="draw"><I>pathName</I> <B>draw</B></A>
?<I>focus</I>?
</DT><DD>
This command draw the Dialog, and set grab to it following <B>modal</B> option.
If <B>modal</B> option is set to <I>none</I>, the command returns immediatly
an empty string. In all other case, the command returns when Dialog::<B>enddialog</B>
is called or when Dialog is destroyed.
The return value is the result argument of Dialog::<B>enddialog</B> or -1 if it is destroyed.
<P>
By default, the focus is set to the default button referenced by <B>default</B> option,
or to the toplevel of Dialog if no default button has been set.
If <I>focus</I> is present, it must be a pathname, or an index to a button.
Initial focus is set on this pathname or corresponding button.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="enddialog"><I>pathName</I> <B>enddialog</B></A>
<I>result</I>
</DT><DD>
This command is typically called within a command of a button to make Dialog::<B>draw</B>
return.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Returns the pathname of the user window.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Invoke the Button given by <I>index</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
<I>index</I>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the
item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
returns a list describing the current options for the item.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Set the focus to the Button given by <I>index</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="withdraw"><I>pathName</I> <B>withdraw</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Call this command to hide the dialog box.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

141
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/DragSite.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>DragSite</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>DragSite</B>
- Commands set for Drag facilities
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>type</I>
<I>event</I>
</DD>
<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A>
<I>path</I>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#setdrag"><B>setdrag</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>subpath</I>
<I>initcmd</I>
<I>endcmd</I>
?<I>force</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
Commands of this namespace enable user to define a BWidget or a Tk widget as a drag site.
</P>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DragSite::<B>include</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>type</I>
<I>event</I>
</DT><DD>
This command provides a simple way to include options relatives to a drag site into
BWidget resources definition.
It includes the options needed for <B>register</B>: <I>-dragevent</I>, initialized to
<I>event</I>, <I>-draginitcmd</I> and <I>-dragendcmd</I>, initialized to empty string,
and two new options:
<TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
<TR><TD><I>-dragenabled</I><TD>Specifies wether or not drag is active (initialized to 0)
<TR><TD><I>-dragtype</I><TD>Default or alternate dragged data type (initialized to <I>type</I>)
</TABLE>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DragSite::<B>register</B></A>
<I>path</I>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>
This command is used to declare <I>path</I> as a drag site. Options are:
<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Command called when drag terminates (ie when user release drag icon).
This command is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the drag source (the widget itself),
<LI>the pathname of the drop target,
<LI>the operation,
<LI>the type of the dragged data,
<LI>the dragged data,
<LI>result of the drop (result of the call to <B>-dropcmd</B> of the target),
</UL>
If the drop does not occurs, the target and the operation are empty string and the result
is 0.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Command called when drag initiates. When the event of option <B>dragevent</B> occurs on
<I>path</I>, this command is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>pathname of the drag source (<I>path</I>),
<LI>root x-coordinate of pointer,
<LI>root y-coordinate of pointer,
<LI>a toplevel created to represent dragged data. When returning, if it
has no children, a bitmap is automatically displayed.
</UL>
If the command returns an empty string, then the drag will be
suppressed. Otherwise the command must return a list containing three
elements:
<UL>
<LI>the type of the data,
<LI>the list of acceptable basic operations (<B>copy</B>, <B>move</B> and <B>link</B>)
<LI>and the data.
</UL>
Note that even if <B>copy</B> does not appear in the list of basic
operation, it is considered as an acceptable operation, since
<B>copy</B> semantic does not modify the drag source.
</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setdrag">DragSite::<B>setdrag</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>subpath</I>
<I>initcmd</I>
<I>endcmd</I>
?<I>force</I>?
</DT><DD>
This command provides a simple way to call <B>register</B> during a BWidget creation or
configuration.
<UL>
<LI><I>path</I> is the pathname of the BWidget,
<LI><I>subpath</I> is the pathname of the tk widget where drag event occurs,
<LI><I>initcmd</I> BWidget command for <I>drag-init</I> event,
<LI><I>endcmd</I> BWidget command for <I>drag-end</I> event,
<LI><I>force</I> specifies wether or not to call <B>register</B> whenever no option value has
changed (0 by default - for BWidget configuration, use 1 for BWidget creation).
</UL>
<B>setdrag</B> verifies the modification flag of options <B>dragenabled</B> and
<B>dragevent</B> and calls <B>register</B> if needed according to the options values and
<I>initcmd</I> and <I>endcmd</I> arguments. <B>draginitcmd</B> and <B>dragendcmd</B> are not
taken from options of widget because they are considered as user command, called by
BWidget implementation of <I>drag-init</I> and <I>drag-end</I> events.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

266
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/DropSite.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>DropSite</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>DropSite</B>
- Commands set for Drop facilities
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>types</I>
</DD>
<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A>
<I>path</I>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setcursor"><B>setcursor</B></A>
<I>cursor</I>
</DD>
<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setdrop"><B>setdrop</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>subpath</I>
<I>dropover</I>
<I>drop</I>
?<I>force</I>?
</DD>
<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setoperation"><B>setoperation</B></A>
<I>op</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
Commands of this namespace enable user to define a BWidget or a Tk widget as a drop site.
A drop site is composed of the type of object that can be dropped and associated operation,
a command called when drop occurs, and a command when an object is dragged over the widget.
A drop site must have at least one type of acceptable object and a drop command.
</P>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DropSite::<B>include</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>types</I>
</DT><DD>
This command provides a simple way to include options relatives to a drop site into
BWidget resources definition.
It includes the options needed for <B>register</B>, <I>-dropovercmd</I> and <I>-dropcmd</I>,
initialized to empty string, and <I>-droptypes</I>, initialized to <I>types</I>,
and one new option:
<TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
<TR><TD><I>-dropenabled</I><TD>Specifies wether or not drop is active (initialized to 0)
</TABLE>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DropSite::<B>register</B></A>
<I>path</I>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>
This command is used to declare <I>path</I> as a drop site. Options are:
<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
This command is called when user release the drag icon over a valid
drop target widget. Arguments passed to the command are:
<UL>
<LI>pathname of the drop target (the widget itself),
<LI>pathname of the drag source,
<LI>root x-coordinate of the pointer,
<LI>root y-coordinate of the pointer,
<LI>operation,
<LI>type of the dragged data,
<LI>dragged data.
</UL>
Its return values is passed as a result to the <B>-dragendcmd</B>
command of the drag source widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
This command can be used to provide a dynamic drag while <I>drag-over</I> events.
While a drag occurs, events &lt;Enter&gt;, &lt;Motion&gt; and &lt;Leave&gt; are catched.
Arguments passed to the command are:
<UL>
<LI>pathname of the drop target (the widget itself),
<LI>pathname of the drag source,
<LI>event over the drop target: <I>enter</I>, <I>motion</I> or <I>leave</I>,
<LI>root x-coordinate of the pointer,
<LI>root y-coordinate of the pointer,
<LI>operation,
<LI>type of the dragged data,
<LI>dragged data.
</UL>
Command must the new status of the drag:
<UL>
<LI>0 if widget refuse this drag. Command will not be recalled on motion/leave event.
<LI>1 if widget accept this drag. Command will not be recalled on motion/leave event.
<LI>2 if widget refuse this drag. Command will be recalled on each motion event to reevaluate.
<LI>3 if widget accept this drag. Command will be recalled on each motion event to reevaluate.
</UL>
Here is a list of events and associated actions on a DropSite widget. This example
assumes that dragged data type is valid for the drop target.
<B>status</B> is the status of the drag on a DropSite. Its value is:
<BR><BR>
<TABLE BORDER CELLSPACING=1 CELLPADDING=4>
<TR>
<TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Event</TD>
<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Old status</TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Action</TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">New status</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Enter&gt;</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>if DropSite has <B>dropovercmd</B>, call it with <I>enter</I></FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>result of <B>dropovercmd</B></FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>else</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>1</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Motion&gt;</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>0 or 1</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>unchanged</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>2 or 3</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>motion</I></FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>result of <B>dropovercmd</B></FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Leave&gt;</FONT>&nbsp;</TD>
<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>0 or 1</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>2 or 3</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>leave</I></FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=4>
<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Drop&gt;</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>0</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=4>
<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>1</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropcmd</B> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>2</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>leave</I> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>3</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropcmd</B> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
<BR>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a list {<I>type</I> <I>oplist</I> ?<I>type</I> <I>oplist</I>? ...} of acceptable
types and associated operations for the drop target.
For each type, <I>oplist</I> is a list
{<I>descops</I> <I>mod</I> ?<I>descops</I> <I>mod</I>? ...} describing operations and
modifier keys for these operations.
<I>descops</I> describe an operation. It can be a predefined operations (<B>copy</B>,
<B>move</B> or <B>link</B>) or a new user defined operation, of the form {<I>subop</I>
<B>baseop</B> ?<I>bitmap</I>?}.
<I>subop</I> is the name given to the sub operation, <I>baseop</I> is the name of the
base operation (<B>copy</B>, <B>move</B> or <B>link</B>) and <I>bitmap</I> is a bitmap
to display for the operation.
<BR>If <I>bitmap</I> is empty, the default bitmap of the base operation is used for the
sub operation.
<BR><I>subop</I> can be a base operation, in order to change the bitmap of a base operation.
In this case, <I>baseop</I> must be empty or equal to <I>subop</I>.
<BR><I>mod</I> is the modifer key for the operation. It can be:
<UL>
<LI><B>none</B> to specify that no modifier key is pressed. This modifier can only be used
with a sub operation named <B>default</B> (and vice versa), which has the behaviour of not
display any bitmap operation. For all type, if the modifier <B>none</B> is not given, it is
automatically associated to the <B>default</B> sub operation of a <B>copy</B> base operation.
<LI><B>program</B> to specifies a sub operation accessible only by <B>DropSite::setoperation</B>.
<LI>A list combining <B>shift</B>, <B>control</B> and <B>alt</B>, which means their
corresponding key.
</UL>
</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setcursor">DropSite::<B>setcursor</B></A>
<I>cursor</I>
</DT><DD>
This command can be used within the script <B>dragovercmd</B>. It is usefull to provide
visual effect about the state of the drag.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setdrop">DropSite::<B>setdrop</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>subpath</I>
<I>dropover</I>
<I>drop</I>
?<I>force</I>?
</DT><DD>
This command provides a simple way to call <B>register</B> during a BWidget creation or
configuration.
<UL>
<LI><I>path</I> is the pathname of the BWidget,
<LI><I>subpath</I> is the pathname of the tk widget where drag event occurs,
<LI><I>dropover</I> is a command for <I>drag-over</I> event,
<LI><I>drop</I> is a command for <I>drop</I> event,
<LI><I>force</I> specifies wether or not to call <B>register</B> whenever no option value
has changed (0 by default - for BWidget configuration, use 1 for BWidget creation).
</UL>
<B>setdrop</B> verifies the modification flag of options <B>dropenabled</B> and
<B>droptypes</B> and calls <B>register</B> if needed according to the options values and
<I>dropover</I> and <I>drop</I> arguments. <B>dropovercmd</B> and <B>dropcmd</B> are not
taken from options of widget because they are considered as user command, called by
BWidget implementation of <I>drag-over</I> and <I>drop</I> events.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setoperation">DropSite::<B>setoperation</B></A>
<I>op</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

251
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/DynamicHelp.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>DynamicHelp</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>DynamicHelp</B>
- Provide help to Tk widget or BWidget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
<i>widget</i> ?<I>option value ...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
<i>widget</i>
</DD>
<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>type</I>
</DD>
<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>type</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#sethelp"><B>sethelp</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>subpath</I>
?<I>force</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
Description text
</P>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add">DynamicHelp::<B>add</B></A>
?<I>option value ...</I>?
</DT><DD>
<p>
This command adds dynamic help to the given <i>widget</i>.
</p>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If specified, refers to a command to execute to get the help
text to display. The command must return a string to display.
If the command returns an empty string, no help is displayed.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add-index"><B>-index</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If specified, refers to a menu index to bind the help to instead of
a widget. If <b>-type</b> is not menu, this option is ignored.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add-item"><B>-item</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If specified, refers to an item or tag on a canvas widget or to a tag
in a text widget to bind the help to instead of to a widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the type of help. Can be:
<b>balloon</b>, <b>variable</b> or <b>menu</b>.
Default is <b>balloon</b>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The text to be displayed as help.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add-variable"><B>-variable</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a variable name to which the help string will be
written. Some other widget (e.g., a status bar) is
responsible for displaying this variable.
</DD>
</DL>
<p>
Creating dynamic help for a menu is a two-step process. The menu
itself must first be added and then each menu entry must be added
separately. Here is a brief example.
</p>
<TABLE BORDER=2 CELLSPACING=2 WIDTH="80%">
<TR><TD><PRE>
<FONT COLOR=red><I># create menu</I></FONT>
menu .m -type menubar
<FONT COLOR=red><I># associate menubar to toplevel BEFORE DynamicHelp::register</I></FONT>
<FONT COLOR=red><I># to make it works with menu clone name</I></FONT>
. configure -menu .m
.m add cascade -label "File" -menu .m.file
menu .m.file
.m.file add command -label "Open..."
.m.file add command -label "Quit"
<FONT COLOR=red><I># create label for help, using variable varinfo</I></FONT>
label .l -textvariable varinfo
<FONT COLOR=red><I># associate all entries of menu .m.file to variable varinfo</I></FONT>
DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -variable varinfo
<FONT COLOR=red><I># then declare entries of .m.file</I></FONT>
DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 0 -text "Detach menu"
DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 1 -text "Open a file"
DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 2 -text "Exit demo"
</PRE></TD></TR></TABLE></CENTER>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure">DynamicHelp::<B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
This command configure the ballon help.
<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-borderwidth"><B>-borderwidth</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Width of the black border around the balloon.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-delay"><B>-delay</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Define the delay in millisecond of mouse inactivity before displaying
the balloon.
</DD>
</DL>
<dl>
<dt><a name="DynamicHelp-state"><b>-state</b></a></dt>
<dd>
Specifies one of two states for help balloons: <b>normal</b> and
<b>disabled</b>.
</dd>
<dd>
If <b>state</b> is <b>disabled</b>, help balloons will not be displayed
for any registered widget.
</dd>
</dl>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-topbackground"><B>-topbackground</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The background color of the toplevel window created for a balloon.
</DD>
</DL>
<BR>Other standard options are:
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete">DynamicHelp::<B>delete</B></A>
<I>widget</I>
</DT><DD>
Delete all dynamic help for the given <i>widget</i>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DynamicHelp::<B>include</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>type</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DynamicHelp::<B>register</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>type</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
<p>
<b>Its use is deprecated. Use <i>DynamicHelp::add</i> instead.</b>
</p>
Register a help text to the widget <I>path</I>.
<I>type</I> determines the type of the help or the type of the widget.
Depending on <I>type</I>, other options must be provided.
<BR>
<TABLE CELLSPACING=5 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR><TD><B> type </B></TD><TD><B> options </B></TD></TR>
<TR><TD><B><I> balloon </I></B></TD><TD><I> ?tagOrItem? text </I></TD></TR>
<TR><TD><B><I> variable </I></B></TD><TD><I> ?tagOrItem? varName text </I></TD></TR>
<TR><TD><B><I> menu </I></B></TD><TD><I> varName </I></TD></TR>
<TR><TD><B><I> menuentry </I></B></TD><TD><I> index text </I></TD></TR>
</TABLE>
<BR>If one of the option is missing or is empty, help is removed for this widget.
<p>
If <i>tagOrItem</i> is specified, then <i>path</i> is a canvas or a text. In
case of a canvas, <i>tagOrItem</i> is the name of a tag or item on the canvas
to which the help will be bound. In case of a text, <i>tagOrItem</i> is the
name of a tag on the text to which the help will be bound.
</p>
For type other than <I>balloon</I>, <I>varName</I> is typically a variable
linked to a label.
<BR>For menu, balloon type help is not available. To declare a help for menu,
you first declare the menu, and then entries of this menu.
<BR>For example:
<BR><BR>
<CENTER>
<TABLE BORDER=2 CELLSPACING=2 WIDTH="80%">
<TR><TD><PRE>
<FONT COLOR=red><I># create menu</I></FONT>
menu .m -type menubar
<FONT COLOR=red><I># associate menubar to toplevel BEFORE DynamicHelp::register</I></FONT>
<FONT COLOR=red><I># to make it works with menu clone name</I></FONT>
. configure -menu .m
.m add cascade -label "File" -menu .m.file
menu .m.file
.m.file add command -label "Open..."
.m.file add command -label "Quit"
<FONT COLOR=red><I># create label for help, using variable varinfo</I></FONT>
label .l -textvariable varinfo
<FONT COLOR=red><I># associate all entries of menu .m.file to variable varinfo</I></FONT>
DynamicHelp::register .m.file menu varinfo
<FONT COLOR=red><I># then declare entries of .m.file</I></FONT>
DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 0 "Detach menu"
DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 1 "Open a file"
DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 2 "Exit demo"
</PRE></TD></TR></TABLE></CENTER>
<BR>
<BR>Notice that if popup menu is owned by a menubar, you must associate first the menubar
to its toplevel. In this case, when you create a menu popup, its clone window is also
created, and DynamicHelp::register detects the exitence of the clone window and maps
events to it.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="sethelp">DynamicHelp::<B>sethelp</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>subpath</I>
?<I>force</I>?
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

366
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/Entry.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,366 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Entry</B>
- Entry widget with <B>state</B> option, dynamic help and drag and drop facilities
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Entry</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledbackground">-disabledbackground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-exportselection">-exportselection</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertbackground">-insertbackground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertborderwidth">-insertborderwidth</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertofftime">-insertofftime</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertontime">-insertontime</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertwidth">-insertwidth</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectborderwidth">-selectborderwidth</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-exportselection">-exportselection</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertofftime">-insertofftime</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertontime">-insertontime</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertwidth">-insertwidth</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-editable">-editable</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-show">-show</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
The <B>Entry</B> widget extends the default Tk entry. Options have been added to provide
visual effect depending on the state of the Entry,
<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options,
and <A HREF="DragSite.html">Drag</A> and
<A HREF="DropSite.html">Drop</A>.
Entry behaves much like a Label, with <B>text</B> option to set its contents.
<BR>Tk entry command can also be used on Entry widget.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command when user press &lt;Return&gt; in the Entry.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
<BR>If <B>dragendcmd</B> is empty, the internal <I>dragend</I> command updates the entry
following the operation (<B>move</B> or <B>copy</B>) and the dragged data
(whole or selected part of the entry).
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called when <B>dragevent</B> occurs on widget.
<B>draginitcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>draginitcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
<BR>if <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, the command refuse the drag if entry is empty or if
portion of text is selected and event doesn't occur above the selection. In all other cases,
the command returns:
<UL>
<LI>as the data type, the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>TEXT</I> if empty,
<LI>as the operations, <I>{copy move}</I> if <B>state</B> is normal and <B>editable</B>
is true, or <I>{copy}</I> only in other cases,
<LI>as the data, the whole content or the selected portion of the entry.
</UL>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Entry has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling
and extract current position.
<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the Entry,
<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
<LI>the numeric index in the entry designated by the cursor,
<LI>the current operation,
<LI>the data type,
<LI>the data.
</UL>
and must return a value conforming to <B>dropcmd</B> option described in
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
If <B>dropcmd</B> is empty, the wrapper updates the entry following the type of data:
<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
<TR><TD><I>COLOR</I> or <I>FGCOLOR</I></TD>
<TD>reconfigure the <B>foreground</B> of the Entry</TD>
<TR><TD><I>BGCOLOR</I></TD>
<TD>reconfigure the <B>background</B> of the Entry</TD>
<TR><TD><I>TEXT</I>,<BR>or any other tag</TD>
<TD>reconfigure the Entry to display the associated string.</TD>
</TABLE></DL>
and returns 1.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Entry has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling
and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>.
<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is empty, the wrapper accepts the drop if <B>editable</b> option is
true and <B>state</B> option is normal.
<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the Entry,
<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
<LI>the event,
<LI>the numeric index in the entry designated by the cursor,
<LI>the current operation,
<LI>the data type,
<LI>the data.
</UL>
and must return a value conforming to <B>dropovercmd</B> option described in
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
See option <B>droptypes</B> of
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
for more infromation.
Default accepts <I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I> and <I>TEXT</I>,
all with <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B> operations.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-editable"><B>-editable</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies whether the Entry is editable by the user. Equivalent to the <B>state</B> option
of the Tk entry widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-show"><B>-show</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If this option is specified, then the true contents of the entry are not displayed in the
window. Instead, each character in the entry's value will be displayed as the first character
in the value of this option, such as ``*''. This is useful, for example, if the entry is to
be used to enter a password. If characters in the entry are selected and copied elsewhere, the
information copied will be what is displayed, not the true contents of the entry.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies one of two states for the Entry: <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>.
In normal state the text of the Entry is displayed using the <B>foreground</B> option.
In disabled state the text of the Entry is displayed using the <B>disabledforeground</B>
option. If the entry is disabled then the value may not be changed by user input
and no insertion cursor will be displayed, even if the input focus is in the widget.
Disabled state is the same as not editable with visual effect.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the entry window, in average-size
characters of the widget's font. If the value is less than or equal to zero, the widget picks
a size just large enough to hold its current text.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Calls the command specified by the option <B>-command</B>.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

362
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/Label.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,362 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Label</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Label</B>
- Label widget with <B>state</B> option, dynamic help and drag and drop facilities
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Label</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD></TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-focus">-focus</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-name">-name</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-underline">-underline</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
The <B>Label</B> widget extends the default Tk label. Options have been added to provide
visual effect depending on the state of the Label, <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options, and <A HREF="DragSite.html">Drag
</A> and <A HREF="DropSite.html">Drop</A>.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called when <B>dragevent</B> occurs on widget.
<B>draginitcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>draginitcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, the internal <B>draginitcmd</B> command is used instead
and returns:
<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
<TR><TD valign=top><I>IMAGE&nbsp;{copy}&nbsp;&lt;image&nbsp;name&gt;</I>
<TD>if an image is displayed.
<TR><TD valign=top><I>BITMAP&nbsp;{copy}&nbsp;&lt;bitmap&nbsp;name&gt;</I>
<TD>if a bitmap is displayed.
<TR><TD valign=top><I>TEXT&nbsp;{copy}&nbsp;&lt;text&gt;</I>
<TD>if a text is displayed.
</TABLE></DL>
Note that if <B>dragtype</B> option is not empty, its value is used instead of those above.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called when drop occurs on the widget.
<B>dropcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>dropcmd</B> of <B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is empty, the command updates the label following the type of the data:
<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
<TR><TD><I>COLOR</I> or <I>FGCOLOR</I></TD>
<TD>reconfigure the <B>foreground</B> of the Label.</TD>
<TR><TD><I>BGCOLOR</I></TD>
<TD>reconfigure the <B>background</B> of the Label.</TD>
<TR><TD><I>IMAGE</I></TD>
<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated image.</TD>
<TR><TD><I>BITMAP</I></TD>
<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated bitmap.
<B>image</B> option is set to empty.</TD>
<TR><TD><I>TEXT</I>,<BR>or any other tag</TD>
<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated string.
<B>image</B> and <B>bitmap</B> options are set to empty.</TD>
</TABLE></DL>
and returns 1.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called when drag icon is over the widget.
<B>dropovercmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>dropovercmd</B> of <B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is empty, Label always accepts the drop if data type is
<I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I>, and accepts all other data type only if
<B>state</B> is normal.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
See option <B>droptypes</B> of
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
for more infromation.
Default accepts <I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I>, <I>TEXT</I>, <I>BITMAP</I>
and <I>IMAGE</I>, all with <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B> operations.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-focus"><B>-focus</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a pathname to set the focus on for Label::<B>setfocus</B> command.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a desired height for the label.
If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in
screen units, for text it is in lines of text.
If this option isn't specified, the label's desired height is computed
from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.<BR>
Option not available for <I>themed</I> widgets.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-name"><B>-name</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a standard name for the label. If the option <B>*<I>name</I>Name</B> is
found in the resource database, then <B>text</B> and <B>underline</B> options
are extracted from its value.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies one of two states for the Label: <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>.
In normal state the text of the Label is displayed using the <B>foreground</B> option.
In disabled state the text of the Label is displayed using the <B>disabledforeground</B> option.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-underline"><B>-underline</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the label.
0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed, 1 to the next character,
and so on.
<BR>The binding <B>&lt;Alt-<I>char</I>&gt;</B> is automatically set on the toplevel
of the Label to call Label::<B>setfocus</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a desired width for the label.
If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in
screen units, for text it is in characters.
If this option isn't specified, the label's desired width is computed
from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Set the focus on the pathname given by <B>-focus</B> option if <B>-state</B> is <I>normal</I>.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

194
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/LabelEntry.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>LabelEntry</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>LabelEntry</B>
-
LabelFrame containing an Entry widget.
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>LabelEntry</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-command</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragenabled</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragendcmd</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragevent</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-draginitcmd</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragtype</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropcmd</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropenabled</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropovercmd</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-droptypes</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-editable</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-relief</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-show</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-takefocus</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-xscrollcommand</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="LabelFrame.html">OPTIONS from <B>LabelFrame</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-label (see <B>-text</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelanchor (see <B>-anchor</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelfont (see <B>-font</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelheight (see <B>-height</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labeljustify (see <B>-justify</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelwidth (see <B>-width</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-name</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-side</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-underline</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-wraplength</TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
LabelEntry is a widget composed of <A HREF="LabelFrame.html">LabelFrame</A> widget
containing an <A HREF="Entry.html">Entry</A> widget.
Tk entry command can also be used on LabelEntry widget.
</P>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Set bindings on the entry widget.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

144
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/LabelFrame.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>LabelFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>LabelFrame</B>
- Frame with a Label
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>LabelFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Label.html">OPTIONS from <B>Label</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-anchor</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-bitmap</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-focus</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-height</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-image</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-name</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-underline</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-wraplength</TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD>LabelFrame::<A HREF="#align"><B>align</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
LabelFrame enables user to create a frame with a
<A HREF="Label.html">Label</A> positionned at any side.
LabelFrame is used by <A HREF="ComboBox.html">ComboBox</A>
and <A HREF="SpinBox.html">SpinBox</A>.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies where to position the Label relative to the user frame: <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B>, <B>left</B> or <B>right</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="align">LabelFrame::<B>align</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
This command align label of all widget given by <I>args</I> of class LabelFrame
(or "derived") by setting their width to the max one +1
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Return the frame where the user can create any other widget.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

675
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/ListBox.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,675 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ListBox</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ListBox</B>
- ListBox widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ListBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-autofocus">-autofocus</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltax">-deltax</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltay">-deltay</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovermode">-dropovermode</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-multicolumn">-multicolumn</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-redraw">-redraw</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectfill">-selectfill</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectmode">-selectmode</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindImage"><B>bindImage</B></A>
<I>event</I>
<I>script</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindText"><B>bindText</B></A>
<I>event</I>
<I>script</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#edit"><B>edit</B></A>
<I>item</I>
<I>text</I>
?<I>verifycmd</I>?
?<I>clickres</I>?
?<I>select</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#exists"><B>exists</B></A>
<I>item</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
<I>item</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>item</I>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#item"><B>item</B></A>
<I>first</I>
?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
<I>item</I>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
<I>item</I>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#items"><B>items</B></A>
?<I>first</I>?
?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A>
<I>item</I>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#reorder"><B>reorder</B></A>
<I>neworder</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
<I>item</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#selection"><B>selection</B></A>
<I>cmd</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
<B>ListBox</B> widget uses canvas to display a list of items.
Each item is composed of a label with its own font and foreground attributes, and an optional
image or window. Each item is drawn in a single line, whose height is defined by the
<B>deltay</B> option, so they must have at most this height.
A item is uniquely identified by a string given at creation (by the
<B>insert</B> command). The ListBox can have one or more columns, depending on
<B>multicolumn</B> option. The user do not handle columns; the number of columns
is determined following the height of the ListBox in order to see each item vertically.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-autofocus"><B>-autofocus (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If this option is true, the listbox will take focus any time the user
clicks in it. Without focus, the listbox's mouse wheel bindings will
not work properly. The default is true.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies horizontal pad between each columns.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltay"><B>-deltay</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies vertical size of the items.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
ListBox has a command wrapper for <I>drag-init</I> events. This command refused the drag
if no item is designated. In other cases:
<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, it returns:
<UL>
<LI>the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>LISTBOX_ITEM</I> if empty as the data type,
<LI><I>{move copy link}</I> as the operations,
<LI>the item identifier as the data.
</UL>
If <B>draginitcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the listbox,
<LI>the identifier of the dragged item,
<LI>the toplevel created to represent dragged data.
</UL>
and must return a value conforming to <B>draginitcmd</B> option described in
<B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
ListBox has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling
and extract item and position.
<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the listbox,
<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
<LI>a list describing where the drop occurs. It can be:
<UL>
<LI><I>{</I><B>widget</B><I>}</I>,
<LI><I>{</I><B>item</B> <I>item}</I> or
<LI><I>{</I><B>position</B> <I>index}</I>.
</UL>
<LI>the current operation,
<LI>the data type,
<LI>the data.
</UL>
<p>
The default drop command allows for drag-and-drop within the listbox but
not to or from other widgets.
</p>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
LsitBox has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling
and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>.
If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, the command is called with the following aguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the listbox,
<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
<LI>a list describing where the drop can occur, whose elements are:
<UL>
<LI>the string <I>widget</I> if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>w</I>, else empty string.
<LI>the targeted item if drag icon points an item and <B>dropovertype</B> option contains
<I>i</I>, else empty string.
<LI>an index within two items where drag icon points to if <B>dropovertype</B> option
contains <I>p</I>, else empty string.
<LI>optionally, the preferred method if drop can occur both inside an item and between two
items. The value is <I>position</I> or <I>item</I>.
</UL>
<LI>the current operation,
<LI>the data type,
<LI>the data.
</UL>
The command must return a list with two elements:
<UL>
<LI>the drop status, conforming to those described in <B>dropovercmd</B> option of
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>,
<LI>the choosen method: <I>widget</I>, <I>item</I> or <I>position</I>.
</UL>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovermode"><B>-dropovermode</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the type of <I>drop-over</I> interaction. Must be a combination of
<B>w</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs everywhere on widget,
<B>p</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs between two items,
and <B>i</B>, which specifies that drop occurs inside items.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
See option <B>droptypes</B> of
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
for more infromation.
<BR>Default is <I>LISTBOX_ITEM</I> with operations <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the listbox in units of <B>deltay</B> pixels.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-multicolumn"><B>-multicolumn</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies wether or not ListBox layouts items in order to see each one vertically.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies distance between image or window and text of the items.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-redraw"><B>-redraw</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies wether or not the listbox should be redrawn when entering idle.
Set it to false if you call <B>update</B> while modifying the listbox.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectfill"><B>-selectfill (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If true, the listbox will draw a selection rectangle that fills the
listbox from left-to-right instead of just drawing a box around the
selected item. This more closely mimics the standard Tk listbox.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectmode"><B>-selectmode</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired selection-mode for the listbox. Must be one of
<B>none</B>, <B>single</B> or <B>multiple</B>. <B>selectmode</B> <I>single</I>
allows to select 1 item by its text or image. <B>selectmode</B> <I>multiple</I>
allows to select multiple items by their text or image. For more info on
selectmodes <I>single</I> or <I>multiple</I>, see the Tk <B>listbox</B>
command. Default value for <B>selectmode</B> is <I>none</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired width for the listbox in units of 8 pixels.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindImage"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindImage</B></A>
<I>event</I>
<I>script</I>
</DT><DD>
This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the image of a item.
The item idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command.
<p>
Any occurrence of <b>%W</b> in <i>script</i> is substituted with the
path of the listbox.
</p>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindText"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindText</B></A>
<I>event</I>
<I>script</I>
</DT><DD>
This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the label of a item.
The item idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command.
<p>
Any occurrence of <b>%W</b> in <i>script</i> is substituted with the
path of the listbox.
</p>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Deletes all items in <I>arg</I>. <I>arg</I> can be a list
of items or a list of list of items.
To delete all items, do <I>$pathName delete [$pathName items]</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="edit"><I>pathName</I> <B>edit</B></A>
<I>item</I>
<I>text</I>
?<I>verifycmd</I>?
?<I>clickres</I>?
?<I>select</I>?
</DT><DD>
Provides a way for the user to edit in place the label of an item.
<BR>The command takes the initial text as argument and does not modify the label of the
edited node, but returns an empty string if edition is canceled, or the typed text
if edition is accepted.
<BR>When editing, the user can cancel by pressing Escape, or accept by pressing Return.
<BR><I>clickres</I> specifies what to do if the user click outside the editable area.
If <I>clickres</I> is 0 (the default), the edition is canceled.
If <I>clickres</I> is 1, the edition is accepted.
In all other case, the edition continues.
<BR>If edition is accepted and <I>modifycmd</I> is not empty, then it is called with
the new text as argument and must return 1 to accept the new text, 0 to refuse it
and continue edition.
<BR><I>select</I> specifies wether or not the initial text should be selected. Default is 1.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="exists"><I>pathName</I> <B>exists</B></A>
<I>item</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns 1 if <I>item</I> exists in the listbox, else 0.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
<I>item</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the position of <I>item</I> in the list.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>item</I>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>
<p>
Inserts a new item identified by <I>item</I> in the list at position <I>index</I>.
</p>
<p>
Any instance of <i>#auto</i> within the item name will be replaced by the
number of the item in the order of insertion.
</p>
<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-data"><B>-data</B></A></DT>
<DD>
User data associated to the item.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the foreground color of the label of the item.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-font"><B>-font</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a font for the label of the item.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies an image to display at the left of the label of the item.
<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-indent"><B>-indent</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the amount of extra space in pixels at the left of the item.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the label of the item.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a pathname to display at the left of the label of the item.
<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="item"><I>pathName</I> <B>item</B></A>
<I>first</I>
?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>
<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>items</I> instead.</B><BR>
If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the item at index <I>first</I> in the list,
or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
If <I>last</I> is specified, the command returns a list whose elements are all
of the items between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>, inclusive.
Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard forms for indices.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
<I>item</I>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
<I>item</I>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the
item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
returns a list describing the current options for the item.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A>
?<I>first</I>?
?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all items.
If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the item at index
<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
are all of the items between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
forms for indices.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A>
<I>item</I>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Moves <I>item</I> at position <I>index</I> in the list.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="reorder"><I>pathName</I> <B>reorder</B></A>
<I>neworder</I>
</DT><DD>
Modifies the order of items in the listbox given by <I>neworder</I>. Items that do not
appear in <I>neworder</I> are no moved.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
<I>item</I>
</DT><DD>
Arrange the scrolling area to make <I>item</I> visible.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="selection"><I>pathName</I> <B>selection</B></A>
<I>cmd</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Modifies the list of selected items following <I>cmd</I>:
<DL>
<DT><B>clear</B>
<DD>remove all items of the selection.
<DT><B>set</B>
<DD>set the selection to all items in <I>arg</I>
<DT><B>add</B>
<DD>add all items of <I>arg</I> in the selection
<DT><B>remove</B>
<DD>remove all items of <I>arg</I> of the selection
<DT><B>get</B>
<DD>return the current selected items
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
</DD></DL>
<b>BINDINGS</b>
<p>
A <b>&lt;&lt;ListboxSelect&gt;&gt;</b> virtual event is generated any time the
selection in the listbox changes.
</p>
<p>
The listbox has all the standard mouse wheel bindings when it has focus.
</p>
</p>
</BODY></HTML>

302
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/MainFrame.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,302 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>MainFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>MainFrame</B>
- Manage toplevel with menu, toolbar and statusbar
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>MainFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="ProgressBar.html">OPTIONS from <B>ProgressBar</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progressfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progressmax (see <B>-maximum</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progresstype (see <B>-type</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progressvar (see <B>-variable</B>)</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD></TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-menu">-menu</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-separator">-separator</A></TD></TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-sizegrip">-sizegrip</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#addindicator"><B>addindicator</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#addtoolbar"><B>addtoolbar</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getindicator"><B>getindicator</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getmenu"><B>getmenu</B></A>
<I>menuid</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#gettoolbar"><B>gettoolbar</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setmenustate"><B>setmenustate</B></A>
<I>tag</I>
<I>state</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#showstatusbar"><B>showstatusbar</B></A>
<I>name</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#showtoolbar"><B>showtoolbar</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>bool</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
MainFrame manage toplevel to have:<BR>
<UL>
<LI>simple menu creation, with automatic accelerator bindings and
<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> association,</LI>
<LI>one or more toolbars that user can hide,</LI>
<LI>a status bar, displaying a user message or a menu description, and optionally a
<A HREF="ProgressBar.html">ProgressBar</A>.</LI>
</UL>
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the user frame in any of the forms acceptable to
Tk_GetPixels. If this option is less than or equal to zero (the default) then the window
will not request any size at all.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-menu"><B>-menu (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
This option describes the menu. This is a list whose each five elements describe
one cascade menu. It has the following form:
{<I>menuname</I> <I>tags</I> <I>menuId</I> <I>tearoff</I> <I>menuentries</I>...}
where <I>menuentries</I> is a list where each element describe one menu entry, which can be:
<UL>
<LI>for a separator:<BR>
{<B>separator</B>}</LI>
<LI>for a command:<BR>
{<B>command</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I>? ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI>
<LI>for a check button:<BR>
{<B>checkbutton</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I>? ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI>
<LI>for a radio button:<BR>
{<B>radiobutton</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI>
<LI>for a cascade menu:<BR>
{<B>cascade</B> <I>menuname</I> <I>tags</I> <I>menuId</I> <I>tearoff</I> <I>menuentries</I>}</LI>
</UL>
where:
<UL>
<LI><I>menuname</I> is the name of the menu. If it contains a &amp;, the following character
is automatically converted to the corresponding <B>-underline</B> option of <B>menu add</B>
command.</LI>
<LI><I>tags</I> is the tags list for the entry, used for enabling or disabling menu
entries with <B>MainFrame::setmenustate</B>.</LI>
<LI><I>menuId</I> is an id for the menu, from which you can get menu pathname with
<B>MainFrame::getmenu</B>.</LI>
<LI><I>tearoff</I> specifies if menu has tearoff entry.</LI>
<LI><I>description</I> specifies a string for <A HREF=\"DynamicHelp.html\">DynamicHelp</A>.</LI>
<LI><I>accelerator</I> specifies a key sequence. It is a list of two elements, where the first
is one of <B>Shift</B>, <B>Ctrl</B>, <B>Alt</B>, <B>CtrlAlt</B>, <B>Cmd</B>, or <B>ShiftCmd</B>, and the second as letter
(see <A HREF="#-casesensitive">-casesensitive</A> option for interpretation), digit or
a special key name.
An accelerator string is build and corresponding binding set on the toplevel to invoke the
menu entry.</LI>
<LI><I>option value</I> specifies additionnal options for the entry (see <B>menu add</B>
command).</LI>
</UL>
Each value enclosed by ? are optional and defaulted to empty string, but must be
provided if one or more following options is not empty.
<BR>Example:
<PRE>
set descmenu {
"&File" {} {} 0 {
{command "&New" {} "Create a new document" {Ctrl n} -command Menu::new}
{command "&Open..." {} "Open an existing document" {Ctrl o} -command Menu::open}
{command "&Save" open "Save the document" {Ctrl s} -command Menu::save}
{cascade "&Export" {} export 0 {
{command "Format &1" open "Export document to format 1" {} -command {Menu::export 1}}
{command "Format &2" open "Export document to format 2" {} -command {Menu::export 2}}
}}
{separator}
{cascade "&Recent files" {} recent 0 {}}
{separator}
{command "E&xit" {} "Exit the application" {} -command Menu::exit}
}
"&Options" {} {} 0 {
{checkbutton "Toolbar" {} "Show/hide toolbar" {}
-variable Menu::_drawtoolbar
-command {$Menu::_mainframe showtoolbar toolbar $Menu::_drawtoolbar}
}
}
}
</PRE>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-separator"><B>-separator (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies if separator should be drawn at the top and/or at the bottom of the user window.
Must be one of the values <B>none</B>, <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B> or <B>both</B>.
It depends on the relief of subwidgets of user window.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-textvariable"><B>-textvariable</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the textvariable option for the label of the status bar.
<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> description
of menu entries are mapped to this variable at the creation of the MainFrame.
If this variable is changed by MainFrame::configure, menu description will
not be available.
<BR>You change the text of the label by modifying the value of the variable.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired width for the user frame in any of the forms acceptable to
Tk_GetPixels. If this option is less than or equal to zero (the default) then the window
will not request any size at all.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-sizegrip"><B>-sizegrip (themed, read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If bool argument is true and themed mode, show a ttk sizegrip widget in the lower-right corner.
</DD>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="addindicator"><I>pathName</I> <B>addindicator</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Add an indicator box at the right of the status bar. Each indicator are added from left
to right. An indicator is a Tk label widget configured with option-value pair
given by ?<I>arg...</I>?. <B>-relief</B> and <B>-borderwidth</B> options are respetively
defaulted to <I>sunken</I> and 1. Returns the pathname of the created label.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="addtoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>addtoolbar</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Add a toolbar to the MainFrame. Returns the pathname of the new window where to place
toolbar items.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Returns the pathname of the user window.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getindicator"><I>pathName</I> <B>getindicator</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added indicator.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getmenu"><I>pathName</I> <B>getmenu</B></A>
<I>menuid</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the pathname of the menu whose id is <I>menuid</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getmenustate"><I>pathName</I> <B>getmenustate</B></A>
<I>tag</I>
<I>state</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the state of the given menu <I>tag</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="gettoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>gettoolbar</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added toolbar.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setmenustate"><I>pathName</I> <B>setmenustate</B></A>
<I>tag</I>
<I>state</I>
</DT><DD>
Set the <B>-state</B> option value of all the menu entries that have the tag <I>tag</I>
to <I>state</I>.
A menu entry is disabled, if one of its associated tags have state <B>disabled</B>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="showstatusbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>showstatusbar</B></A>
<I>name</I>
</DT><DD>
<I>name</I> is one of <B>none</B>, <B>status</B> or <B>progression</B>.
Use <B>none</B> to hide the status bar, <B>status</B> to display the label only, or
<B>progression</B> to display the label and the
<A HREF="ProgressBar.html">ProgressBar</A>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="showtoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>showtoolbar</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>bool</I>
</DT><DD>
Hide if <I>bool</I> is 0, or show if <I>bool</I> is 1 the <I>index</I>th added toolbar.
To prevent your toplevel from resizing while hiding/showing toolbar,
do [wm geometry $top [wm geometry $top]] when it is managed.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

221
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/MessageDlg.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,221 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>MessageDlg</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>MessageDlg</B>
- Message dialog box
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>MessageDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-cancel</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-default</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-parent</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-aspect">-aspect</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-buttons">-buttons</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-buttonwidth">-buttonwidth</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-icon">-icon</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-justify">-justify</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-message">-message</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TD>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
MessageDlg provides a simple way to display a message dialog.
MessageDlg::<B>create</B> creates the message dialog, displays
it and return the index of the pressed button, or -1 if it is destroyed.
When returning, the dialog no longer exists.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-aspect"><B>-aspect</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating desired
aspect ratio for the text. The aspect ratio is specified as
100*width/height. 100 means the text should
be as wide as it is tall, 200 means the text should
be twice as wide as it is tall, 50 means the text should
be twice as tall as it is wide, and so on.
Used to choose line length for text if <B>width</B> option
isn't specified.
Defaults to 150.
The options <B>-width</B> and <B>-aspect</B> are directly heritated from the Tk message widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-buttons"><B>-buttons</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a list of buttons to display when <B>type</B> option is <I>user</I>.
If a button has a symbolic name, its associated text will be displayed.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-buttonwidth"><B>-buttonwidth</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the standard width of the buttons in the dialog.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-icon"><B>-icon</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies an icon to display. Must be one of the following: <B>error</B>, <B>info</B>,
<B>question</B> or <B>warning</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-justify"><B>-justify</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies how to justify lines of text.
Must be one of <B>left</B>, <B>center</B>, or <B>right</B>. Defaults
to <B>left</B>.
This option works together with the <B>anchor</B>, <B>aspect</B>,
<B>padx</B>, <B>pady</B>, and <B>width</B> options to provide a variety
of arrangements of the text within the window.
The <B>aspect</B> and <B>width</B> options determine the amount of
screen space needed to display the text.
The <B>anchor</B>, <B>padx</B>, and <B>pady</B> options determine where this
rectangular area is displayed within the widget's window, and the
<B>justify</B> option determines how each line is displayed within that
rectangular region.
For example, suppose <B>anchor</B> is <B>e</B> and <B>justify</B> is
<B>left</B>, and that the message window is much larger than needed
for the text.
The the text will displayed so that the left edges of all the lines
line up and the right edge of the longest line is <B>padx</B> from
the right side of the window; the entire text block will be centered
in the vertical span of the window.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-message"><B>-message</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the message to display in this message box.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a string to display as the title of the message box.
If the value is empty (the default), a default title will be set corresponding
to the <B>icon</B> option.
The default associated title is in english, and can be modified to set it in
another language by specifying the resource:
<PRE> *MessageDlg.<I>name</I>Title: <I>value</I></PRE>
or the equivalent tcl command:
<PRE> option add *MessageDlg.<I>name</I>Title <I>value</I></PRE>
where <I>name</I> is the name of an icon as defined in the <B>icon</B> option.
<BR>For example, for french language, you can specify for a warning dialog:
<PRE> option add *MessageDlg.warningTitle "Attention"</PRE>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible:
<DD>
<P>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT>
<B>abortretryignore</B>
<DD>
Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are <B>abort</B>,
<B>retry</B> and <B>ignore</B>.<P>
<DT>
<B>ok</B>
<DD>
Displays one button whose symbolic name is <B>ok</B>.<P>
<DT>
<B>okcancel</B>
<DD>
Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>ok</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P>
<DT>
<B>retrycancel</B>
<DD>
Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>retry</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P>
<DT>
<B>yesno</B>
<DD>
Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>yes</B> and <B>no</B>.<P>
<DT>
<B>yesnocancel</B>
<DD>
Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are <B>yes</B>, <B>no</B>
and <B>cancel</B>.
<P>
<DT>
<B>user</B>
<DD>
Displays buttons of <B>-buttons</B> option.<P>
</DD>
<P>
For any <B>-type</B> but <B>user</B>, the native Tk widget <B>tk_messageBox</B> is used.
In this case, only the following options are considered: <B>-default</B>, <B>-icon</B>, <B>-message</B>, <B>-title</B> and <B>-type</B>.
</P>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the length of lines in the window.
If this option has a value greater than zero then the <B>aspect</B>
option is ignored and the <B>width</B> option determines the line
length.
If this option has a value less than or equal to zero, then
the <B>aspect</B> option determines the line length.
</DD>
</DL>
</BODY></HTML>

483
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/NoteBook.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,483 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>NoteBook</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>NoteBook</B>
- Notebook manager widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>NoteBook</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-activebackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-activeforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatdelay</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatinterval</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-arcradius">-arcradius</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-homogeneous">-homogeneous</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-internalborderwidth">-internalborderwidth or -ibd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-tabbevelsize">-tabbevelsize</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-tabpady">-tabpady</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindtabs"><B>bindtabs</B></A>
<I>event</I>
<I>script</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#compute_size"><B>compute_size</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
<I>page</I>
?<I>destroyframe</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
<I>page</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
<I>page</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>page</I>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
<I>page</I>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
<I>page</I>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A>
<I>page</I>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#page"><B>page</B></A>
<I>first</I>
?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#pages"><B>pages</B></A>
?<I>first</I>?
?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#raise"><B>raise</B></A>
?<I>page</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
<I>page</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
The NoteBook widget manages a set of pages and displays one of them. A page
is a <B>frame</B> or <B>ttk::frame</B> that is included in the NoteBook by its
<A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A> command. Each page is associated with a tab;
the tabs are displayed in a band either above or below the pages, depending on
the value of the option <A HREF="#-side">-side</A>.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-arcradius"><B>-arcradius</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the amount of rounding effect at the corners of a tab. This value
can be adjusted from 0 to 8 pixels with the default being 2 pixels. Usually,
small values are preferable.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
then the window will not request any size at all.
In this case, user may want to call NoteBook::<B>compute_size</B> to make NoteBook larger
enough to contains the largest page.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-homogeneous"><B>-homogeneous</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies whether or not the label of the pages must have the same width.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-internalborderwidth"><B>-internalborderwidth</B> or <B>-ibd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Value that is applied to each page in the NoteBook as its <B>-borderwidth</B> or <B>-bd</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the side where to place the label of the pages. Must be one
of <B>top</B> or <B>bottom</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-tabbevelsize"><B>-tabbevelsize</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the amount of bevel the tabs should have. This value can be adjusted from
0 to 8 pixels with the default being 0 pixels. A zero pixel bevel is essentially rectangular
while non-zero bevel size will look trapezoidal.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-tabpady"><B>-tabpady</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the padding between the text in the tab and the top and bottom
of the tab. Padding may be a list of two values to specify padding for
top and bottom separately. Padding defaults to {0 6}.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired width for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
then the window will not request any size at all.
In this case, user may want to call NoteBook::<B>compute_size</B> to make NoteBook larger
enough to contains the largest page.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindtabs"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindtabs</B></A>
<I>event</I>
<I>script</I>
</DT><DD>
This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on a tab. The page identifier on which
the event occurs is appended to the command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="compute_size"><I>pathName</I> <B>compute_size</B></A>
</DT><DD>
This command can be called to make the NoteBook large enough to contain the largest page.
Note that if all pages use -createcmd, they will have no requested size.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
<I>page</I>
?<I>destroyframe</I>?
</DT><DD>
Deletes the page <I>page</I>. If <I>destroyframe</I> is 1 (the default), the frame
associated to <I>page</I> is destroyed. If <I>destroyframe</I> is 0, the frame is not
destroyed and is reused by further call to <B>insert</B> with the same <I>page</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
<I>page</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the pathname of the page <I>page</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
<I>page</I>
</DT><DD>
Return the numerical index corresponding to the item.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>page</I>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Insert a new page identified by <I>page</I> at position <I>index</I> in the pages list.
<I>index</I> must be numeric or <B>end</B>. The pathname of the new page is returned.
Dynamic help, if it is specified by the options, is
displayed when the pointer hovers over the tab that belongs to the page.
<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-activebackground"><B>-activebackground</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Background color for the tab when it is active.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-activeforeground"><B>-activeforeground</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Color used for the tab's text when the tab is active.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-background"><B>-background</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Background color for the tab when it is not active.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-createcmd"><B>-createcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called the first time the page is raised.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-disabledforeground"><B>-disabledforeground</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Color used for the tab's text when the tab is disabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-foreground"><B>-foreground</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Color used for the tab's text when the tab is neither active nor disabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-helpcmd"><B>-helpcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Has no effect.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this page.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> (the default for a NoteBook
page) or <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Variable to use when <B>-helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies an image to display for the page at the left of the label
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-leavecmd"><B>-leavecmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called when a page is about to be leaved.
The command must return 0 if the page can not be leaved, or 1 if it can.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-ractiveimage"><B>-ractiveimage</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Image to show on the right of the tab when the tab is active.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-raisecmd"><B>-raisecmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called each time the page is raised.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-rimage"><B>-rimage</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Image to show on the right of the tab when the tab is not active.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-rimagecmd"><B>-rimagecmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be evaluated, with two arguments appended, when the
image shown on the right of the tab is clicked. The first appended argument
is the Tk window path of the NoteBook, the second is the name of the page.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the state of the page. Must be <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a label to display for the page.
</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
<I>page</I>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
<I>page</I>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the
item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
returns a list describing the current options for the item.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A>
<I>page</I>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Moves <I>page</I> tab to index <I>index</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="page"><I>pathName</I> <B>page</B></A>
<I>first</I>
?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>
<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>pages</I> instead.</B><BR>
If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the page at index <I>first</I>, or an empty string if
<I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. If <I>last</I> is specified, the command
returns a list whose elements are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
forms for indices.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="pages"><I>pathName</I> <B>pages</B></A>
?<I>first</I>?
?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all pages.
If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the page at index
<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
forms for indices.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="raise"><I>pathName</I> <B>raise</B></A>
?<I>page</I>?
</DT><DD>
Raise the page <I>page</I>, or return the raised page if <I>page</I> is omitted.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
<I>page</I>
</DT><DD>
Scrolls labels to make the label of the page <I>page</I> visible.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

180
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/PagesManager.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,180 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>PagesManager</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>PagesManager</B>
- Pages manager widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PagesManager</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
<I>page</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#compute_size"><B>compute_size</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
<I>page</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
<I>page</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#page"><B>page</B></A>
<I>first</I>
?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#pages"><B>pages</B></A>
?<I>first</I>?
?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#raise"><B>raise</B></A>
?<I>page</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
PagesManager widget manages a set of pages and displays one of them.
PagesManager does not provide any user access method, as NoteBook
does, so it can be done through a listbox, a menu, radiobutton, or
whatever. The widget shows no pages during creation; there must be an
explicit call to <B>raise</B> to display one.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
then the window will not request any size at all.
In this case, user may want to call PagesManager::<B>compute_size</B> to make PagesManager
larger enough to contains the largest page.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired width for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
then the window will not request any size at all.
In this case, user may want to call PagesManager::<B>compute_size</B> to make PagesManager
larger enough to contains the largest page.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
<I>page</I>
</DT><DD>
Add a new page identified by <I>page</I>, which is an arbitrary
identifier. The pathname of the new page is returned and widgets for
the page should be created with this as the parent or ancestor.
However, PagesManager manages its own geometry. <B>pack</B>,
<B>grid</B> or an equivalent should not be used with the pathname
returned by <B>add</B>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="compute_size"><I>pathName</I> <B>compute_size</B></A>
</DT><DD>
This command can be called to make the PagesManager large enough to contain the largest page.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
<I>page</I>
</DT><DD>
Deletes the page <I>page</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
<I>page</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the pathname of the page <I>page</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="page"><I>pathName</I> <B>page</B></A>
<I>first</I>
?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>
<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>pages</I> instead.</B><BR>
If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the page at index <I>first</I>, or an empty string if
<I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. If <I>last</I> is specified, the command
returns a list whose elements are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
forms for indices.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="pages"><I>pathName</I> <B>pages</B></A>
?<I>first</I>?
?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all pages.
If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the page at index
<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
forms for indices.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="raise"><I>pathName</I> <B>raise</B></A>
?<I>page</I>?
</DT><DD>
Raise the page <I>page</I>, or return the raised page if <I>page</I> is omitted.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

158
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/PanedWindow.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>PanedWindow</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>PanedWindow</B>
- Tiled layout manager widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PanedWindow</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-activator">-activator</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-pad">-pad</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-weights">-weights</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
PanedWindow is a widget that lays out children in
a vertically or horizontally tiled format.
The user can adjust the size of the panes, with a pane control sash created
between children.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-activator"><B>-activator (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
By default, the control sash is either a button or a line depending
upon the underlying operating system. This sash may be explicitly set
using this option. If set to <B>line</B> then the sash consists of
just a dividing line. Otherwise if set to <B>button</B> then it
constists of a knob that can be dragged.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-pad"><B>-pad (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies additional space between the button of the sash and children.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the side of the sash, which implies the layout: <B>top</B> or <B>bottom</B>
(horizontal layout), <B>left</B> or <B>right</B> (vertical layout).
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-weights"><B>-weights (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies how the weights specified when adding panes should be used. Must be
<B>extra</B> or <B>available</B>. When using <I>extra</I>, only extra space is
devided among the diffferent panes relative to their weight. When using
<I>available</I>, all space is devided among the diffferent panes relative to
their weight. Default value for <B>weights</B> is <I>extra</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the width of the button of the sash. This option is ignored
if the activator is set to <B>line</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>
This command add a new pane. The new pane is placed below the previous pane for
vertical layout or at right for horizontal layout. This command returns a frame
where user can place its widget. Valid options are:
<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Pane-minsize"><B>-minsize</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the minimum size requested for the pane.
See the <B>grid</B> command for more information.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Pane-weight"><B>-weight</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the relative weight for apportioning any extra spaces among panes.
See the <B>grid</B> command for more information.
</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added pane.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

153
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/PanelFrame.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>PanelFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>PanelFrame</B>
- Frame with a boxed title area
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PanelFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-panelbackground">-panelbackground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-panelforeground">-panelforeground</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
PanelFrame creates a frame area with a boxed title area. The boxed title
area contains a label ands allows for other items to be placed in it. This
can serve like a mini-toolbar.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the widget.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The spacing to place around individual panel area items.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="-panelbackground"><B>-panelbackground</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The color for the panel area background.
Defaults to the selection highlight background color.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="-panelforeground"><B>-panelforeground</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The color for the title text.
Defaults to the selection highlight foreground color.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired width for the widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> <B>widget</B>
?<I>option</I> <I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Add a widget to the panel. Widgets are <B>pack</B>ed in.
Possible options are:
<DL>
<DT><B>-side</B></DT>
<DD>Side to place item on (defaults to <B>right</B>).</DD>
<DT><B>-fill</B></DT>
<DD>Whether to fill space (defaults to <B>none</B>).</DD>
<DT><B>-expand</B></DT>
<DD>Whether to expand space (defaults to <B>0</B>).</DD>
<DT><B>-pad</B></DT>
<DD>Override of the widget's <B>-ipad</B> option for this item.</DD>
</DL>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no
<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
options for <I>pathName</I>. If <I>option</I> is specified with no
<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named
<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more
<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the
given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command
returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Delete a widget and associated state from the panel.</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Get the frame widget for the status bar in which status bar items should be
created.</DD>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A>
</DT><DD>List of items in the status bar.</DD>
<DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="remove"><I>pathName</I> <B>remove</B></A>
<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Remove a widget item and associated state from the panel without destroying
the item.</DD>
</DL>
</BODY></HTML>

214
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/PasswdDlg.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,214 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>PasswdDlg</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>PasswdDlg</B>
- Login/Password dialog box
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PasswdDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-anchor</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-homogeneous</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-modal</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-parent</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-spacing</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-title</TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="LabelEntry.html">OPTIONS from <B>LabelEntry</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelanchor</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelfont</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelheight</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labeljustify</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginhelptext (see <B>-helptext</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginhelpvar (see <B>-helpvar</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginlabel (see <B>-label</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-logintext (see <B>-text</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-logintextvariable (see <B>-textvariable</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginunderline (see <B>-underline</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdeditable (see <B>-editable</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdhelptext (see <B>-helptext</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdhelpvar (see <B>-helpvar</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdlabel (see <B>-label</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdstate (see <B>-state</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdtext (see <B>-text</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdtextvariable (see <B>-textvariable</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdunderline (see <B>-underline</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-relief</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-wraplength</TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
PasswdDlg provides a simple way to display a login/password dialog.
PasswdDlg::<B>create</B> creates the dialog, displays it, and return the value of login
and password in a list, or an empty list if it is destroyed or user press cancel.
When returning, the dialog no longer exists.
<BR>Additionnal resources can be set to modify other text:
<PRE>
*loginName Label for login LabelEntry
*passwordName Label for password LabelEntry
</PRE>
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to call when user press ok button.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible:
<DD>
<P>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT>
<B>ok</B>
<DD>
Displays one button whose symbolic name is <B>ok</B>.<P>
<DT>
<B>okcancel</B>
<DD>
Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>ok</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P>
</DL COMPACT>
</DD>
</DL>
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<HR>
<ADRESS>Stephane Lavirotte <A HREF="mailto:Stephane.Lavirotte@sophia.inria.fr">(Stephane.Lavirotte@sophia.inria.fr)</A></ADRESS>
</BODY></HTML>

152
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/ProgressBar.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ProgressBar</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ProgressBar</B>
- Progress indicator widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ProgressBar</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-maximum">-maximum</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-variable">-variable</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
ProgressBar widget indicates the user the progress of a lengthly operation.
It is used by <A HREF="MainFrame.html">MainFrame</A>
and <A HREF="ProgressDlg.html">ProgressDlg</A>.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the progress indicator.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-maximum"><B>-maximum</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the maximum value of the variable. This value must be
greater than zero.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the type of the ProgressBar. Must be one of <B>normal</B>,
<B>incremental</B>, <B>infinite</B> or <B>nonincremental_infinite</B>.
<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>normal</I>, the progress indicator is drawn
proportional to the variable value and <B>maximum</B> option each time the
variable is set.
<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>incremental</I>, the value of the progress
indicator is maintained internally, and incremented each time the variable is
set by its value. The progress indicator is drawn proportional to the internal
value and
<B>maximum</B> option.
<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>infinite</I>, the value of the progress indicator
is maintained internally, and incremented each time the variable is set by its
value. The progress indicator moves from left to right if internal value
(modulo <B>maximum</B>) is less than <B>maximum</B>/2, and from right to left
if internal value is greater than <B>maximum</B>/2.
<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>nonincremental_infinite</I>, the value of the
progress indicator taken from the variable value, The progress indicator moves
from left to right if variable value (modulo <B>maximum</B>) is less than
<B>maximum</B>/2, and from right to left if internal value is greater than
<B>maximum</B>/2.
<BR><BR>See <B>-variable</B> option for special case of its value,
<BR><BR>Default value for <B>type</B> is <I>normal</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-variable"><B>-variable</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the variable attached to the progress indicator. Progress indicator
is updated when the value of the variable changes. If the value of the
variable is negative, the progress indicator is not displayed (it is drawn flat
with <B>background</B> color - usefull for ProgressDlg to make it
invisible). If its value 0, progress indicator is reinitialized.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired width for the progress indicator.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

145
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/ProgressDlg.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ProgressDlg</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ProgressDlg</B>
- Progress indicator dialog box
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ProgressDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-parent</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-separator</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-title</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="ProgressBar.html">OPTIONS from <B>ProgressBar</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-maximum</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-relief</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-troughcolor</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-type</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-variable</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-stop">-stop</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
ProgressDlg provides a simple way to display a progress indicator dialog.
ProgressDlg::<B>create</B> creates the dialog, displays it, set a local
grab to it and immediatly return. The dialog is updated by modifying the
value of the variable of options <B>-textvariable</B> and <B>-variable</B>.
You have to destroy the dialog after use.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to call when user press stop button. Note that it
is the program's responsibility to periodically call <B>update</B> so
that button press events can be generated.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a desired height for the label in lines of text.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-stop"><B>-stop</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the text of the button typically used to stop process. If empty, no button will
be drawn. This can be a symbolic name.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a desired width for the label in characters.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

130
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/ScrollView.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ScrollView</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ScrollView</B>
- Display the visible area of a scrolled window
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrollView</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-fill">-fill</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-window">-window</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
ScrollView displays the visible area of a scrolled window within
its scroll region.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the fill color of the rectangle.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-foreground"><B>-foreground</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the color of the border of the rectangle.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the ScrollView.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired width for the ScrollView.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the window to view. This widget must have <B>-xscrollcommand</B> and
<B>-yscrollcommand</B> options, and respond to <B>xview</B> and <B>yview</B> command.
In order to make ScrollView working with other scrollbar, <B>-xscrollcommand</B> and
<B>-yscrollcommand</B> options of the widget must be set before the widget is passed to
the <B>-window</B> option of the ScrollView (for example, if the widget is handled by
a ScrolledWindow, call <B>setwidget</B> before setting <B>-window</B> option).
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR>
<DL><DT>If mouse button 1 is pressed and dragged over the ScrollView, the top left corner of
the visible area of the scrolled window is moved proportionally to the mouse displacement.
</DT></DL>
<DL><DT>If mouse button 3 is pressed over the ScrollView, the top left corner of the visible
area is proportionally set to this point.
</DT></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

194
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/ScrollableFrame.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ScrollableFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ScrollableFrame</B>
- Scrollable frame containing widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrollableFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
<BR>
Themed widget (<B>Widget::theme true</B>): Options <B>-background</B> and <B>-bg</B> are not available.
Modify style <B>TFrame</B> property <B>-background</B> instead.
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-areaheight">-areaheight</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-areawidth">-areawidth</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-constrainedheight">-constrainedheight</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-constrainedwidth">-constrainedwidth</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-xscrollincrement">-xscrollincrement</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-yscrollincrement">-yscrollincrement</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
<I>widget</I>
?<I>vert</I>?
?<I>horz</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
ScrollableFrame widget containing widget.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-areaheight"><B>-areaheight</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the height for the scrollable area. If zero, then the height
of the scrollable area is made just large enough to hold all its children.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-areawidth"><B>-areawidth</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the width for the scrollable area. If zero, then the width
of the scrollable area window is made just large enough to hold all its children.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-constrainedheight"><B>-constrainedheight</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies whether or not the scrollable area should have the same height of the
scrolled window. If true, vertical scrollbar is not needed.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-constrainedwidth"><B>-constrainedwidth</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies whether or not the scrollable area should have the same width of the
scrolled window. If true, horizontal scrollbar is not needed.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the window in pixels.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired width for the window in pixels.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-xscrollincrement"><B>-xscrollincrement</B></A></DT>
<DD>
See <B>xscrollincrement</B> option of <B>canvas</B> widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-yscrollincrement"><B>-yscrollincrement</B></A></DT>
<DD>
See <B>yscrollincrement</B> option of <B>canvas</B> widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Return the pathname of the scrolled frame where widget should be created.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
<I>widget</I>
?<I>vert</I>?
?<I>horz</I>?
</DT><DD>
Arrange scrollable area to make <I>widget</I> visible in the window.
<I>vert</I> and <I>horz</I> specify which part of <I>widget</I> must be preferably
visible, in case where <I>widget</I> is too tall or too large to be entirely visible.
<I>vert</I> must be <B>top</B> (the default) or <B>bottom</B>,
and <I>horz</I> must be <B>left</B> (the default) or <B>right</B>.
If <I>vert</I> or <I>horz</I> is not a valid value, area is not scrolled in this direction.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

160
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/ScrolledWindow.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ScrolledWindow</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ScrolledWindow</B>
- Generic scrolled widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrolledWindow</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;(<B>-bg</B> has no effect)</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-auto">-auto</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-managed">-managed</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-scrollbar">-scrollbar</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-sides">-sides</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-size">-size</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setwidget"><B>setwidget</B></A>
<I>widget</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
ScrolledWindow enables user to create easily a widget with its scrollbar.
Scrollbars are created by ScrolledWindow and scroll commands are automatically associated to
a scrollable widget with <B>ScrolledWindow::setwidget</B>.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-auto"><B>-auto</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired auto managed scrollbar:
<LI><B>none</B> means scrollbar are always drawn
<LI><B>horizontal</B> means horizontal scrollbar is drawn as needed
<LI><B>vertical</B> means vertical scrollbar is drawn as needed
<LI><B>both</B> means horizontal and vertical scrollbars are drawn as needed (default value)
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Padding in pixels between client widget and scrollbars.
Default value: <B>1</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-managed"><B>-managed (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If true, scrollbar are managed during creation, so their size are included in the requested size of the
ScrolledWindow. If false, they are not.
Default value: <B>true</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-scrollbar"><B>-scrollbar</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired scrollbar: <B>none</B>, <B>horizontal</B>, <B>vertical</B>
or <B>both</B> (default value).
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-sides"><B>-sides (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Side of the scrollbars.
Possible values are: <B>ne</B>, <B>en</B>, <B>nw</B>, <B>wn</B>, <B>se</B> (default value), <B>es</B>, <B>sw</B>, <B>ws</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-size"><B>-size (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Size of the scrollbars in pixels.
Use </B>0</B> for standard size (default value).<BR>
This option has no effect if widget is <I>themed</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Return the pathname of the frame where the scrolled widget should be created. This command
is no longer needed. You can directly create the scrolled widget as the child
of <I>pathName</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setwidget"><I>pathName</I> <B>setwidget</B></A>
<I>widget</I>
</DT><DD>
Associate <I>widget</I> to the the scrollbars. <I>widget</I> becomes
managed by the ScrolledWindow. The user should not attempt to manage
<I>widget</I> until it is no longer managed by the ScrolledWindow.
<I>widget</I> must be a scrollable widget, i.e. have the options
<B>xscrollcommand</B>/<B>yscrollcommand</B> and the command <B>xview</B>/<B>yview</B>,
such as canvas or text.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

211
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/SelectColor.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>SelectColor</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>SelectColor</B>
- Color selection widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SelectColor</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-background">-background</A></td>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-color">-color</A></td>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></td>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-help">-help</A></td>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></td>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-placement">-placement</A></td>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></td>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></td>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#dialog"><B>dialog</B></A>
<I>pathName</I>
<I>?option value ...?</I>
</DD>
<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#menu"><B>menu</B></A>
<I>pathName</I>
<I>placement</I>
<I>?option value ...?</I>
</DD>
<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#setbasecolor"><B>setbasecolor</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>color</I>
</DD>
<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#setcolor"><B>setcolor</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>color</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
SelectColor provides a simple way to select color. It can be displayed
as a dialog box or as a menubutton.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-background"><B>-background</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the background color of the widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-color"><B>-color</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the initial color used in the widget's color selectors. When modifying a
color that is used in the GUI, the value supplied is typically the existing value of
that color.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be evaluated, with a color value appended, whenever
the color selected in the dialog changes. This facility can be used to modify
a color in the calling GUI and preview the change before deciding whether or not
to accept it. If the user selects "Cancel" in the dialog, the command is called
a final time to restore the initial color (supplied by option <B>-color</B>) that was
used before the dialog was opened.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-help"><B>-help</B></A></DT>
<DD>
This option takes a Boolean value. If the value is Boolean true, the SelectColor
dialog will include a balloon help for text entry and mouse operation.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is centered in its parent. If empty, it is centered in
root window.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-placement"><B>-placement</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Where to place the <i>popup</i> color dialog when displaying it.
Must be any of: <b>at</b>, <b>center</b>, <b>left</b>,
<b>right</b>, <b>above</b>, or <b>below</b>. If <i>-parent</i> is specified,
placement will be in relation to the parent widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Title of the Dialog toplevel.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the type of the SelectColor widget. Must be <B>dialog</B> or
<B>popup</B>. <BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>dialog</I>,
SelectColor::<B>create</B> directly creates the dialog, displays it and
return an empty string if cancel button is pressed or if dialog is destroyed,
and the selected color if ok button is pressed. In all cases, dialog is
destroyed. <BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>popup</I>,
SelectColor::<B>create</B> creates a small, popup dialog with a small set of
predefined colors and a button to activate a full color dialog.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="dialog">SelectColor::<B>dialog</B></A>
<I>pathName</I>
<I>?option value ...?</I>
</DT><DD>
Creates a dialog for the user to select a custom color.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="dialog">SelectColor::<B>menu</B></A>
<I>pathName</I>
<I>placement</I>
<I>?option value ...?</I>
</DT><DD>
Creates a small, popup dialog for the user to select from a predefined list
of colors with an additional button to display a full color dialog.
<p>
<i>placement</i> can be any of <b>at</b>, <b>center</b>, <b>left</b>,
<b>right</b>, <b>above</b>, or <b>below</b>. If <i>-parent</i> is specified,
placement will be in relation to the parent widget.
</p>
</DD></DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setbasecolor">SelectColor::<B>setbasecolor</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>color</I>
</DT><DD>
Set the value of user predefined base color at index <I>index</I> to <I>color</I>.
<I>index</I> must be between 0 and 10.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setcolor">SelectColor::<B>setcolor</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>color</I>
</DT><DD>
Set the value of user predefined color at index <I>index</I> to <I>color</I>.
<I>index</I> must be between 0 and 10.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

152
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/SelectFont.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>SelectFont</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>SelectFont</B>
- Font selection widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SelectFont</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-initialcolor">-initialcolor</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-nosizes">-nosizes</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-sampletext">-sampletext</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD>SelectFont::<A HREF="#loadfont"><B>loadfont</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
SelectFont provides a simple way to choose font. It can be displayed
as a dialog box or as a toolbar.
<BR>Textual items in Dialog box uses <B>-name</B> options so they
can be translated to any language. Symbolic name used are
<B>ok</B>, <B>cancel</B>, <B>font</B>, <B>size</B>, <B>style</B>,
<B>bold</B>, <B>italic</B>, <B>underline</B> and <B>overstrike</B>.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to call when user select a new font when SelectFont <B>type</B>
option is <I>toolbar</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-initialcolor"><B>-initialcolor</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If specified, add an additional button that lets the user pick a
color. This option is ignored if <B>type</B> is <I>toolbar</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-nosizes"><B>-nosizes</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If true, don't show the listbox containing valid font sizes. This
option is ignored if <B>type</B> is <I>toolbar</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is centered in its parent. If empty, it is centered in
root window.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-sampletext"><B>-sampletext</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the text displayed in the preview area.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Title of the Dialog toplevel.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the type of the SelectFont widget. Must be <B>dialog</B> or <B>toolbar</B>.
<BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>dialog</I>, SelectFont::<B>create</B> directly creates the
dialog, displays it and return an empty string if cancel button is
pressed or if dialog is destroyed, and the selected font (and color
if <B>initialcolor</B>) if ok button is pressed. In all cases, dialog
is destroyed.
<BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>toolbar</I>, SelectFont::<B>create</B> returns the pathname
of the widget created.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="loadfont">SelectFont::<B>loadfont</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Load the font available in the system.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

77
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/Separator.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Separator</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Separator</B>
- 3D separator widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Separator</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-relief">-relief</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
Separator is a widget that display an horizontal or vertical 3-D line.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-relief"><B>-relief</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the relief of the Separator. Must be <B>groove</B> (the default) or <B>ridge</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

250
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/SpinBox.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>SpinBox</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>SpinBox</B>
- SpinBox widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SpinBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatdelay</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatinterval</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-command</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragenabled</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragendcmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragevent</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-draginitcmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragtype</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropcmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropenabled</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropovercmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-droptypes</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-editable</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-show</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-takefocus</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-xscrollcommand</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-modifycmd">-modifycmd</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-range">-range</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-values">-values</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getvalue"><B>getvalue</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setvalue"><B>setvalue</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
SpinBox widget enables the user to select a value among a list given by the <B>values</B>
option or a set of values defined by a mininum, a maximum and an increment.
Notice that <B>range</B> option defines a list of values, so <B>getvalue</B> and
<B>setvalue</B> work with both values and range.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-modifycmd"><B>-modifycmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a Tcl command called when the user modify the value of the SpinBox.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-range"><B>-range</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a list of three intergers (or real) describing the minimum, maximum and increment
of the SpinBox.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-values"><B>-values</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the values accepted by the SpinBox. This option takes precedence over
<B>range</B> option.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Set bindings on the entry widget.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>getvalue</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Returns the index of the current text of the SpinBox in the list of values,
or -1 if it doesn't match any value.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>setvalue</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Set the text of the SpinBox to the value indicated by <I>index</I> in the list of values.
<I>index</I> may be specified in any of the following forms:
<P>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT>
<B>last</B>
<DD>
Specifies the last element of the list of values.
<DT><B>first</B>
<DD>
Specifies the first element of the list of values.
<DT>
<B>next</B>
<DD>
Specifies the element following the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
of values.
<DT><B>previous</B>
<DD>
Specifies the element preceding the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
of values.
<DT>
@<I>number</I>
<DD>
Specifies the integer index in the list of values.
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR>
When Entry of the SpinBox has the input focus, it has the following bindings, in addition
to the default Entry bindings:
<UL>
<LI>Page up set the value of the SpinBox to the last value.
<LI>Page down set the value of the SpinBox to the first value.
<LI>Arrow up set the value of the SpinBox to the next value.
<LI>Arrow down set the value of the SpinBox to the previous value.
</UL>
</BODY></HTML>

147
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/StatusBar.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>StatusBar</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>StatusBar</B>
- status bar widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>StatusBar</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-showresize">-showresize</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-pad">-pad</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
StatusBar widget is a simple container widget with a corner resize control,
meant to be placed at the bottom of a toplevel dialog.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-showresize"><B>-showresize</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies whether to show the corner resize control.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-pad"><B>-pad</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The spacing to place around the status bar.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The spacing to place around individual status bar items.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired width for the widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> <B>widget</B>
?<I>option</I> <I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Add a widget to the status bar. Possible options are:
<DL>
<DT><B>-weight</B></DT>
<DD>Weighting of this item for resizing (passed to <B>grid</B>).</DD>
<DT><B>-separator</B></DT>
<DD>Whether to use a separator for this item.</DD>
<DT><B>-sticky</B></DT>
<DD>Passed on to grid.</DD>
<DT><B>-pad</B></DT>
<DD>Override of the widget's <B>-ipad</B> option for this item.</DD>
</DL>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no
<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
options for <I>pathName</I>. If <I>option</I> is specified with no
<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named
<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more
<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the
given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command
returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Delete a widget and associated state from the status bar.</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Get the frame widget for the status bar in which status bar items should be
created.</DD>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A>
</DT><DD>List of items in the status bar.</DD>
<DL>
</BODY></HTML>

107
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/TitleFrame.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>TitleFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>TitleFrame</B>
- Frame with a title
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>TitleFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-baseline">-baseline</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
TitleFrame enables user to create a frame with a title like XmFrame Motif widget.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-baseline"><B>-baseline</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the vertical alignment of the title: <B>top</B>, <B>center</B> or <B>bottom</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a pad between the border of the frame and the user frame.
The value is in screen units.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the horizontal alignment of the title: <B>left</B>, <B>center</B> or <B>right</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Return the frame where the user can create any other widget.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

937
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/Tree.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,937 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Tree</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Tree</B>
- Tree widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Tree</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-closecmd">-closecmd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossfill">-crossfill</A></TD>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossclosebitmap">-crossclosebitmap</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crosscloseimage">-crosscloseimage</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossopenbitmap">-crossopenbitmap</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossopenimage">-crossopenimage</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltax">-deltax</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltay">-deltay</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovermode">-dropovermode</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-linesfill">-linesfill</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-linestipple">-linestipple</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-opencmd">-opencmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-redraw">-redraw</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectcommand">-selectcommand</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectfill">-selectfill</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-showlines">-showlines</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindArea"><B>bindArea</B></A>
<I>event</I>
<I>script</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindImage"><B>bindImage</B></A>
<I>event</I>
<I>script</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindText"><B>bindText</B></A>
<I>event</I>
<I>script</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#closetree"><B>closetree</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#edit"><B>edit</B></A>
<I>node</I>
<I>text</I>
?<I>verifycmd</I>?
?<I>clickres</I>?
?<I>select</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#exists"><B>exists</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#find"><B>find</B></A>
<I>findinfo</I>
?<I>confine</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>parent</I>
<I>node</I>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
<I>node</I>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
<I>node</I>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#line"><B>line</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A>
<I>parent</I>
<I>node</I>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#nodes"><B>nodes</B></A>
<I>node</I>
?<I>first</I>?
?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#opentree"><B>opentree</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#parent"><B>parent</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#reorder"><B>reorder</B></A>
<I>node</I>
<I>neworder</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#selection"><B>selection</B></A>
<I>cmd</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#toggle"><B>toggle</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#visible"><B>visible</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
<B>Tree</B> widget uses canvas to display a hierarchical list of items (called nodes).
Each node is composed of a label with its own font and foreground attributes, and an optional
image or window. Each node can have a list of subnodes, which can be collapsed or expanded.
Each node is drawn in a single line, whose height is defined by the
<B>deltay</B> option, so they must have at most this height.
A node is uniquely identified by a string given at creation (by the
<B>insert</B> command). The node named <I>root</I> is the root of
the tree and is not drawn.
The tree structure is directly maintained by the widget.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-closecmd"><B>-closecmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called when user close a node. The
closed node is appended to the command.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><A NAME="-crossfill"><B>-crossfill</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a foreground color for the cross bitmap.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossclosebitmap"><B>-crossclosebitmap</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a bitmap to be displayed in place of the standard cross
when a node is closed.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-crosscloseimage"><B>-crosscloseimage</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies an image to be displayed in place of the standard cross
when a node is closed. Overrides the -crossclosebitmap option.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossopenbitmap"><B>-crossopenbitmap</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a bitmap to be displayed in place of the standard cross
when a node is open.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossopenimage"><B>-crossopenimage</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies an image to be displayed in place of the standard cross
when a node is open. Overrides the -crossopenbitmap option.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies horizontal indentation between a node and its children.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltay"><B>-deltay</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies vertical size of the nodes.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drag-init</I> events. This command refused the drag
if no node is designated. In other cases:
<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, it returns:
<UL>
<LI>the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>TREE_NODE</I> if empty as the data type,
<LI><I>{copy move link}</I> as the operations,
<LI>the node identifier as the data.
</UL>
If <B>draginitcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the tree,
<LI>the identifier of the dragged node,
<LI>the toplevel created to represent dragged data.
</UL>
and must return a value conforming to <B>draginitcmd</B> option described in
<B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling
and extract node and position.
<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the tree,
<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
<LI>a list describing where the drop occurs. It can be:
<UL>
<LI><I>{</I><B>widget</B><I>}</I>,
<LI><I>{</I><B>node</B> <I>node}</I> or
<LI><I>{</I><B>position</B> <I>node index}</I>.
</UL>
<LI>the current operation,
<LI>the data type,
<LI>the data.
</UL>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling
and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>.
If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, the command is called with the following aguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the tree,
<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
<LI>a list describing where the drop can occur, whose elements are:
<UL>
<LI>the string <I>widget</I> if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>w</I>, else empty string.
<LI>the targeted node if drag icon points a node and <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>n</I>, else empty string.
<LI>a list containing a node and the position within the children of the node where drag
icon points to if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>p</I>, else empty string.
<LI>optionally, the preferred method if drop can occur both inside a node and between two
nodes. The value is <I>position</I> or <I>node</I>.
</UL>
<LI>the current operation,
<LI>the data type,
<LI>the data.
</UL>
The command must return a list with two elements:
<UL>
<LI>the drop status, conforming to those described in <B>dropovercmd</B> option of
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>,
<LI>the choosen method: <I>widget</I>, <I>node</I> or <I>position</I>.
</UL>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovermode"><B>-dropovermode</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the type of <I>drop-over</I> interaction. Must be a combination of
<B>w</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs everywhere on widget,
<B>p</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs between two nodes,
and <B>n</B>, which specifies that drop occurs inside nodes.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
See option <B>droptypes</B> of
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
for more infromation.
<BR>Default is <I>TREE_NODE</I> with operations <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the tree in units of <B>deltay</B> pixels.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-linesfill"><B>-linesfill</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a foreground color for the lines between nodes.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-linestipple"><B>-linestipple</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a stipple bitmap for the lines between nodes.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-opencmd"><B>-opencmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called when the user opens a node. The name
of the opened node is appended to the command.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies distance between image or window and text of the nodes.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-redraw"><B>-redraw</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies wether or not the tree should be redrawn when entering idle.
Set it to false if you call <B>update</B> while modifying the tree.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectcommand"><B>-selectcommand</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a command to be called when the selection is changed. The
path of the tree widget and the selected nodes are appended to the
command.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectfill"><B>-selectfill</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If true, the selection box will be drawn across the entire tree from
left-to-right instead of just around the item text.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-showlines"><B>-showlines</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies whether or not lines should be drawn between nodes.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired width for the tree in units of 8 pixels.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="nodes">NODE NAMES</A></B><BR>
<p>
Certain special characters in node names are automatically substituted
by the tree during operation. These characters are <b>&amp; | ^ !</b>.
They are all substituted with a <b>_</b> character. This is only to
avoid errors because the characters are special to the tree widget.
</p>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindArea"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindArea</B></A>
<I>event</I>
<I>script</I>
</DT><DD>
This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs anywhere within the Tree area.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindImage"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindImage</B></A>
<I>event</I>
<I>script</I>
</DT><DD>
This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the image of a node.
The node idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command and may be used to manipulate the tree (e.g. don't use <B>%W</B>).
<P>
If <B>-selectfill</B> is given, an eventual binding of the background box by <B>bindText</B> is overwritten.
</P>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindText"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindText</B></A>
<I>event</I>
<I>script</I>
</DT><DD>
This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the label of a node.
The node idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command and may be used to manipulate the tree (e.g. don't use <B>%W</B>).
<P>
If <B>-selectfill</B> is given, an eventual binding of the background box by <B>bindImage</B> is overwritten.
</P>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="closetree"><I>pathName</I> <B>closetree</B></A> <I>node</I>
?<I>recurse</I>?
</DT><DD>
This command close all the subtree given by <I>node</I>. Recurse
through the tree starting at <I>node</I> and set <B>open</B> option to 0
depending on <I>recurse</I>. Default value of <I>recurse</I> is <I>true</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is
specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for
<I>pathName</I>. If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the
command returns a list describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will
be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no
<I>option</I> is specified). If one or more <I>option-value</I> pairs are
specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the
given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Deletes all nodes (and children of them) in <I>arg</I>. <I>arg</I> can be a list
of nodes or a list of list of nodes.
To delete all the tree, do <I>$pathName delete [$pathName nodes root]</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="edit"><I>pathName</I> <B>edit</B></A>
<I>node</I>
<I>text</I>
?<I>verifycmd</I>?
?<I>clickres</I>?
?<I>select</I>?
</DT><DD>
Provides a way for the user to edit in place the label of a node. This is
possible only if <I>node</I> is visible (all its parents are open).
<BR>The command takes the initial text as argument and does not modify the label of the
edited node, but returns an empty string if edition is canceled, or the typed text
if edition is accepted.
<BR>When editing, the user can cancel by pressing Escape, or accept by pressing Return.
<BR><I>clickres</I> specifies what to do if the user click outside the editable area.
If <I>clickres</I> is 0 (the default), the edition is canceled.
If <I>clickres</I> is 1, the edition is accepted.
In all other case, the edition continues.
<BR>If edition is accepted and <I>modifycmd</I> is not empty, then it is called with
the new text as argument and must return 1 to accept the new text, 0 to refuse it
and continue edition.
<BR><I>select</I> specifies wether or not the initial text should be selected. Default is 1.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="exists"><I>pathName</I> <B>exists</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns whether or not <I>node</I> exists in the tree.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="find"><I>pathName</I> <B>find</B></A>
<I>findinfo</I>
?<I>confine</I>?
</DT><DD>
<p>
Returns the node given by the position <I>findinfo</I>.
<I>findinfo</I> can take the form of a pixel position <I>@x,y</I> or
of the line number of a currently visible Tree node. The first line
of the Tree has the value of zero.
</p>
<p>
If <I>confine</I> is non-empty, then confine <I>findinfo</I> to only
match pixel positions for the area consumed by Tree labels, not just
anywhere on their lines. (<I>confine</I> has no effect if
<I>findinfo</I> is a line number.)
</p>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the position of <I>node</I> in its parent.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
<I>index</I>
<I>parent</I>
<I>node</I>
?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>
<p>
Inserts a new node identified by <I>node</I> in the children list of
<I>parent</I> at position <I>index</I>.
</p>
<p>
Any instance of <i>#auto</i> within the node name will be replaced by the
number of the item in the order of insertion. The non-printable characters
\1 to \5 are reserved for internal use and should not be present in node
names.
</p>
<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-anchor"><B>-anchor</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the anchor of the image or window of the node. Defaults to w.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-data"><B>-data</B></A></DT>
<DD>
User data associated to the node.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the horizontal indentation of the node. If the value is -1, the
node will be drawn with the deltax for the entire tree.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-drawcross"><B>-drawcross</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies how the cross used to expand or collapse the children of a node
should be drawn.
Must be one of <B>auto</B>, <B>always</B> or <B>never</B>.
<BR>If <B>auto</B>, the cross is drawn only if the node has children.
If <B>always</B>, the cross is always drawn.
If <B>never</B>, the cross is never drawn.
To maintain compatibility with older versions of this widget,
<B>allways</B> is a deprecated synonym to <B>always</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the foreground color of the label of the node.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-font"><B>-font</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a font for the label of the node.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpcmd"><B>-helpcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>
If specified, refers to a command to execute to get the help text to display.
The command must return a string to display.
If the command returns an empty string, no help is displayed.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Text for dynamic help.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies an image to display at the left of the label of the node.
<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-open"><B>-open</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies wether or not the children of the node should be drawn.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the distance between image or window and the text of the node. If
the value is -1, the node will be drawn with the padx for the entire tree.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-selectable"><B>-selectable</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies if the node can be selected or not.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the label of the node.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies a pathname to display at the left of the label of the node.
<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
<I>node</I>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
<I>node</I>
?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the
item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
returns a list describing the current options for the item.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="line"><I>pathName</I> <B>line</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DT><DD>
<p>
Returns the line number where <I>node</I> was drawn. If the node is
not visible then return -1. The first line of the tree has the value
of 0.
</p>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A>
<I>parent</I>
<I>node</I>
<I>index</I>
</DT><DD>
Moves <I>node</I> to the children list of <I>parent</I> at position <I>index</I>.
<I>parent</I> can not be a descendant of <I>node</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="nodes"><I>pathName</I> <B>nodes</B></A>
<I>node</I>
?<I>first</I>?
?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>
Returns parts of the children of <I>node</I>, following <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>.<BR>
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all children.
If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the child at index
<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
are all of the children between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
forms for indices.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="opentree"><I>pathName</I> <B>opentree</B></A> <I>node</I> ?<I>recurse</I>?
</DT><DD>
This command open all the subtree given by <I>node</I>. Recurse through the
tree starting at <I>node</I> and set <B>open</B> option to 1 depending on value
of <I>recurse</I>. Default value of <I>recurse</I> is <I>true</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="parent"><I>pathName</I> <B>parent</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the parent of <I>node</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="reorder"><I>pathName</I> <B>reorder</B></A>
<I>node</I>
<I>neworder</I>
</DT><DD>
Modifies the order of children of <I>node</I> given by <I>neworder</I>. Children of
<I>node</I> that do not appear in <I>neworder</I> are no moved.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DT><DD>
Arrange the scrolling area to make <I>node</I> visible.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="selection"><I>pathName</I> <B>selection</B></A>
<I>cmd</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Modifies the list of selected nodes following <I>cmd</I>:
<DL>
<DT><B>add</B>
<DD>Adds all nodes in <I>arg</I> to the selection.
<DT><B>clear</B>
<DD>Removes all nodes from the selection.
<DT><B>get</B>
<DD>Returns a list containing the indices of current selected nodes.
<DT><B>includes</B>
<DD>Tests if the specified node is selected. Returns true if the answer is yes, and false else.
<DT><B>range</B>
<DD>Sets the selection to all nodes between the two specified ones.
<DT><B>remove</B>
<DD>Removes all nodes in <I>arg</I> from the selection.
<DT><B>set</B>
<DD>Sets the selection to all nodes in <I>arg</I>.
<DT><B>toggle</B>
<DD>Toggles the selection status of all nodes in <I>arg</I>.
</DL>
The subcommands <B>add</B>, <B>range</B>, and <B>set</B> silently
ignore nodes which are declared unselectable. See the node option
<a href="#Node-selectable">-selectable</a> to influence this.
</DD></DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="toggle"><I>pathName</I> <B>toggle</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DT><DD>
Toggle the open/close status of the given <i>node</i>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="visible"><I>pathName</I> <B>visible</B></A>
<I>node</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns whether or not <I>node</I> is visible (all its parents are open).
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
</DD></DL>
<B><A NAME="nodes">BINDINGS</A></B><BR>
<p>
A <b>&lt;&lt;TreeSelect&gt;&gt;</b> virtual event is generated any time the
selection in the tree changes. This is the default behavior of an
item in the tree, but it can be overridden with the bindText or
bindImage command. If the button 1 binding is overridden, this event may
not be generated.
</p>
<p>
The tree has all the standard mouse wheel bindings when it has focus.
</p>
</BODY></HTML>

505
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/Widget.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,505 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Widget</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<IMG SRC="constr.gif" WIDTH="40" HEIGHT="40"> Under construction ...<BR>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Widget</B>
- The Widget base class
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#addmap"><B>addmap</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>subclass</I>
<I>subpath</I>
<I>options</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#bwinclude"><B>bwinclude</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>subclass</I>
<I>subpath</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>options</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#create"><B>create</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>path</I>
?<I>rename</I>?
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#declare"><B>declare</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>optlist</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#define"><B>define</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>filename</I>
?<I>class ...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#destroy"><B>destroy</B></A>
<I>path</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#focusNext"><B>focusNext</B></A>
<I>w</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#focusOK"><B>focusOK</B></A>
<I>w</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#focusPrev"><B>focusPrev</B></A>
<I>w</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#generate-doc"><B>generate-doc</B></A>
<I>dir</I>
<I>widgetlist</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#generate-widget-doc"><B>generate-widget-doc</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>iscmd</I>
<I>file</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#getoption"><B>getoption</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#getVariable"><B>getVariable</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>varName</I>
<I>?myVarName?</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#hasChanged"><B>hasChanged</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>option</I>
<I>pvalue</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#init"><B>init</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>path</I>
<I>options</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#setoption"><B>setoption</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>option</I>
<I>value</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#subcget"><B>subcget</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>subwidget</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#syncoptions"><B>syncoptions</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>subclass</I>
<I>subpath</I>
<I>options</I>
</DD>
<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#tkinclude"><B>tkinclude</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>tkwidget</I>
<I>subpath</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
The <B>Widget</B> namespace handle data associated to all BWidget and provide commands
to easily define BWidget.
<BR>For commands can be used to define a BWidget:
<B>tkinclude</B>, <B>bwinclude</B>, <B>declare</B>, <B>addmap</B> and <B>syncoptions</B>.
Here is the definition of <A HREF="ComboBox.html">ComboBox</A> widget:
<BR><BR>
<CENTER>
<TABLE BORDER=2 CELSPACING=2 WIDTH=80%>
<TR><TD><PRE>
namespace eval ComboBox {
<FONT COLOR=red><I># We're using ArrowButton, Entry and LabelFrame</I></FONT>
ArrowButton::use
Entry::use
LabelFrame::use
<FONT COLOR=red><I># Include resources of LabelFrame</I></FONT>
Widget::bwinclude ComboBox LabelFrame .labf \
rename {-text -label} \
remove {-focus} \
prefix {label -justify -width -anchor -height -font} \
initialize {-relief sunken -borderwidth 2}
<FONT COLOR=red><I># Include resources of Entry</I></FONT>
Widget::bwinclude ComboBox Entry .e \
remove {-relief -bd -borderwidth -bg -fg} \
rename {-foreground -entryfg -background -entrybg}
<FONT COLOR=red><I># Declare new resources</I></FONT>
Widget::declare ComboBox {
{-height TkResource 0 0 listbox}
{-values String "" 0}
{-modifycmd String "" 0}
{-postcommand String "" 0}
}
<FONT COLOR=red><I># Map resources to subwidget</I></FONT>
Widget::addmap ComboBox "" :cmd {-background {}}
Widget::addmap ComboBox ArrowButton .a \
{-foreground {} -background {} -disabledforeground {} -state {}}
<FONT COLOR=red><I># Synchronize subwidget options</I></FONT>
Widget::syncoptions ComboBox Entry .e {-text {}}
Widget::syncoptions ComboBox LabelFrame .labf {-label -text -underline {}}
proc use {} {}
}</PRE>
</TD></TR>
</TABLE></CENTER>
</P>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="addmap">Widget::<B>addmap</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>subclass</I>
<I>subpath</I>
<I>options</I>
</DT><DD>
This command map some resources to subwidget.
Mapped resources automatically configure subwidget when widget is configured.
<UL>
<LI><I>class</I> is the class of the new BWidget
<LI><I>subclass</I> is the class the subwidget (BWidget class, e.g Entry, or empty for Tk widget)
<LI><I>subpath</I> is the path of the subwidget
<LI><I>options</I> is the list <I>{option realres ...}</I> of options to map to subwidget
</UL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bwinclude">Widget::<B>bwinclude</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>subclass</I>
<I>subpath</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
This command includes into a new BWidget the resources of another BWidget.
Arguments are:
<UL>
<LI><I>class</I> class of the new widget
<LI><I>subclass</I> class name of the BWidget to be included
<LI><I>subpath</I> path of the widget to configure when BWidget is configured
<LI><I>options</I> is:
<UL>
<LI><I><B>include</B> {option option ...}</I>
<BR>list of options to include (all if not defined)
<LI><I><B>remove</B> {option option ...}</I>
<BR> list of options to remove
<LI><I><B>rename</B> {option name option name ...}</I>
<BR>list of options to rename
<LI><I><B>prefix</B> {prefix option option ...}</I>
<BR>pefix all <I>option</I> by <I>prefix</I>
<LI><I><B>initialize</B> {option value option value ...}</I>
<BR>default value of options
<LI><I><B>readonly</B> {option value option value ...}</I>
<BR>new readonly flag
</UL></UL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget">Widget::<B>cget</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the value of <I>option</I> of BWidget <I>path</I>. <B>cget</B> tests the option
existence and takes care of synchronization with subwidget.
Typically called by the BWidget <B>cget</B> command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure">Widget::<B>configure</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>options</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="create">Widget::<B>create</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>path</I>
?<I>rename</I>?
</DT><DD>
The standard method for creating a BWidget. The real widget path
is renamed to $path:cmd, and a new proc is created to replace the
path which points to the BWidget's commands.
<p>
If <i>rename</i> is false, the path will not be renamed, but the
proc will still be created. This is useful when inheriting another
BWidget who will already have renamed the widget.
</p>
<p>
The command returns the widget path. This command is usually the
last command executed in the ::create command for the widget.
</p>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="declare">Widget::<B>declare</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>optlist</I>
</DT><DD>
This command declare new resources for a BWidget.
<UL>
<LI><I>class</I> is class of the new widget
<LI><I>options</I> is the list describing new options. Each new option is a list
<B>{option type value ro ?args?}</B> where:
<UL>
<LI><I>option</I> is the name of the option
<LI><I>type</I> is the type of the option
<LI><I>value</I> is the default value of the option
<LI><I>ro</I> is the readonly flag of the option
<LI><I>args</I> depends on type
</UL></UL>
<BR>
<I>type</I> can be:
<BR>
<DL>
<DT><B>TkResource</B></DT>
<DD>
<I>value</I> of <I>option</I> denotes a resource of a Tk widget. <I>args</I> must be <I>class</I> or
<I>{class realoption}</I>. <I>class</I> is the creation command of the Tk widget, e.g.
<B>entry</B>.
The second form must be used if <I>option</I> has not the same name in Tk widget,
but <I>realoption</I>.
<BR>If <I>value</I> is empty, it is initialized to the default value of the Tk widget.
</DD>
<DT><B>BwResource</B></DT>
<DD>
<I>value</I> of <I>option</I> denotes a resource of a BWidget. <I>args</I> must be <I>class</I> or
<I>{class realoption}</I>. <I>class</I> is the name of the namespace of the BWidget, e.g.
<B>LabelFrame</B>.
The second form must be used if <I>option</I> has not the same name in BWidget,
but <I>realoption</I>.
<BR>If <I>value</I> is empty, it is initialized to the default value of the BWidget.
</DD>
<DT><B>Int</B></DT>
<DD><I>value</I> of <I>option</I> is an integer.
<I>args</I> can be <I>{?min? ?max?}</I> to force it to be in a range. The test is
<I>[expr $option &gt; $min] && [expr $option &lt; $max]</I> so
if args is <I>{0 10}</I>, value must be beetween 0 and 10 exclude,
if <I>args</I> is <I>{=0 =10}</I> , value must be beetween 0 and 10 include.
</DD>
<DT><B>Boolean</B></DT>
<DD><I>value</I> of <I>option</I> is a boolean. True values can be <B>1</B>, <B>true</B> or <B>yes</B>.
False values can be <B>0</B>, <B>false</B> or <B>no</B>. <B>Widget::cget</B> always return
0 or 1.
</DD>
<DT><B>Enum</B></DT>
<DD>
<I>value</I> of <I>option</I> is a element of a enumeration. <I>args</I> must be the list
of enumeration, e.g. <I>{top left bottom right}</I>.
</DD>
<DT><B>Flag</B></DT>
<DD>
<I>value</I> of <I>option</I> is a combination of a set of chars. <I>args</I> must be a
string defining the set.
</DD>
<DT><B>String</B></DT>
<DD>
<DD><I>value</I> of <I>option</I> is any uncontrolled string.
</DD>
<DT><B>Synonym</B></DT>
<DD>
<DD><I>option</I> is a synonym of option <I>args</I>. <I>value</I> has no effect here.
</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="define">Widget::<B>define</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>filename</I>
?<I>class ...</I>?
</DT><DD>
<p>
This command is used to define a new BWidget class. It is
usually the first command executed in a new widget definition.
</p>
<ul>
<li><i>class</i> is the name of the new widget class.</li>
<li><i>filename</i> is the name of the file (without extension) in the
BWidget distribution that defines this class.</li>
<li><i>?-classonly?</i> If present, the class is not setup.</li>
<li><i>?-namespace ns?</i> The namespace where the widget's procedures live
in; defaults to the class name.</li>
</ul>
<p>
Each class defined after the filename is a class that this widget
depends on. The ::use command will be called for each of these
classes after the new widget has been defined.
</p>
<p>
If <i>-classonly</i> option is not given this command does several things to
setup the new class. First, it creates an alias in the global namespace for
the name of the class that points to the class's ::create subcommand.
Second, it defines a ::use subcommand for the class which other classes can
use to load this class on the fly. Lastly, it creates a default binding to
the &lt;Destroy&gt; event for the class that calls Widget::destroy on the
path. This is the default setup for almost all widgets in the BWidget
package.
</p>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="destroy">Widget::<B>destroy</B></A>
<I>path</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="focusNext">Widget::<B>focusNext</B></A>
<I>w</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="focusOK">Widget::<B>focusOK</B></A>
<I>w</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="focusPrev">Widget::<B>focusPrev</B></A>
<I>w</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="generate-doc">Widget::<B>generate-doc</B></A>
<I>dir</I>
<I>widgetlist</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="generate-widget-doc">Widget::<B>generate-widget-doc</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>iscmd</I>
<I>file</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getoption">Widget::<B>getoption</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the value of <I>option</I> of BWidget <I>path</I>. This command does not test
option existence, does not handle synonym and does not take care of synchronization with
subwidget.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getVariable">Widget::<B>getVariable</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>varName</I>
<I>?myVarName?</I>
</DT><DD>
<p>
Make the variable <i>varName</i> relational to <i>path</i> accessible in
the current procedure. The variable will be created in the widget namespace
for <i>path</i> and can be used for storing widget-specific information.
When <i>path</i> is destroyed, any variable accessed in this manner will be
destroyed with it.
</p>
<p>
If <i>myVarName</i> is specified, the variable will be accessible in the
current procedure as that name.
</p>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="hasChanged">Widget::<B>hasChanged</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>option</I>
<I>pvalue</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="init">Widget::<B>init</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>path</I>
<I>options</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setoption">Widget::<B>setoption</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>option</I>
<I>value</I>
</DT><DD>
Set the value of <I>option</I> of BWidget <I>path</I> without option test, subwidget mapping,
synonym handling and does not set the modification flag.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="subcget">Widget::<B>subcget</B></A>
<I>path</I>
<I>subwidget</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the list of all option/value of BWidget <I>path</I> that are mapped to <I>subwidget</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="syncoptions">Widget::<B>syncoptions</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>subclass</I>
<I>subpath</I>
<I>options</I>
</DT><DD>
This command synchronize options value of a subwidget.
Used when an option of a subwidget is modified out of the BWidget <B>configure</B> command.
<UL>
<LI><I>class</I> is the class of the new BWidget
<LI><I>subclass</I> is the class the subwidget (BWidget class, e.g Entry, or empty for Tk widget)
<LI><I>subpath</I> is the path of the subwidget
<LI><I>options</I> is the list <I>{option realres ...}</I> of options to synchronize
with subwidget
</UL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="tkinclude">Widget::<B>tkinclude</B></A>
<I>class</I>
<I>tkwidget</I>
<I>subpath</I>
?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
This command includes into a new BWidget the resources of a Tk widget.
Arguments are:
<UL>
<LI><I>class</I> class of the new widget
<LI><I>tkwidger</I> command name of the Tk widget to be included
<LI><I>subpath</I> path of the widget to configure when BWidget is configured
<LI><I>options</I> is:
<UL>
<LI><I><B>include</B> {option option ...}</I>
<BR>list of options to include (all if not defined)
<LI><I><B>remove</B> {option option ...}</I>
<BR>list of options to remove
<LI><I><B>rename</B> {option name option name ...}</I>
<BR>list of options to rename
<LI><I><B>prefix</B> {prefix option option ...}</I>
<BR>pefix all <I>option</I> by <I>prefix</I>
<LI><I><B>initialize</B> {option value option value ...}</I>
<BR>default value of options
<LI><I><B>readonly</B> {option value option value ...}</I>
<BR>new readonly flag
</UL></UL>
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

95
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/contents.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
<HTML><BODY BGCOLOR=white target=Manual>
<BR><BR><DT><B>Simple Widgets</B>
<DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=0>
<TR><TD><A HREF="Label.html">Label</A></TD>
<TD>Label widget with <B>state</B> option, dynamic help and drag and drop facilities</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="Entry.html">Entry</A></TD>
<TD>Entry widget with <B>state</B> option, dynamic help and drag and drop facilities</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="Button.html">Button</A></TD>
<TD>Button widget with enhanced options</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">ArrowButton</A></TD>
<TD>Button widget with an arrow shape.</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="ProgressBar.html">ProgressBar</A></TD>
<TD>Progress indicator widget</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="ScrollView.html">ScrollView</A></TD>
<TD>Display the visible area of a scrolled window</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="Separator.html">Separator</A></TD>
<TD>3D separator widget</TD></TR>
</TABLE>
<BR><BR><DT><B>Manager Widgets</B>
<DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=0>
<TR><TD><A HREF="MainFrame.html">MainFrame</A></TD>
<TD>Manage toplevel with menu, toolbar and statusbar </TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="LabelFrame.html">LabelFrame</A></TD>
<TD>Frame with a Label</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="TitleFrame.html">TitleFrame</A></TD>
<TD>Frame with a title (consider Tk 8.4+ labelframe instead)</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="PanelFrame.html">PanelFrame</A></TD>
<TD>Frame with a boxed title area</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="ScrolledWindow.html">ScrolledWindow</A></TD>
<TD>Generic scrolled widget</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="ScrollableFrame.html">ScrollableFrame</A></TD>
<TD>Scrollable frame containing widget</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="PanedWindow.html">PanedWindow</A></TD>
<TD>Tiled layout manager widget (consider Tk 8.4+ panedwindow instead)</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="ButtonBox.html">ButtonBox</A></TD>
<TD>Set of buttons with horizontal or vertical layout</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="PagesManager.html">PagesManager</A></TD>
<TD>Pages manager widget</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="NoteBook.html">NoteBook</A></TD>
<TD>Notebook manager widget</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="Dialog.html">Dialog</A></TD>
<TD>Dialog abstraction with custom buttons</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="StatusBar.html">StatusBar</A></TD>
<TD>Status bar widget with resize control</TD></TR>
</TABLE>
<BR><BR><DT><B>Composite Widgets</B>
<DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=0>
<TR><TD><A HREF="LabelEntry.html">LabelEntry</A></TD>
<TD>
LabelFrame containing an Entry widget.
</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="ComboBox.html">ComboBox</A></TD>
<TD>ComboBox widget</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="SpinBox.html">SpinBox</A></TD>
<TD>SpinBox widget (consider Tk 8.4+ spinbox instead)</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="Tree.html">Tree</A></TD>
<TD>Tree widget</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="ListBox.html">ListBox</A></TD>
<TD>ListBox widget</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="MessageDlg.html">MessageDlg</A></TD>
<TD>Message dialog box</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="ProgressDlg.html">ProgressDlg</A></TD>
<TD>Progress indicator dialog box</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="PasswdDlg.html">PasswdDlg</A></TD>
<TD>Login/Password dialog box</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="SelectFont.html">SelectFont</A></TD>
<TD>Font selection widget</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="SelectColor.html">SelectColor</A></TD>
<TD>Color selection widget</TD></TR>
</TABLE>
<BR><BR><DT><B>Commands Classes</B>
<DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=0>
<TR><TD><A HREF="Widget.html">Widget</A></TD>
<TD>The Widget base class</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A></TD>
<TD>Provide help to Tk widget or BWidget</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="DragSite.html">DragSite</A></TD>
<TD>Commands set for Drag facilities</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="DropSite.html">DropSite</A></TD>
<TD>Commands set for Drop facilities</TD></TR>
<TR><TD><A HREF="BWidget.html">BWidget</A></TD>
<TD>Description text</TD></TR>
</TABLE>
</DD>
<BR><HR><BR><B>Load BWidget</B><BR><BR>
Possible load sequence:
<pre>
# If package msgcat is available, its locale is used for BWidget
package require msgcat
# load BWidget
package require BWidget
</pre>
</BODY></HTML>

7
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/index.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>BWidget Manual Pages</TITLE></HEAD>
<FRAMESET COLS="180,*" BORDER=0>
<FRAME SRC=navtree.html NAME="Menu" SCROLLING=AUTO>
<FRAME SRC=contents.html NAME="Manual" SCROLLING=AUTO>
</FRAMESET>
</HTML>

41
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/navtree.html Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
<HTML><BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<FONT SIZE=1><STRONG><A HREF="contents.html" TARGET=Manual>Brief description</A></STRONG></FONT><BR>
<FONT SIZE=1><STRONG>Simple Widgets</STRONG></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="Label.html" TARGET=Manual>Label</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="Entry.html" TARGET=Manual>Entry</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="Button.html" TARGET=Manual>Button</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="ArrowButton.html" TARGET=Manual>ArrowButton</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="ProgressBar.html" TARGET=Manual>ProgressBar</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="ScrollView.html" TARGET=Manual>ScrollView</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="Separator.html" TARGET=Manual>Separator</A></FONT><BR>
<FONT SIZE=1><STRONG>Manager Widgets</STRONG></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="MainFrame.html" TARGET=Manual>MainFrame</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="LabelFrame.html" TARGET=Manual>LabelFrame</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="TitleFrame.html" TARGET=Manual>TitleFrame</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="PanelFrame.html" TARGET=Manual>PanelFrame</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="ScrolledWindow.html" TARGET=Manual>ScrolledWindow</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="ScrollableFrame.html" TARGET=Manual>ScrollableFrame</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="PanedWindow.html" TARGET=Manual>PanedWindow</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="ButtonBox.html" TARGET=Manual>ButtonBox</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="PagesManager.html" TARGET=Manual>PagesManager</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="NoteBook.html" TARGET=Manual>NoteBook</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="Dialog.html" TARGET=Manual>Dialog</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="StatusBar.html" TARGET=Manual>StatusBar</A></FONT><BR>
<FONT SIZE=1><STRONG>Composite Widgets</STRONG></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="LabelEntry.html" TARGET=Manual>LabelEntry</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="ComboBox.html" TARGET=Manual>ComboBox</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="SpinBox.html" TARGET=Manual>SpinBox</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="Tree.html" TARGET=Manual>Tree</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="ListBox.html" TARGET=Manual>ListBox</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="MessageDlg.html" TARGET=Manual>MessageDlg</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="ProgressDlg.html" TARGET=Manual>ProgressDlg</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="PasswdDlg.html" TARGET=Manual>PasswdDlg</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="SelectFont.html" TARGET=Manual>SelectFont</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="SelectColor.html" TARGET=Manual>SelectColor</A></FONT><BR>
<FONT SIZE=1><STRONG>Commands Classes</STRONG></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="Widget.html" TARGET=Manual>Widget</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="DynamicHelp.html" TARGET=Manual>DynamicHelp</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="DragSite.html" TARGET=Manual>DragSite</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="DropSite.html" TARGET=Manual>DropSite</A></FONT><BR>
&nbsp;&nbsp;<FONT SIZE=1><A HREF="BWidget.html" TARGET=Manual>BWidget</A></FONT><BR>
</BODY></HTML>

458
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/BWman/options.htm Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,458 @@
<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Tk Built-In Commands - options manual page</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M2" NAME="L2">NAME</A>
<DL><DD>options - Standard options supported by widgets</DL>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M3" NAME="L3">DESCRIPTION</A>
<DL>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-activebackground" NAME="L4">-activebackground, activeBackground, Foreground</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-activeborderwidth" NAME="L5">-activeborderwidth, activeBorderWidth, BorderWidth</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-activeforeground" NAME="L6">-activeforeground, activeForeground, Background</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor" NAME="L7">-anchor, anchor, Anchor</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-background" NAME="L8">-background or -bg, background, Background</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-bitmap" NAME="L9">-bitmap, bitmap, Bitmap</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth" NAME="L10">-borderwidth or -bd, borderWidth, BorderWidth</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor" NAME="L11">-cursor, cursor, Cursor</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledbackground" NAME="L12">-disabledbackground, disabledBackground, DisabledBackground</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground" NAME="L12">-disabledforeground, disabledForeground, DisabledForeground</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-exportselection" NAME="L13">-exportselection, exportSelection, ExportSelection</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-font" NAME="L14">-font, font, Font</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground" NAME="L15">-foreground or -fg, foreground, Foreground</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground" NAME="L16">-highlightbackground, highlightBackground, HighlightBackground</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor" NAME="L17">-highlightcolor, highlightColor, HighlightColor</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness" NAME="L18">-highlightthickness, highlightThickness, HighlightThickness</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-image" NAME="L19">-image, image, Image</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-insertbackground" NAME="L20">-insertbackground, insertBackground, Foreground</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-insertborderwidth" NAME="L21">-insertborderwidth, insertBorderWidth, BorderWidth</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-insertofftime" NAME="L22">-insertofftime, insertOffTime, OffTime</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-insertontime" NAME="L23">-insertontime, insertOnTime, OnTime</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-insertwidth" NAME="L24">-insertwidth, insertWidth, InsertWidth</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-jump" NAME="L25">-jump, jump, Jump</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-justify" NAME="L26">-justify, justify, Justify</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-orient" NAME="L27">-orient, orient, Orient</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-padx" NAME="L28">-padx, padX, Pad</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-pady" NAME="L29">-pady, padY, Pad</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-relief" NAME="L30">-relief, relief, Relief</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay" NAME="L31">-repeatdelay, repeatDelay, RepeatDelay</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval" NAME="L32">-repeatinterval, repeatInterval, RepeatInterval</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground" NAME="L33">-selectbackground, selectBackground, Foreground</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-selectborderwidth" NAME="L34">-selectborderwidth, selectBorderWidth, BorderWidth</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground" NAME="L35">-selectforeground, selectForeground, Background</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-setgrid" NAME="L36">-setgrid, setGrid, SetGrid</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus" NAME="L37">-takefocus, takeFocus, TakeFocus</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-text" NAME="L38">-text, text, Text</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable" NAME="L39">-textvariable, textVariable, Variable</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor" NAME="L40">-troughcolor, troughColor, Background</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-underline" NAME="L41">-underline, underline, Underline</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength" NAME="L42">-wraplength, wrapLength, WrapLength</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand" NAME="L43">-xscrollcommand, xScrollCommand, ScrollCommand</A>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand" NAME="L44">-yscrollcommand, yScrollCommand, ScrollCommand</A>
</DL>
<DD><A HREF="options.htm#M4" NAME="L45">KEYWORDS</A>
</DL><HR>
<H3><A NAME="M2">NAME</A></H3>
options - Standard options supported by widgets
<H3><A NAME="M3">DESCRIPTION</A></H3>
This manual entry describes the common configuration options supported
by widgets in the Tk toolkit. Every widget does not necessarily support
every option (see the manual entries for individual widgets for a list
of the standard options supported by that widget), but if a widget does
support an option with one of the names listed below, then the option
has exactly the effect described below.
<P>
In the descriptions below, ``Command-Line Name'' refers to the
switch used in class commands and <B>configure</B> widget commands to
set this value. For example, if an option's command-line switch is
<B>-foreground</B> and there exists a widget <B>.a.b.c</B>, then the
command
<PRE><B>.a.b.c configure -foreground black</B></PRE>
may be used to specify the value <B>black</B> for the option in the
the widget <B>.a.b.c</B>. Command-line switches may be abbreviated,
as long as the abbreviation is unambiguous.
``Database Name'' refers to the option's name in the option database (e.g.
in .Xdefaults files). ``Database Class'' refers to the option's class value
in the option database.
<DL>
<DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-activebackground">-activebackground</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>activeBackground</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Foreground</B>
<DD>Specifies background color to use when drawing active elements.
An element (a widget or portion of a widget) is active if the
mouse cursor is positioned over the element and pressing a mouse button
will cause some action to occur.
If strict Motif compliance has been requested by setting the
<B>tk_strictMotif</B> variable, this option will normally be
ignored; the normal background color will be used instead.
For some elements on Windows and Macintosh systems, the active color
will only be used while mouse button 1 is pressed over the element.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-activeborderwidth">-activeborderwidth</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>activeBorderWidth</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>BorderWidth</B>
<DD>Specifies a non-negative value indicating
the width of the 3-D border drawn around active elements. See above for
definition of active elements.
The value may have any of the forms acceptable to <B><A HREF="../TkLib/GetPixels.htm">Tk_GetPixels</A></B>.
This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more
than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons).
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-activeforeground">-activeforeground</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>activeForeground</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Background</B>
<DD>Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements.
See above for definition of active elements.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-anchor">-anchor</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>anchor</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Anchor</B>
<DD>Specifies how the information in a widget (e.g. text or a bitmap)
is to be displayed in the widget.
Must be one of the values <B>n</B>, <B>ne</B>, <B>e</B>, <B>se</B>,
<B>s</B>, <B>sw</B>, <B>w</B>, <B>nw</B>, or <B>center</B>.
For example, <B>nw</B> means display the information such that its
top-left corner is at the top-left corner of the widget.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-background">-background or -bg</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>background</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Background</B>
<DD>Specifies the normal background color to use when displaying the
widget.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-bitmap">-bitmap</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>bitmap</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Bitmap</B>
<DD>Specifies a bitmap to display in the widget, in any of the forms
acceptable to <B><A HREF="../TkLib/GetBitmap.htm">Tk_GetBitmap</A></B>.
The exact way in which the bitmap is displayed may be affected by
other options such as <B>anchor</B> or <B>justify</B>.
Typically, if this option is specified then it overrides other
options that specify a textual value to display in the widget;
the <B>bitmap</B> option may be reset to an empty string to re-enable
a text display.
In widgets that support both <B>bitmap</B> and <B>image</B> options,
<B>image</B> will usually override <B>bitmap</B>.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>borderWidth</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>BorderWidth</B>
<DD>Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width
of the 3-D border to draw around the outside of the widget (if such a
border is being drawn; the <B>relief</B> option typically determines
this). The value may also be used when drawing 3-D effects in the
interior of the widget.
The value may have any of the forms acceptable to <B><A HREF="../TkLib/GetPixels.htm">Tk_GetPixels</A></B>.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-cursor">-cursor</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>cursor</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Cursor</B>
<DD>Specifies the mouse cursor to be used for the widget.
The value may have any of the forms acceptable to <B><A HREF="../TkLib/GetCursor.htm">Tk_GetCursor</A></B>.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></B>
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-disabledbackground">-disabledbackground</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>disabledBackground</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>DisabledBackground</B>
<DD>Specifies background color to use when drawing a disabled element.
If the option is specified as an empty string (which is typically the
case on monochrome displays), disabled elements are drawn with the
normal background color but they are dimmed by drawing them
with a stippled fill pattern.
<DT>Database Name: <B>disabledForeground</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>DisabledForeground</B>
<DD>Specifies foreground color to use when drawing a disabled element.
If the option is specified as an empty string (which is typically the
case on monochrome displays), disabled elements are drawn with the
normal foreground color but they are dimmed by drawing them
with a stippled fill pattern.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-exportselection">-exportselection</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>exportSelection</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>ExportSelection</B>
<DD>Specifies whether or not a selection in the widget should also be
the X selection.
The value may have any of the forms accepted by <B><A HREF="../TclLib/GetInt.htm">Tcl_GetBoolean</A></B>,
such as <B>true</B>, <B>false</B>, <B>0</B>, <B>1</B>, <B>yes</B>, or <B>no</B>.
If the selection is exported, then selecting in the widget deselects
the current X selection, selecting outside the widget deselects any
widget selection, and the widget will respond to selection retrieval
requests when it has a selection. The default is usually for widgets
to export selections.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-font">-font</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B><A HREF="../TkCmd/font.htm">font</A></B>
<DT>Database Class: <B><A HREF="../TkCmd/font.htm">Font</A></B>
<DD>Specifies the font to use when drawing text inside the widget.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>foreground</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Foreground</B>
<DD>Specifies the normal foreground color to use when displaying the widget.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>highlightBackground</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>HighlightBackground</B>
<DD>Specifies the color to display in the traversal highlight region when
the widget does not have the input focus.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>highlightColor</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>HighlightColor</B>
<DD>Specifies the color to use for the traversal highlight rectangle that is
drawn around the widget when it has the input focus.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>highlightThickness</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>HighlightThickness</B>
<DD>Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width of the highlight
rectangle to draw around the outside of the widget when it has the
input focus.
The value may have any of the forms acceptable to <B><A HREF="../TkLib/GetPixels.htm">Tk_GetPixels</A></B>.
If the value is zero, no focus highlight is drawn around the widget.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-image">-image</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>image</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Image</B>
<DD>Specifies an image to display in the widget, which must have been
created with the <B><A HREF="../TkCmd/image.htm">image create</A></B> command.
Typically, if the <B>image</B> option is specified then it overrides other
options that specify a bitmap or textual value to display in the widget;
the <B>image</B> option may be reset to an empty string to re-enable
a bitmap or text display.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-insertbackground">-insertbackground</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>insertBackground</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Foreground</B>
<DD>Specifies the color to use as background in the area covered by the
insertion cursor. This color will normally override either the normal
background for the widget (or the selection background if the insertion
cursor happens to fall in the selection).
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-insertborderwidth">-insertborderwidth</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>insertBorderWidth</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>BorderWidth</B>
<DD>Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width
of the 3-D border to draw around the insertion cursor.
The value may have any of the forms acceptable to <B><A HREF="../TkLib/GetPixels.htm">Tk_GetPixels</A></B>.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-insertofftime">-insertofftime</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>insertOffTime</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>OffTime</B>
<DD>Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating the number of
milliseconds the insertion cursor should remain ``off'' in each blink cycle.
If this option is zero then the cursor doesn't blink: it is on
all the time.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-insertontime">-insertontime</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>insertOnTime</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>OnTime</B>
<DD>Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating the number of
milliseconds the insertion cursor should remain ``on'' in each blink cycle.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-insertwidth">-insertwidth</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>insertWidth</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>InsertWidth</B>
<DD>Specifies a value indicating the total width of the insertion cursor.
The value may have any of the forms acceptable to <B><A HREF="../TkLib/GetPixels.htm">Tk_GetPixels</A></B>.
If a border has been specified for the insertion
cursor (using the <B>insertBorderWidth</B> option), the border
will be drawn inside the width specified by the <B>insertWidth</B>
option.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-jump">-jump</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>jump</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Jump</B>
<DD>For widgets with a slider that can be dragged to adjust a value,
such as scrollbars, this option determines when
notifications are made about changes in the value.
The option's value must be a boolean of the form accepted by
<B><A HREF="../TclLib/GetInt.htm">Tcl_GetBoolean</A></B>.
If the value is false, updates are made continuously as the
slider is dragged.
If the value is true, updates are delayed until the mouse button
is released to end the drag; at that point a single notification
is made (the value ``jumps'' rather than changing smoothly).
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-justify">-justify</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>justify</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Justify</B>
<DD>When there are multiple lines of text displayed in a widget, this
option determines how the lines line up with each other.
Must be one of <B>left</B>, <B>center</B>, or <B>right</B>.
<B>Left</B> means that the lines' left edges all line up, <B>center</B>
means that the lines' centers are aligned, and <B>right</B> means
that the lines' right edges line up.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-orient">-orient</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>orient</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Orient</B>
<DD>For widgets that can lay themselves out with either a horizontal
or vertical orientation, such as scrollbars, this option specifies
which orientation should be used. Must be either <B>horizontal</B>
or <B>vertical</B> or an abbreviation of one of these.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-padx">-padx</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>padX</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Pad</B>
<DD>Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space
to request for the widget in the X-direction.
The value may have any of the forms acceptable to <B><A HREF="../TkLib/GetPixels.htm">Tk_GetPixels</A></B>.
When computing how large a window it needs, the widget will
add this amount to the width it would normally need (as determined
by the width of the things displayed in the widget); if the geometry
manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra
internal space to the left and/or right of what it displays inside.
Most widgets only use this option for padding text: if they are
displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding
options.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-pady">-pady</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>padY</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Pad</B>
<DD>Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space
to request for the widget in the Y-direction.
The value may have any of the forms acceptable to <B><A HREF="../TkLib/GetPixels.htm">Tk_GetPixels</A></B>.
When computing how large a window it needs, the widget will add
this amount to the height it would normally need (as determined by
the height of the things displayed in the widget); if the geometry
manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra
internal space above and/or below what it displays inside.
Most widgets only use this option for padding text: if they are
displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding
options.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-relief">-relief</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>relief</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Relief</B>
<DD>Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget. Acceptable
values are <B>raised</B>, <B>sunken</B>, <B>flat</B>, <B>ridge</B>,
<B>solid</B>, and <B>groove</B>.
The value
indicates how the interior of the widget should appear relative
to its exterior; for example, <B>raised</B> means the interior of
the widget should appear to protrude from the screen, relative to
the exterior of the widget.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>repeatDelay</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>RepeatDelay</B>
<DD>Specifies the number of milliseconds a button or key must be held
down before it begins to auto-repeat. Used, for example, on the
up- and down-arrows in scrollbars.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>repeatInterval</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>RepeatInterval</B>
<DD>Used in conjunction with <B>repeatDelay</B>: once auto-repeat
begins, this option determines the number of milliseconds between
auto-repeats.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>selectBackground</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Foreground</B>
<DD>Specifies the background color to use when displaying selected
items.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-selectborderwidth">-selectborderwidth</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>selectBorderWidth</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>BorderWidth</B>
<DD>Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width
of the 3-D border to draw around selected items.
The value may have any of the forms acceptable to <B><A HREF="../TkLib/GetPixels.htm">Tk_GetPixels</A></B>.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>selectForeground</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Background</B>
<DD>Specifies the foreground color to use when displaying selected
items.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-setgrid">-setgrid</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>setGrid</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>SetGrid</B>
<DD>Specifies a boolean value that determines whether this widget controls the
resizing grid for its top-level window.
This option is typically used in text widgets, where the information
in the widget has a natural size (the size of a character) and it makes
sense for the window's dimensions to be integral numbers of these units.
These natural window sizes form a grid.
If the <B>setGrid</B> option is set to true then the widget will
communicate with the window manager so that when the user interactively
resizes the top-level window that contains the widget, the dimensions of
the window will be displayed to the user in grid units and the window
size will be constrained to integral numbers of grid units.
See the section GRIDDED GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT in the <B><A HREF="../TkCmd/wm.htm">wm</A></B> manual
entry for more details.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>takeFocus</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>TakeFocus</B>
<DD>Determines whether the window accepts the focus during keyboard
traversal (e.g., Tab and Shift-Tab).
Before setting the focus to a window, the traversal scripts
consult the value of the <B>takeFocus</B> option.
A value of <B>0</B> means that the window should be skipped entirely
during keyboard traversal.
<B>1</B> means that the window should receive the input
focus as long as it is viewable (it and all of its ancestors are mapped).
An empty value for the option means that the traversal scripts make
the decision about whether or not to focus on the window: the current
algorithm is to skip the window if it is
disabled, if it has no key bindings, or if it is not viewable.
If the value has any other form, then the traversal scripts take
the value, append the name of the window to it (with a separator space),
and evaluate the resulting string as a Tcl script.
The script must return <B>0</B>, <B>1</B>, or an empty string: a
<B>0</B> or <B>1</B> value specifies whether the window will receive
the input focus, and an empty string results in the default decision
described above.
Note: this interpretation of the option is defined entirely by
the Tcl scripts that implement traversal: the widget implementations
ignore the option entirely, so you can change its meaning if you
redefine the keyboard traversal scripts.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-text">-text</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B><A HREF="../TkCmd/text.htm">text</A></B>
<DT>Database Class: <B><A HREF="../TkCmd/text.htm">Text</A></B>
<DD>Specifies a string to be displayed inside the widget. The way in which
the string is displayed depends on the particular widget and may be
determined by other options, such as <B>anchor</B> or <B>justify</B>.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>textVariable</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B><A HREF="../TclCmd/variable.htm">Variable</A></B>
<DD>Specifies the name of a variable. The value of the variable is a text
string to be displayed inside the widget; if the variable value changes
then the widget will automatically update itself to reflect the new value.
The way in which the string is displayed in the widget depends on the
particular widget and may be determined by other options, such as
<B>anchor</B> or <B>justify</B>.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>troughColor</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Background</B>
<DD>Specifies the color to use for the rectangular trough areas
in widgets such as scrollbars and scales.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-underline">-underline</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>underline</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>Underline</B>
<DD>Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the widget.
This option is used by the default bindings to implement keyboard
traversal for menu buttons and menu entries.
0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed in the
widget, 1 to the next character, and so on.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>wrapLength</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>WrapLength</B>
<DD>For widgets that can perform word-wrapping, this option specifies
the maximum line length.
Lines that would exceed this length are wrapped onto the next line,
so that no line is longer than the specified length.
The value may be specified in any of the standard forms for
screen distances.
If this value is less than or equal to 0 then no wrapping is done: lines
will break only at newline characters in the text.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>xScrollCommand</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>ScrollCommand</B>
<DD>Specifies the prefix for a command used to communicate with horizontal
scrollbars.
When the view in the widget's window changes (or
whenever anything else occurs that could change the display in a
scrollbar, such as a change in the total size of the widget's
contents), the widget will
generate a Tcl command by concatenating the scroll command and
two numbers.
Each of the numbers is a fraction between 0 and 1, which indicates
a position in the document. 0 indicates the beginning of the document,
1 indicates the end, .333 indicates a position one third the way through
the document, and so on.
The first fraction indicates the first information in the document
that is visible in the window, and the second fraction indicates
the information just after the last portion that is visible.
The command is
then passed to the Tcl interpreter for execution. Typically the
<B>xScrollCommand</B> option consists of the path name of a scrollbar
widget followed by ``set'', e.g. ``.x.scrollbar set'': this will cause
the scrollbar to be updated whenever the view in the window changes.
If this option is not specified, then no command will be executed.
<P><DT>Command-Line Name: <B><A NAME="M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></B>
<DT>Database Name: <B>yScrollCommand</B>
<DT>Database Class: <B>ScrollCommand</B>
<DD>Specifies the prefix for a command used to communicate with vertical
scrollbars. This option is treated in the same way as the
<B>xScrollCommand</B> option, except that it is used for vertical
scrollbars and is provided by widgets that support vertical scrolling.
See the description of <B>xScrollCommand</B> for details
on how this option is used.
</DL>
<H3><A NAME="M4">KEYWORDS</A></H3>
<A href="../Keywords/C.htm#class">class</A>, <A href="../Keywords/N.htm#name">name</A>, <A href="../Keywords/S.htm#standard option">standard option</A>, <A href="../Keywords/S.htm#switch">switch</A>
<HR><PRE>
<A HREF="../copyright.htm">Copyright</A> &#169; 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
<A HREF="../copyright.htm">Copyright</A> &#169; 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
<A HREF="../copyright.htm">Copyright</A> &#169; 1995-1997 Roger E. Critchlow Jr.</PRE>
</BODY></HTML>

266
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/CHANGES.txt Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
____________________________________________________________
BWidget 1.2.1 (07/09/1999)
CHANGES FROM 1.2 TO 1.2.1
This version is the first patch of 1.2. It does not introduce
incompatibilites.
This patch include some new requested features, that I think
can't wait for 1.3:
- special menu handling (see MainFrame)
- tabs bindings in NoteBook
- label alignment of LabelFrame
- -repeatdelay and -repeatinterval options on SpinBox
* Entry
- <Destroy> event added to tag BwDisabledEntry
- fixed bug when -textvariable use a variable containing space
* MainFrame
- fixed bug when -textvariable use a variable containing space
- menubar entry creation modified to use the menuid as the
subpathname to permit special menu (help, system, apple)
* LabelFrame
- LabelFrame::align command added
* ScrollableFrame
- fixed typo bug
* PagesManager
- fixed bug of window size
- 'pages' modified to optionally include first and last indices.
('page' is still available but deprecated)
* NoteBook
- new command 'bindtabs'
- fixed bug in handling result of -leavecmd command
- 'pages' modified to optionally include first and last indices.
('page' is still available but deprecated)
* ComboBox
- little border added around the popdown list, which appeared
to have no border under windows when popped above a widget
with the same background color.
* SpinBox
- options -repeatdelay and -repeatinterval added.
* Tree
- fixed strange behaviour when editing: 'selection range'
replaced by 'selection from'/'selection to'
- widget is redrawn if needed in 'edit' and 'see'
- fixed bug in see
- nodes modified to optionally include first and last indices.
- _subdelete modified to iterative method
* ListBox
- fixed strange behaviour when editing: 'selection range'
replaced by 'selection from'/'selection to'
- ListBox is redrawn if needed in 'edit' and 'see'
- fixed bug in see
- 'items' modified to optionally include first and last indices.
('item' is still available but deprecated)
* SelectColor
- fixed bug in call to GlobalVar::trace renamed GlobalVar::tracevar
* DragSite and DropSite
- fixed bug introduced by new button event.
* DynamicHelp
- restored version of 1.1, due to the bug under windows
* BWidget::place
- fixed bug when x or y is 0.
* es.rc resource file included
____________________________________________________________
BWidget 1.2 (05/21/1999)
CHANGES FROM 1.1 TO 1.2
* 4 new widget:
- ScrollableFrame
- ScrollView
- PagesManager
- PasswdDlg (contributed by Stephane Lavirotte)
* Widget:
- Flag option type added
- option resource database read while widget creation,
not while widget class creation.
- better handling of BWidget definition using another BWidget as a top pathname.
* MainFrame
- more options included for ProgressBar
(INCOMPATIBILITY: option -variable renamed -progressvar)
- -menu option modified to have tags on entries and menu id on cascad menu
(INCOMPATIBILITY of option -menu)
- new command: getmenu
- new command: setmenustate
* DropSite
- operations completly reworked
- option -droptypes modified (INCOMPATIBILITY)
- return code of -dropovercmd modified
bit 'ok' and bit 'recall' reverted
(INCOMPATIBILITY in -dropovercmd command)
- new command: setoperation
* DragSite:
- Drag now initiates while <ButtonPress-x> followed by <Bx-Motion> of
4 pixels, so it is possible to have a <ButtonPress-x> event and
drag event on the same button.
- -dragevent option modified: must be the number of the button: 1, 2 or 3
Option is now defaulted to 1, but Entry widget keep it to 3.
(INCOMPATIBILITY)
- return result of -draginitcmd modified (INCOMPATIBILITY)
* ListBox:
- edit command improved.
new arguments: initial text, and command to verify the text before accept it.
(INCOMPATIBILITY in call to edit)
- Drag and Drop modified
(INCOMPATIBILITY in -dropovercmd command)
- new command: reorder
* Tree:
- edit command improved.
new arguments: initial text, and command to verify the text before accept it.
(INCOMPATIBILITY in call to edit)
- Drag and Drop modified
(INCOMPATIBILITY in -dropovercmd command)
- new command: reorder
- new command: visible
- less full-redraw
* NoteBook:
- relief reworked
- added option -leavecmd on pages
- option -image implemented
- new command: move
- delete command now accept an optionnal argument specifying
whether the frame of the page should be destroyed or not.
If not, this frame is reused by insert command for the same page.
* Entry and LabelEntry:
- direct access to entry command
- bind command added on the entry subwidget
* ComboBox:
- option -postcommand added
- bind command added on the entry subwidget
* SpinBox:
- bind command added on the entry subwidget
- floating point fixed - work needed
* ProgressBar:
- now can be incremental or not limited ('unknow-time' processing)
* Bitmap:
- xpm image type added with use of xpm-to-image by Roger E. Critchlow Jr.
* Lots of focus problem solved
* ...and bugs corrected.
INCOMPATIBILITIES
Incompatibilities are very localized, so we hope that it will
not be painfull to upgrade to 1.2.
* MainFrame related imcompatibilities
- Upgrade MainFrame -menu option and change -variable option
by -progressvar.
* Drag and drop related imcompatibilities
- Upgrade -dragevent option, and command associated to -draginitcmd
and -dropovercmd.
- Upgrade -dragendcmd/-dragovercmd command of Tree and ListBox widget
* Edition in Tree and ListBox
- Verify arguments passed in call to edit command of
Tree and ListBox
____________________________________________________________
BWidget 1.1 (03/12/1999)
CHANGES FROM 1.0 TO 1.1
WHAT'S NEW
The most important change in BWidget 1.1 is the support
of tk path command, but the old syntax is always available.
configure command now returns a valid configuration information list.
(I hope that) All submitted bugs have been corrected.
Following widget have been reworked:
* ListBox:
- ListBox items have now a -indent option.
- insert command modified to look more as a tk
listbox insert command (see INCOMPATIBILITIES)
- item command added to retreive one or more items
* Tree:
- insert command modified to look more as a
listbox insert command (see INCOMPATIBILITIES)
* LabelEntry:
- -value and -variable options renamed to -text and -textvariable
(see INCOMPATIBILITIES)
* SpinBox and ComboBox:
- -value and -variable options renamed to -text and -textvariable
(see INCOMPATIBILITIES)
- New command getvalue and setvalue added to manipulate
current value by index.
* NoteBook:
- Pages have now an identifier.
- insert command modififed (see INCOMPATIBILITIES)
- page command added to retreive one or more pages
- getframe command added
INCOMPATIBILITIES (sorry for this)
* LabelEntry, SpinBox and ComboBox:
- -value and -variable options renamed to -text and -textvariable
* Entry and LabelEntry:
- setfocus doesn't exist anymore. Directly use tk command focus.
* NoteBook:
- Pages have now an identifier, which modifies insert command:
NoteBook::insert $nb index ?option value ...?
is now
$nb insert index page ?option value ...?
* Tree:
- insert command modified:
Tree::insert $nb $parent $node $index ?option value ...?
becomes
$tree insert $index $parent $node ?option value ...?
* ListBox:
- insert command modified:
ListBox::insert $list $item $index ?option value ...?
becomes
$list insert $index $item ?option value ...?
____________________________________________________________
BWidget 1.0 (02/19/1999)
First release.

41
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/LICENSE.txt Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
BWidget ToolKit
Copyright (c) 1998-1999 UNIFIX.
Copyright (c) 2001-2002 ActiveState Corp.
The following terms apply to all files associated with the software
unless explicitly disclaimed in individual files.
The authors hereby grant permission to use, copy, modify, distribute,
and license this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided
that existing copyright notices are retained in all copies and that this
notice is included verbatim in any distributions. No written agreement,
license, or royalty fee is required for any of the authorized uses.
Modifications to this software may be copyrighted by their authors
and need not follow the licensing terms described here, provided that
the new terms are clearly indicated on the first page of each file where
they apply.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR DISTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY
FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, ITS DOCUMENTATION, OR ANY
DERIVATIVES THEREOF, EVEN IF THE AUTHORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THE AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. THIS SOFTWARE
IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS HAVE
NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR
MODIFICATIONS.
GOVERNMENT USE: If you are acquiring this software on behalf of the
U.S. government, the Government shall have only "Restricted Rights"
in the software and related documentation as defined in the Federal
Acquisition Regulations (FARs) in Clause 52.227.19 (c) (2). If you
are acquiring the software on behalf of the Department of Defense, the
software shall be classified as "Commercial Computer Software" and the
Government shall have only "Restricted Rights" as defined in Clause
252.227-7013 (c) (1) of DFARs. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the
authors grant the U.S. Government and others acting in its behalf
permission to use and distribute the software in accordance with the
terms specified in this license.

127
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/README.txt Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
BWidget ToolKit 1.9.0 July 2009
Copyright (c) 1998-1999 UNIFIX.
Copyright (c) 2001-2002 ActiveState Corp.
See the file LICENSE.txt for license info (uses Tcl's BSD-style license).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
WHAT IS BWIDGET ?
The BWidget Toolkit is a high-level Widget Set for Tcl/Tk built using
native Tcl/Tk 8.x namespaces.
The BWidgets have a professional look&feel as in other well known
Toolkits (Tix or Incr Widgets), but the concept is radically different
because everything is pure Tcl/Tk. No platform dependencies, and no
compiling required. The code is 100% Pure Tcl/Tk.
The BWidget library was originally developed by UNIFIX Online, and
released under both the GNU Public License and the Tcl license.
BWidget is now maintained as a community project, hosted by
Sourceforge. Scores of fixes and enhancements have been added by
community developers. See the ChangeLog file for details.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
WIDGET LIST (1.9)
Simple Widgets
Label Extended Label widget
Entry Extended Entry widget
Button Extended Button widget
ArrowButton Button widget with an arrow shape.
ProgressBar Progress indicator widget
ScrollView Display the visible area of a scrolled window
Separator 3D separator widget
Manager Widgets
MainFrame Manage toplevel with menu, toolbar and statusbar
LabelFrame Frame with a Label
TitleFrame Frame with a title
ScrolledWindow Generic scrolled widget
ScrollableFrame Scrollable frame containing widget
PanedWindow Tiled layout manager widget
ButtonBox Set of buttons with horizontal or vertical layout
PagesManager Pages manager widget
NoteBook Notebook manager widget
Dialog Dialog abstraction with custom buttons
Composite Widgets
LabelEntry LabelFrame containing an Entry widget.
ComboBox ComboBox widget
SpinBox SpinBox widget
Tree Tree widget
ListBox ListBox widget
MessageDlg Message dialog box
ProgressDlg Progress indicator dialog box
PasswdDlg Login/Password dialog box (contributed by Stephane Lavirotte)
SelectFont Font selection widget
SelectColor Color selection widget
Commands Classes
Widget The Widget base class
DynamicHelp Provide help to Tk widget or BWidget
DragSite Commands set for Drag facilities
DropSite Commands set for Drop facilities
BWidget Utilities
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
INSTALLATION AND USE
- On Unix Platform:
Uncompress the file BWidget-<version>.tar.Z|gz
To use the BWidget:
- If you have uncompressed the archive file under the Tcl Library Path
directory, you only need to do:
% package require BWidget
- If not, you have to specify the BWidget installation path in auto_path
global variable:
% lappend auto_path <install_path>
% package require BWidget
To launch the demo, you need to cd into the demo subdirectory:
$ cd <install_path>/demo
$ wish demo.tcl
- On Windows and others Platforms:
Uncompress the file BWidget-<version>.zip
To use the BWidget:
- If you uncompressed the archive file under the Tcl Library Path
directory, you only need to do:
% package require BWidget
- If not, you have to specify the BWidget installation path in auto_path
global variable:
% lappend auto_path your_path
% package require BWidget
To launch the demo :
Double click on demo.tcl in the demo subdirectory
Distribution contains these directories:
BWidget-<version> Root directory and BWidget Tcl sources
BWman HTML manual pages
images images used by BWidget
lang Resources for language customization
demo Demo sources
tests BWidgets test suite
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
DOCUMENTATION
HTML manual pages are available in the BWman subdirectory. Point to
index.html for frame version with tree navigation, or to contents.html
for no frame version.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
CONTACTS
The BWidget toolkit is maintained on Sourceforge, at
http://www.sourceforge.net/projects/tcllib/

551
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/arrow.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,551 @@
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# arrow.tcl
# This file is part of Unifix BWidget Toolkit
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Index of commands:
# Public commands
# - ArrowButton::create
# - ArrowButton::configure
# - ArrowButton::cget
# - ArrowButton::invoke
# Private commands (redraw commands)
# - ArrowButton::_redraw
# - ArrowButton::_redraw_state
# - ArrowButton::_redraw_relief
# - ArrowButton::_redraw_whole
# Private commands (event bindings)
# - ArrowButton::_destroy
# - ArrowButton::_enter
# - ArrowButton::_leave
# - ArrowButton::_press
# - ArrowButton::_release
# - ArrowButton::_repeat
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
namespace eval ArrowButton {
Widget::define ArrowButton arrow DynamicHelp
Widget::tkinclude ArrowButton button .c \
include [list \
-borderwidth -bd \
-relief -highlightbackground \
-highlightcolor -highlightthickness -takefocus]
Widget::declare ArrowButton [list \
[list -type Enum button 0 [list arrow button]] \
[list -dir Enum top 0 [list top bottom left right]] \
[list -width Int 15 0 "%d >= 0"] \
[list -height Int 15 0 "%d >= 0"] \
[list -ipadx Int 0 0 "%d >= 0"] \
[list -ipady Int 0 0 "%d >= 0"] \
[list -clean Int 2 0 "%d >= 0 && %d <= 2"] \
[list -activeforeground TkResource "" 0 button] \
[list -activebackground TkResource "" 0 button] \
[list -disabledforeground TkResource "" 0 button] \
[list -foreground TkResource "" 0 button] \
[list -background TkResource "" 0 button] \
[list -state TkResource "" 0 button] \
[list -troughcolor TkResource "" 0 scrollbar] \
[list -arrowbd Int 1 0 "%d >= 0 && %d <= 2"] \
[list -arrowrelief Enum raised 0 [list raised sunken]] \
[list -command String "" 0] \
[list -armcommand String "" 0] \
[list -disarmcommand String "" 0] \
[list -repeatdelay Int 0 0 "%d >= 0"] \
[list -repeatinterval Int 0 0 "%d >= 0"] \
[list -fg Synonym -foreground] \
[list -bg Synonym -background] \
]
DynamicHelp::include ArrowButton balloon
bind BwArrowButtonC <Enter> {ArrowButton::_enter %W}
bind BwArrowButtonC <Leave> {ArrowButton::_leave %W}
bind BwArrowButtonC <ButtonPress-1> {ArrowButton::_press %W}
bind BwArrowButtonC <ButtonRelease-1> {ArrowButton::_release %W}
bind BwArrowButtonC <Key-space> {ArrowButton::invoke %W; break}
bind BwArrowButtonC <Return> {ArrowButton::invoke %W; break}
bind BwArrowButton <Configure> {ArrowButton::_redraw_whole %W %w %h}
bind BwArrowButton <Destroy> {ArrowButton::_destroy %W}
variable _grab
variable _moved
array set _grab {current "" pressed "" oldstate "normal" oldrelief ""}
}
# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::create
# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::create { path args } {
# Initialize configuration mappings and parse arguments
array set submaps [list ArrowButton [list ] .c [list ]]
array set submaps [Widget::parseArgs ArrowButton $args]
# Create the class frame (so we can do the option db queries)
frame $path -class ArrowButton -borderwidth 0 -highlightthickness 0
Widget::initFromODB ArrowButton $path $submaps(ArrowButton)
# Create the canvas with the initial options
eval [list canvas $path.c] $submaps(.c)
# Compute the width and height of the canvas from the width/height
# of the ArrowButton and the borderwidth/hightlightthickness.
set w [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -width]
set h [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -height]
set bd [Widget::cget $path -borderwidth]
set ht [Widget::cget $path -highlightthickness]
set pad [expr {2*($bd+$ht)}]
$path.c configure -width [expr {$w-$pad}] -height [expr {$h-$pad}]
bindtags $path [list $path BwArrowButton [winfo toplevel $path] all]
bindtags $path.c [list $path.c BwArrowButtonC [winfo toplevel $path.c] all]
pack $path.c -expand yes -fill both
DynamicHelp::sethelp $path $path.c 1
set ::ArrowButton::_moved($path) 0
return [Widget::create ArrowButton $path]
}
# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::configure
# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::configure { path args } {
set res [Widget::configure $path $args]
set ch1 [expr {[Widget::hasChanged $path -width w] |
[Widget::hasChanged $path -height h] |
[Widget::hasChanged $path -borderwidth bd] |
[Widget::hasChanged $path -highlightthickness ht]}]
set ch2 [expr {[Widget::hasChanged $path -type val] |
[Widget::hasChanged $path -ipadx val] |
[Widget::hasChanged $path -ipady val] |
[Widget::hasChanged $path -arrowbd val] |
[Widget::hasChanged $path -clean val] |
[Widget::hasChanged $path -dir val]}]
if { $ch1 } {
set pad [expr {2*($bd+$ht)}]
$path.c configure \
-width [expr {$w-$pad}] -height [expr {$h-$pad}] \
-borderwidth $bd -highlightthickness $ht
set ch2 1
}
if { $ch2 } {
_redraw_whole $path [winfo width $path] [winfo height $path]
} else {
_redraw_relief $path
_redraw_state $path
}
DynamicHelp::sethelp $path $path.c
return $res
}
# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::cget
# -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::cget { path option } {
return [Widget::cget $path $option]
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::invoke
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::invoke { path } {
if { ![string equal [winfo class $path] "ArrowButton"] } {
set path [winfo parent $path]
}
if { ![string equal [Widget::getoption $path -state] "disabled"] } {
set oldstate [Widget::getoption $path -state]
if { [string equal [Widget::getoption $path -type] "button"] } {
set oldrelief [Widget::getoption $path -relief]
configure $path -state active -relief sunken
} else {
set oldrelief [Widget::getoption $path -arrowrelief]
configure $path -state active -arrowrelief sunken
}
update idletasks
if {[llength [set cmd [Widget::getoption $path -armcommand]]]} {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
after 10
if { [string equal [Widget::getoption $path -type] "button"] } {
configure $path -state $oldstate -relief $oldrelief
} else {
configure $path -state $oldstate -arrowrelief $oldrelief
}
if {[llength [set cmd [Widget::getoption $path -disarmcommand]]]} {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
if {[llength [set cmd [Widget::getoption $path -command]]]} {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::_redraw
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::_redraw { path width height } {
variable _moved
set _moved($path) 0
set type [Widget::getoption $path -type]
set dir [Widget::getoption $path -dir]
set bd [expr {[$path.c cget -borderwidth] + [$path.c cget -highlightthickness] + 1}]
set clean [Widget::getoption $path -clean]
if { [string equal $type "arrow"] } {
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag rect]] == "" } {
$path.c create rectangle $bd $bd [expr {$width-$bd-1}] [expr {$height-$bd-1}] -tags rect
} else {
$path.c coords $id $bd $bd [expr {$width-$bd-1}] [expr {$height-$bd-1}]
}
$path.c lower rect
set arrbd [Widget::getoption $path -arrowbd]
set bd [expr {$bd+$arrbd-1}]
} else {
$path.c delete rect
}
# w and h are max width and max height of arrow
set w [expr {$width - 2*([Widget::getoption $path -ipadx]+$bd)}]
set h [expr {$height - 2*([Widget::getoption $path -ipady]+$bd)}]
if { $w < 2 } {set w 2}
if { $h < 2 } {set h 2}
if { $clean > 0 } {
# arrange for base to be odd
if { [string equal $dir "top"] || [string equal $dir "bottom"] } {
if { !($w % 2) } {
incr w -1
}
if { $clean == 2 } {
# arrange for h = (w+1)/2
set h2 [expr {($w+1)/2}]
if { $h2 > $h } {
set w [expr {2*$h-1}]
} else {
set h $h2
}
}
} else {
if { !($h % 2) } {
incr h -1
}
if { $clean == 2 } {
# arrange for w = (h+1)/2
set w2 [expr {($h+1)/2}]
if { $w2 > $w } {
set h [expr {2*$w-1}]
} else {
set w $w2
}
}
}
}
set x0 [expr {($width-$w)/2}]
set y0 [expr {($height-$h)/2}]
set x1 [expr {$x0+$w-1}]
set y1 [expr {$y0+$h-1}]
switch $dir {
top {
set xd [expr {($x0+$x1)/2}]
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag poly]] == "" } {
$path.c create polygon $x0 $y1 $x1 $y1 $xd $y0 -tags poly
} else {
$path.c coords $id $x0 $y1 $x1 $y1 $xd $y0
}
if { [string equal $type "arrow"] } {
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag bot]] == "" } {
$path.c create line $x0 $y1 $x1 $y1 $xd $y0 -tags bot
} else {
$path.c coords $id $x0 $y1 $x1 $y1 $xd $y0
}
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag top]] == "" } {
$path.c create line $x0 $y1 $xd $y0 -tags top
} else {
$path.c coords $id $x0 $y1 $xd $y0
}
$path.c itemconfigure top -width $arrbd
$path.c itemconfigure bot -width $arrbd
} else {
$path.c delete top
$path.c delete bot
}
}
bottom {
set xd [expr {($x0+$x1)/2}]
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag poly]] == "" } {
$path.c create polygon $x1 $y0 $x0 $y0 $xd $y1 -tags poly
} else {
$path.c coords $id $x1 $y0 $x0 $y0 $xd $y1
}
if { [string equal $type "arrow"] } {
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag top]] == "" } {
$path.c create line $x1 $y0 $x0 $y0 $xd $y1 -tags top
} else {
$path.c coords $id $x1 $y0 $x0 $y0 $xd $y1
}
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag bot]] == "" } {
$path.c create line $x1 $y0 $xd $y1 -tags bot
} else {
$path.c coords $id $x1 $y0 $xd $y1
}
$path.c itemconfigure top -width $arrbd
$path.c itemconfigure bot -width $arrbd
} else {
$path.c delete top
$path.c delete bot
}
}
left {
set yd [expr {($y0+$y1)/2}]
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag poly]] == "" } {
$path.c create polygon $x1 $y0 $x1 $y1 $x0 $yd -tags poly
} else {
$path.c coords $id $x1 $y0 $x1 $y1 $x0 $yd
}
if { [string equal $type "arrow"] } {
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag bot]] == "" } {
$path.c create line $x1 $y0 $x1 $y1 $x0 $yd -tags bot
} else {
$path.c coords $id $x1 $y0 $x1 $y1 $x0 $yd
}
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag top]] == "" } {
$path.c create line $x1 $y0 $x0 $yd -tags top
} else {
$path.c coords $id $x1 $y0 $x0 $yd
}
$path.c itemconfigure top -width $arrbd
$path.c itemconfigure bot -width $arrbd
} else {
$path.c delete top
$path.c delete bot
}
}
right {
set yd [expr {($y0+$y1)/2}]
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag poly]] == "" } {
$path.c create polygon $x0 $y1 $x0 $y0 $x1 $yd -tags poly
} else {
$path.c coords $id $x0 $y1 $x0 $y0 $x1 $yd
}
if { [string equal $type "arrow"] } {
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag top]] == "" } {
$path.c create line $x0 $y1 $x0 $y0 $x1 $yd -tags top
} else {
$path.c coords $id $x0 $y1 $x0 $y0 $x1 $yd
}
if { [set id [$path.c find withtag bot]] == "" } {
$path.c create line $x0 $y1 $x1 $yd -tags bot
} else {
$path.c coords $id $x0 $y1 $x1 $yd
}
$path.c itemconfigure top -width $arrbd
$path.c itemconfigure bot -width $arrbd
} else {
$path.c delete top
$path.c delete bot
}
}
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::_redraw_state
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::_redraw_state { path } {
set state [Widget::getoption $path -state]
if { [string equal [Widget::getoption $path -type] "button"] } {
switch $state {
normal {set bg -background; set fg -foreground}
active {set bg -activebackground; set fg -activeforeground}
disabled {set bg -background; set fg -disabledforeground}
}
set fg [Widget::getoption $path $fg]
$path.c configure -background [Widget::getoption $path $bg]
$path.c itemconfigure poly -fill $fg -outline $fg
} else {
switch $state {
normal {set stipple ""; set bg [Widget::getoption $path -background] }
active {set stipple ""; set bg [Widget::getoption $path -activebackground] }
disabled {set stipple gray50; set bg black }
}
set thrc [Widget::getoption $path -troughcolor]
$path.c configure -background [Widget::getoption $path -background]
$path.c itemconfigure rect -fill $thrc -outline $thrc
$path.c itemconfigure poly -fill $bg -outline $bg -stipple $stipple
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::_redraw_relief
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::_redraw_relief { path } {
variable _moved
if { [string equal [Widget::getoption $path -type] "button"] } {
if { [string equal [Widget::getoption $path -relief] "sunken"] } {
if { !$_moved($path) } {
$path.c move poly 1 1
set _moved($path) 1
}
} else {
if { $_moved($path) } {
$path.c move poly -1 -1
set _moved($path) 0
}
}
} else {
set col3d [BWidget::get3dcolor $path [Widget::getoption $path -background]]
switch [Widget::getoption $path -arrowrelief] {
raised {set top [lindex $col3d 1]; set bot [lindex $col3d 0]}
sunken {set top [lindex $col3d 0]; set bot [lindex $col3d 1]}
}
$path.c itemconfigure top -fill $top
$path.c itemconfigure bot -fill $bot
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::_redraw_whole
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::_redraw_whole { path width height } {
_redraw $path $width $height
_redraw_relief $path
_redraw_state $path
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::_enter
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::_enter { path } {
variable _grab
set path [winfo parent $path]
set _grab(current) $path
if { ![string equal [Widget::getoption $path -state] "disabled"] } {
set _grab(oldstate) [Widget::getoption $path -state]
configure $path -state active
if { $_grab(pressed) == $path } {
if { [string equal [Widget::getoption $path -type] "button"] } {
set _grab(oldrelief) [Widget::getoption $path -relief]
configure $path -relief sunken
} else {
set _grab(oldrelief) [Widget::getoption $path -arrowrelief]
configure $path -arrowrelief sunken
}
}
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::_leave
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::_leave { path } {
variable _grab
set path [winfo parent $path]
set _grab(current) ""
if { ![string equal [Widget::getoption $path -state] "disabled"] } {
configure $path -state $_grab(oldstate)
if { $_grab(pressed) == $path } {
if { [string equal [Widget::getoption $path -type] "button"] } {
configure $path -relief $_grab(oldrelief)
} else {
configure $path -arrowrelief $_grab(oldrelief)
}
}
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::_press
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::_press { path } {
variable _grab
set path [winfo parent $path]
if { ![string equal [Widget::getoption $path -state] "disabled"] } {
set _grab(pressed) $path
if { [string equal [Widget::getoption $path -type] "button"] } {
set _grab(oldrelief) [Widget::getoption $path -relief]
configure $path -relief sunken
} else {
set _grab(oldrelief) [Widget::getoption $path -arrowrelief]
configure $path -arrowrelief sunken
}
if {[llength [set cmd [Widget::getoption $path -armcommand]]]} {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
if { [set delay [Widget::getoption $path -repeatdelay]] > 0 ||
[set delay [Widget::getoption $path -repeatinterval]] > 0 } {
after $delay [list ArrowButton::_repeat $path]
}
}
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::_release
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::_release { path } {
variable _grab
set path [winfo parent $path]
if { $_grab(pressed) == $path } {
set _grab(pressed) ""
if { [string equal [Widget::getoption $path -type] "button"] } {
configure $path -relief $_grab(oldrelief)
} else {
configure $path -arrowrelief $_grab(oldrelief)
}
if {[llength [set cmd [Widget::getoption $path -disarmcommand]]]} {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
if { $_grab(current) == $path &&
![string equal [Widget::getoption $path -state] "disabled"] &&
[llength [set cmd [Widget::getoption $path -command]]]} {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::_repeat
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::_repeat { path } {
variable _grab
if { $_grab(current) == $path && $_grab(pressed) == $path &&
![string equal [Widget::getoption $path -state] "disabled"] &&
[llength [set cmd [Widget::getoption $path -armcommand]]]} {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
if { $_grab(pressed) == $path &&
([set delay [Widget::getoption $path -repeatinterval]] > 0 ||
[set delay [Widget::getoption $path -repeatdelay]] > 0) } {
after $delay [list ArrowButton::_repeat $path]
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ArrowButton::_destroy
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ArrowButton::_destroy { path } {
variable _moved
Widget::destroy $path
unset _moved($path)
}

94
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/bitmap.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# bitmap.tcl
# This file is part of Unifix BWidget Toolkit
# $Id: bitmap.tcl,v 1.4 2003/10/20 21:23:52 damonc Exp $
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Index of commands:
# - Bitmap::get
# - Bitmap::_init
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
namespace eval Bitmap {
Widget::define Bitmap bitmap -classonly
variable path
variable _bmp
variable _types {
photo .gif
photo .ppm
bitmap .xbm
photo .xpm
}
proc use {} {}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Bitmap::get
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Bitmap::get { name } {
variable path
variable _bmp
variable _types
if {[info exists _bmp($name)]} {
return $_bmp($name)
}
# --- Nom de fichier avec extension ---------------------------------
set ext [file extension $name]
if { $ext != "" } {
if { ![info exists _bmp($ext)] } {
error "$ext not supported"
}
if { [file exists $name] } {
if {[string equal $ext ".xpm"]} {
set _bmp($name) [xpm-to-image $name]
return $_bmp($name)
}
if {![catch {set _bmp($name) [image create $_bmp($ext) -file $name]}]} {
return $_bmp($name)
}
}
}
foreach dir $path {
foreach {type ext} $_types {
if { [file exists [file join $dir $name$ext]] } {
if {[string equal $ext ".xpm"]} {
set _bmp($name) [xpm-to-image [file join $dir $name$ext]]
return $_bmp($name)
} else {
if {![catch {set _bmp($name) [image create $type -file [file join $dir $name$ext]]}]} {
return $_bmp($name)
}
}
}
}
}
return -code error "$name not found"
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Bitmap::_init
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Bitmap::_init { } {
global env
variable path
variable _bmp
variable _types
set path [list "." [file join $::BWIDGET::LIBRARY images]]
set supp [image types]
foreach {type ext} $_types {
if { [lsearch $supp $type] != -1} {
set _bmp($ext) $type
}
}
}
Bitmap::_init

397
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/button.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,397 @@
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# button.tcl
# This file is part of Unifix BWidget Toolkit
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Index of commands:
# Public commands
# - Button::create
# - Button::configure
# - Button::cget
# - Button::invoke
# Private commands (event bindings)
# - Button::_destroy
# - Button::_enter
# - Button::_leave
# - Button::_press
# - Button::_release
# - Button::_repeat
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
namespace eval Button {
Widget::define Button button DynamicHelp
set remove [list -command -relief -text -textvariable -underline -state]
if {[info tclversion] > 8.3} {
lappend remove -repeatdelay -repeatinterval
}
if {$::Widget::_theme} {
lappend remove -activebackground -activeforeground -anchor -background\
-bitmap -borderwidth -disabledforeground -font -foreground\
-height -highlightbackground -highlightcolor -highlightthickness\
-justify -overrelief -padx -pady -relief -wraplength
}
Widget::tkinclude Button button :cmd remove $remove
Widget::declare Button {
{-name String "" 0}
{-text String "" 0}
{-textvariable String "" 0}
{-underline Int -1 0 "%d >= -1"}
{-armcommand String "" 0}
{-disarmcommand String "" 0}
{-command String "" 0}
{-state TkResource "" 0 button}
{-repeatdelay Int 0 0 "%d >= 0"}
{-repeatinterval Int 0 0 "%d >= 0"}
{-relief Enum raised 0 {raised sunken flat ridge solid groove link}}
}
DynamicHelp::include Button balloon
variable _current ""
variable _pressed ""
bind BwButton <Enter> {Button::_enter %W}
bind BwButton <Leave> {Button::_leave %W}
bind BwButton <ButtonPress-1> {Button::_press %W}
bind BwButton <ButtonRelease-1> {Button::_release %W}
bind BwButton <Key-space> {Button::invoke %W; break}
bind BwButton <Return> {Button::invoke %W; break}
bind BwButton <<Invoke>> {Button::invoke %W; break}
bind BwButton <Destroy> {Widget::destroy %W}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Button::create
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Button::create { path args } {
array set maps [list Button {} :cmd {}]
array set maps [Widget::parseArgs Button $args]
if {$::Widget::_theme} {
eval [concat [list ttk::button $path] $maps(:cmd)]
} else {
eval [concat [list button $path] $maps(:cmd)]
}
Widget::initFromODB Button $path $maps(Button)
# Do some extra configuration on the button
set var [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -textvariable]
set st [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -state]
if { ![string length $var] } {
set desc [BWidget::getname [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -name]]
if { [llength $desc] } {
set text [lindex $desc 0]
set under [lindex $desc 1]
Widget::configure $path [list -text $text]
Widget::configure $path [list -underline $under]
} else {
set text [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -text]
set under [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -underline]
}
} else {
set under -1
set text ""
Widget::configure $path [list -underline $under]
}
$path configure -text $text -underline $under \
-textvariable $var -state $st
# Map relief flat on Toolbutton for ttk
set relief [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -relief]
if {$::Widget::_theme} {
if { [string equal $relief "link"] } {
$path configure -style Toolbutton
}
} else {
if { [string equal $relief "link"] } {
set relief "flat"
}
$path configure -relief $relief
}
bindtags $path [list $path BwButton [winfo toplevel $path] all]
set accel1 [string tolower [string index $text $under]]
set accel2 [string toupper $accel1]
if { $accel1 != "" } {
bind [winfo toplevel $path] <Alt-$accel1> [list Button::invoke $path]
bind [winfo toplevel $path] <Alt-$accel2> [list Button::invoke $path]
}
DynamicHelp::sethelp $path $path 1
return [Widget::create Button $path]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Button::configure
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Button::configure { path args } {
set oldunder [$path:cmd cget -underline]
if { $oldunder != -1 } {
set oldaccel1 [string tolower [string index [$path:cmd cget -text] $oldunder]]
set oldaccel2 [string toupper $oldaccel1]
} else {
set oldaccel1 ""
set oldaccel2 ""
}
set res [Widget::configure $path $args]
# Extract all the modified bits we're interested in
foreach {cr cs cv cn ct cu} [Widget::hasChangedX $path \
-relief -state -textvariable -name -text -underline] break
if { $cr || $cs } {
set relief [Widget::cget $path -relief]
set state [Widget::cget $path -state]
if { $::Widget::_theme} {
if { [string equal $relief "link"] } {
$path:cmd configure -style Toolbutton
} else {
$path:cmd configure -style ""
}
} else {
if { [string equal $relief "link"] } {
if { [string equal $state "active"] } {
set relief "raised"
} else {
set relief "flat"
}
}
$path:cmd configure -relief $relief
}
$path:cmd configure -state $state
}
if { $cv || $cn || $ct || $cu } {
set var [Widget::cget $path -textvariable]
set text [Widget::cget $path -text]
set under [Widget::cget $path -underline]
if { ![string length $var] } {
set desc [BWidget::getname [Widget::cget $path -name]]
if { [llength $desc] } {
set text [lindex $desc 0]
set under [lindex $desc 1]
}
} else {
set under -1
set text ""
}
set top [winfo toplevel $path]
if { $oldaccel1 != "" } {
bind $top <Alt-$oldaccel1> {}
bind $top <Alt-$oldaccel2> {}
}
set accel1 [string tolower [string index $text $under]]
set accel2 [string toupper $accel1]
if { $accel1 != "" } {
bind $top <Alt-$accel1> [list Button::invoke $path]
bind $top <Alt-$accel2> [list Button::invoke $path]
}
$path:cmd configure -text $text -underline $under -textvariable $var
}
DynamicHelp::sethelp $path $path
set res
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Button::cget
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Button::cget { path option } {
Widget::cget $path $option
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Button::identify
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Button::identify { path args } {
eval $path:cmd identify $args
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Button::instate
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Button::instate { path args } {
eval $path:cmd instate $args
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Button::state
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Button::state { path args } {
eval $path:cmd state $args
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Button::invoke
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Button::invoke { path } {
if { ![string equal [$path:cmd cget -state] "disabled"] } {
if { $::Widget::_theme} {
$path:cmd configure -state active
$path:cmd state pressed
} else {
$path:cmd configure -state active -relief sunken
}
update idletasks
set cmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -armcommand]
if { $cmd != "" } {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
after 100
$path:cmd configure -state [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -state]
if { $::Widget::_theme} {
$path:cmd state !pressed
} else {
set relief [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -relief]
if { [string equal $relief "link"] } {
set relief flat
}
$path:cmd configure -relief $relief
}
set cmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -disarmcommand]
if { $cmd != "" } {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
set cmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -command]
if { $cmd != "" } {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Button::_enter
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Button::_enter { path } {
variable _current
variable _pressed
set _current $path
if { ![string equal [$path:cmd cget -state] "disabled"] } {
$path:cmd configure -state active
if { $::Widget::_theme } {
# $path:cmd state active
} else {
if { $_pressed == $path } {
$path:cmd configure -relief sunken
} elseif { [string equal [Widget::cget $path -relief] "link"] } {
$path:cmd configure -relief raised
}
}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Button::_leave
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Button::_leave { path } {
variable _current
variable _pressed
set _current ""
if { ![string equal [$path:cmd cget -state] "disabled"] } {
$path:cmd configure -state [Widget::cget $path -state]
if { $::Widget::_theme } {
} else {
set relief [Widget::cget $path -relief]
if { $_pressed == $path } {
if { [string equal $relief "link"] } {
set relief raised
}
$path:cmd configure -relief $relief
} elseif { [string equal $relief "link"] } {
$path:cmd configure -relief flat
}
}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Button::_press
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Button::_press { path } {
variable _pressed
if { ![string equal [$path:cmd cget -state] "disabled"] } {
set _pressed $path
if { $::Widget::_theme} {
ttk::clickToFocus $path
$path state pressed
} else {
$path:cmd configure -relief sunken
}
set cmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -armcommand]
if { $cmd != "" } {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
set repeatdelay [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -repeatdelay]
set repeatint [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -repeatinterval]
if { $repeatdelay > 0 } {
after $repeatdelay "Button::_repeat $path"
} elseif { $repeatint > 0 } {
after $repeatint "Button::_repeat $path"
}
}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Button::_release
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Button::_release { path } {
variable _current
variable _pressed
if { $_pressed == $path } {
set _pressed ""
after cancel "Button::_repeat $path"
if { $::Widget::_theme} {
$path state !pressed
} else {
set relief [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -relief]
if { [string equal $relief "link"] } {
set relief raised
}
$path:cmd configure -relief $relief
}
set cmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -disarmcommand]
if { $cmd != "" } {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
if { $_current == $path &&
![string equal [$path:cmd cget -state] "disabled"] && \
[set cmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -command]] != "" } {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Button::_repeat
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Button::_repeat { path } {
variable _current
variable _pressed
if { $_current == $path && $_pressed == $path &&
![string equal [$path:cmd cget -state] "disabled"] &&
[set cmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -armcommand]] != "" } {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
if { $_pressed == $path &&
([set delay [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -repeatinterval]] >0 ||
[set delay [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -repeatdelay]] > 0) } {
after $delay "Button::_repeat $path"
}
}

419
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/buttonbox.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,419 @@
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# buttonbox.tcl
# This file is part of Unifix BWidget Toolkit
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Index of commands:
# - ButtonBox::create
# - ButtonBox::configure
# - ButtonBox::cget
# - ButtonBox::add
# - ButtonBox::itemconfigure
# - ButtonBox::itemcget
# - ButtonBox::setfocus
# - ButtonBox::invoke
# - ButtonBox::index
# - ButtonBox::_destroy
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
namespace eval ButtonBox {
Widget::define ButtonBox buttonbox Button
Widget::declare ButtonBox {
{-background TkResource "" 0 frame}
{-orient Enum horizontal 1 {horizontal vertical}}
{-state Enum "normal" 0 {normal disabled}}
{-homogeneous Boolean 1 1}
{-spacing Int 10 0 "%d >= 0"}
{-padx TkResource "" 0 button}
{-pady TkResource "" 0 button}
{-default Int -1 0 "%d >= -1"}
{-bg Synonym -background}
}
Widget::addmap ButtonBox "" :cmd {-background {}}
bind ButtonBox <Destroy> [list ButtonBox::_destroy %W]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ButtonBox::create
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ButtonBox::create { path args } {
Widget::init ButtonBox $path $args
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
eval [list frame $path] [Widget::subcget $path :cmd] \
[list -class ButtonBox -takefocus 0 -highlightthickness 0]
# For 8.4+ we don't want to inherit the padding
catch {$path configure -padx 0 -pady 0}
set data(max) 0
set data(nbuttons) 0
set data(buttons) [list]
set data(default) [Widget::getoption $path -default]
return [Widget::create ButtonBox $path]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ButtonBox::configure
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ButtonBox::configure { path args } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
set res [Widget::configure $path $args]
if { [Widget::hasChanged $path -default val] } {
if { $data(default) != -1 && $val != -1 } {
set but $path.b$data(default)
if { [winfo exists $but] } {
$but configure -default normal
}
set but $path.b$val
if { [winfo exists $but] } {
$but configure -default active
}
set data(default) $val
} else {
Widget::setoption $path -default $data(default)
}
}
if {[Widget::hasChanged $path -state val]} {
foreach i $data(buttons) {
$path.b$i configure -state $val
}
}
return $res
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ButtonBox::cget
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ButtonBox::cget { path option } {
return [Widget::cget $path $option]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ButtonBox::add
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ButtonBox::add { path args } {
return [eval [linsert $args 0 insert $path end]]
}
proc ButtonBox::insert { path idx args } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
set but $path.b$data(nbuttons)
set spacing [Widget::getoption $path -spacing]
## Save the current spacing setting for this button. Buttons
## appended to the end of the box have their spacing applied
## to their left while all other have their spacing applied
## to their right.
if {$idx == "end"} {
set data(spacing,$data(nbuttons)) [list left $spacing]
lappend data(buttons) $data(nbuttons)
} else {
set data(spacing,$data(nbuttons)) [list right $spacing]
set data(buttons) [linsert $data(buttons) $idx $data(nbuttons)]
}
if { $data(nbuttons) == $data(default) } {
set style active
} elseif { $data(default) == -1 } {
set style disabled
} else {
set style normal
}
array set flags $args
set tags ""
if { [info exists flags(-tags)] } {
set tags $flags(-tags)
unset flags(-tags)
set args [array get flags]
}
if { $::Widget::_theme} {
eval [list Button::create $but] \
$args [list -default $style]
} else {
eval [list Button::create $but \
-background [Widget::getoption $path -background]\
-padx [Widget::getoption $path -padx] \
-pady [Widget::getoption $path -pady]] \
$args [list -default $style]
}
# ericm@scriptics.com: set up tags, just like the menu items
foreach tag $tags {
lappend data(tags,$tag) $but
if { ![info exists data(tagstate,$tag)] } {
set data(tagstate,$tag) 0
}
}
set data(buttontags,$but) $tags
# ericm@scriptics.com
_redraw $path
incr data(nbuttons)
return $but
}
proc ButtonBox::delete { path idx } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
set i [lindex $data(buttons) $idx]
set data(buttons) [lreplace $data(buttons) $idx $idx]
destroy $path.b$i
}
# ButtonBox::setbuttonstate --
#
# Set the state of a given button tag. If this makes any buttons
# enable-able (ie, all of their tags are TRUE), enable them.
#
# Arguments:
# path the button box widget name
# tag the tag to modify
# state the new state of $tag (0 or 1)
#
# Results:
# None.
proc ButtonBox::setbuttonstate {path tag state} {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
# First see if this is a real tag
if { [info exists data(tagstate,$tag)] } {
set data(tagstate,$tag) $state
foreach but $data(tags,$tag) {
set expression "1"
foreach buttontag $data(buttontags,$but) {
append expression " && $data(tagstate,$buttontag)"
}
if { [expr $expression] } {
set state normal
} else {
set state disabled
}
$but configure -state $state
}
}
return
}
# ButtonBox::getbuttonstate --
#
# Retrieve the state of a given button tag.
#
# Arguments:
# path the button box widget name
# tag the tag to modify
#
# Results:
# None.
proc ButtonBox::getbuttonstate {path tag} {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
# First see if this is a real tag
if { [info exists data(tagstate,$tag)] } {
return $data(tagstate,$tag)
} else {
error "unknown tag $tag"
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ButtonBox::itemconfigure
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ButtonBox::itemconfigure { path index args } {
if { [set idx [lsearch $args -default]] != -1 } {
set args [lreplace $args $idx [expr {$idx+1}]]
}
return [eval [list Button::configure $path.b[index $path $index]] $args]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ButtonBox::itemcget
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ButtonBox::itemcget { path index option } {
return [Button::cget $path.b[index $path $index] $option]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ButtonBox::setfocus
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ButtonBox::setfocus { path index } {
set but $path.b[index $path $index]
if { [winfo exists $but] } {
focus $but
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ButtonBox::invoke
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ButtonBox::invoke { path index } {
set but $path.b[index $path $index]
if { [winfo exists $but] } {
Button::invoke $but
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ButtonBox::index
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ButtonBox::index { path index } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
set n [expr {$data(nbuttons) - 1}]
if {[string equal $index "default"]} {
set res [Widget::getoption $path -default]
} elseif {$index == "end" || $index == "last"} {
set res $n
} elseif {![string is integer -strict $index]} {
## It's not an integer. Search the text of each button
## in the box and return the index that matches.
foreach i $data(buttons) {
set w $path.b$i
lappend text [$w cget -text]
lappend names [$w cget -name]
}
set res [lsearch -exact [concat $names $text] $index]
} else {
set res $index
if {$index > $n} { set res $n }
}
return $res
}
# ButtonBox::gettags --
#
# Return a list of all the tags on all the buttons in a buttonbox.
#
# Arguments:
# path the buttonbox to query.
#
# Results:
# taglist a list of tags on the buttons in the buttonbox
proc ButtonBox::gettags {path} {
upvar ::ButtonBox::$path data
set taglist {}
foreach tag [array names data "tags,*"] {
lappend taglist [string range $tag 5 end]
}
return $taglist
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ButtonBox::_redraw
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ButtonBox::_redraw { path } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
Widget::getVariable $path buttons
# For tk >= 8.4, -uniform gridding option is used.
# Otherwise, there is the constraint, that button size may not change after
# creation.
set uniformAvailable [expr {0 <= [package vcompare [info patchlevel] 8.4.0]}]
## We re-grid the buttons from left-to-right. As we go through
## each button, we check its spacing and which direction the
## spacing applies to. Once spacing has been applied to an index,
## it is not changed. This means spacing takes precedence from
## left-to-right.
set idx 0
set idxs [list]
foreach i $data(buttons) {
set dir [lindex $data(spacing,$i) 0]
set spacing [lindex $data(spacing,$i) 1]
set but $path.b$i
if {[string equal [Widget::getoption $path -orient] "horizontal"]} {
grid $but -column $idx -row 0 -sticky nsew
if { [Widget::getoption $path -homogeneous] } {
if {$uniformAvailable} {
grid columnconfigure $path $idx -uniform koen -weight 1
} else {
set req [winfo reqwidth $but]
if { $req > $data(max) } {
grid columnconfigure $path [expr {2*$i}] -minsize $req
set data(max) $req
}
grid columnconfigure $path $idx -weight 1
}
} else {
grid columnconfigure $path $idx -weight 0
}
set col [expr {$idx - 1}]
if {[string equal $dir "right"]} { set col [expr {$idx + 1}] }
if {$col > 0 && [lsearch $idxs $col] < 0} {
lappend idxs $col
grid columnconfigure $path $col -minsize $spacing
}
} else {
grid $but -column 0 -row $idx -sticky nsew
grid rowconfigure $path $idx -weight 0
set row [expr {$idx - 1}]
if {[string equal $dir "right"]} { set row [expr {$idx + 1}] }
if {$row > 0 && [lsearch $idxs $row] < 0} {
lappend idxs $row
grid rowconfigure $path $row -minsize $spacing
}
}
incr idx 2
}
if {!$uniformAvailable} {
# Now that the maximum size has been calculated, go back through
# and correctly set the size for homogeneous horizontal buttons.
if { [string equal [Widget::getoption $path -orient] "horizontal"] && [Widget::getoption $path -homogeneous] } {
set idx 0
foreach i $data(buttons) {
grid columnconfigure $path $idx -minsize $data(max)
incr idx 2
}
}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ButtonBox::_destroy
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ButtonBox::_destroy { path } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
Widget::destroy $path
unset data
}

918
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/color.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,918 @@
namespace eval SelectColor {
Widget::define SelectColor color Dialog
Widget::declare SelectColor {
{-title String "Select a color" 0}
{-parent String "" 0}
{-command String "" 0}
{-help Boolean 0 1}
{-color TkResource "" 0 {label -background}}
{-type Enum "dialog" 1 {dialog popup}}
{-placement String "center" 1}
{-background TkResource "" 0 {label -background}}
}
variable _baseColors {
\#0000ff \#00ff00 \#00ffff \#ff0000 \#ff00ff \#ffff00
\#000099 \#009900 \#009999 \#990000 \#990099 \#999900
\#000000 \#333333 \#666666 \#999999 \#cccccc \#ffffff
}
variable _userColors {
\#ffffff \#ffffff \#ffffff \#ffffff \#ffffff \#ffffff
\#ffffff \#ffffff \#ffffff \#ffffff \#ffffff
}
if {[string equal $::tcl_platform(platform) "unix"]} {
set useTkDialogue 0
} else {
set useTkDialogue 1
}
variable _selectype
variable _selection
variable _wcolor
variable _image
variable _hsv
variable _command
variable _unsavedSelection
variable _oldColor
variable _entryColor
variable _bgColor
variable _fgColor
variable _rounds
}
proc SelectColor::create { path args } {
Widget::init SelectColor $path $args
set type [Widget::cget $path -type]
switch -- [Widget::cget $path -type] {
"dialog" {
return [eval [list SelectColor::dialog $path] $args]
}
"popup" {
set list [list at center left right above below]
set placement [Widget::cget $path -placement]
set where [lindex $placement 0]
if {[lsearch $list $where] < 0} {
return -code error \
[BWidget::badOptionString placement $placement $list]
}
## If they specified a parent and didn't pass a second argument
## in the placement, set the placement relative to the parent.
set parent [Widget::cget $path -parent]
if {[string length $parent]} {
if {[llength $placement] == 1} { lappend placement $parent }
}
return [eval [list SelectColor::menu $path $placement] $args]
}
}
}
proc SelectColor::menu {path placement args} {
variable _baseColors
variable _userColors
variable _wcolor
variable _selectype
variable _selection
variable _command
variable _bgColor
variable _rounds
Widget::init SelectColor $path $args
set top [toplevel $path]
set parent [winfo toplevel [winfo parent $top]]
wm withdraw $top
wm transient $top $parent
wm overrideredirect $top 1
catch { wm attributes $top -topmost 1 }
set _command [Widget::cget $path -command]
set _bgColor [Widget::cget $path -background]
set _rounds {}
set frame [frame $top.frame \
-highlightthickness 0 \
-relief raised -borderwidth 2]
set col 0
set row 0
set count 0
set colors [concat $_baseColors $_userColors]
foreach color $colors {
set f [frame $frame.c$count \
-highlightthickness 2 \
-highlightcolor white \
-relief solid -borderwidth 1 \
-width 16 -height 16 -background $color]
bind $f <1> "set SelectColor::_selection $count; break"
bind $f <Enter> {focus %W}
grid $f -column $col -row $row
incr count
if {[incr col] == 6 } {
set col 0
incr row
}
}
set f [label $frame.c$count \
-highlightthickness 2 \
-highlightcolor white \
-relief flat -borderwidth 0 \
-width 16 -height 16 -image [Bitmap::get palette]]
grid $f -column $col -row $row
bind $f <1> "set SelectColor::_selection $count; break"
bind $f <Enter> {focus %W}
pack $frame
bind $top <1> {set SelectColor::_selection -1}
bind $top <Escape> {set SelectColor::_selection -2}
bind $top <FocusOut> [subst {if {"%W" == "$top"} \
{set SelectColor::_selection -2}}]
# set background color for menu
$f configure -bg $_bgColor
$frame configure -bg $_bgColor
foreach w [winfo children $frame] {
$w configure -highlightcolor $_bgColor -highlightbackground $_bgColor
}
eval [list BWidget::place $top 0 0] $placement
wm deiconify $top
raise $top
if {$::tcl_platform(platform) == "unix"} {
tkwait visibility $top
update
}
BWidget::SetFocusGrab $top $frame.c0
vwait SelectColor::_selection
BWidget::RestoreFocusGrab $top $frame.c0 destroy
Widget::destroy $top
if {$_selection == $count} {
array set opts {
-parent -parent
-title -title
-color -initialcolor
}
if {[Widget::theme]} {
set native 1
set nativecmd [list tk_chooseColor -parent $parent]
foreach {key val} $args {
if {![info exists opts($key)]} {
set native 0
break
}
lappend nativecmd $opts($key) $val
}
if {$native} {
# Call native dialog
return [eval $nativecmd]
}
}
# Call BWidget dialog
return [eval [list dialog $path] $args]
} else {
# The user has either selected one of the palette colors, or has
# cancelled. The full BWidget/native dialog was not called.
# Unless the user has cancelled, pass the selected
# color to _userCommand.
set tmpCol [lindex $colors $_selection]
if {[string equal $tmpCol ""]} {
# User has cancelled - no need to call _userCommand.
} else {
_userCommand $tmpCol
}
return $tmpCol
}
}
proc SelectColor::_userCommand {color} {
variable _command
if {[string equal $_command {}]} {
return
}
uplevel #0 $_command [list $color]
return
}
proc SelectColor::dialog {path args} {
variable _baseColors
variable _userColors
variable _widget
variable _selection
variable _image
variable _hsv
variable _command
variable _unsavedSelection
variable _oldColor
variable _entryColor
variable _bgColor
variable _fgColor
variable _rounds
Widget::init SelectColor $path:SelectColor $args
set top [Dialog::create $path \
-title [Widget::cget $path:SelectColor -title] \
-parent [Widget::cget $path:SelectColor -parent] \
-separator 0 -default 0 -cancel 1 -anchor e]
wm resizable $top 0 0
set dlgf [$top getframe]
set fg [frame $dlgf.fg]
set desc [list \
base _baseColors "Base colors" \
user _userColors "User colors"]
set help [Widget::cget $path:SelectColor -help]
set _command [Widget::cget $path:SelectColor -command]
set _bgColor [Widget::cget $path:SelectColor -background]
set _rounds {}
set mouseHelpText ""
if {$help} {
append mouseHelpText [subst -nocommands -novariables\
[lindex [BWidget::getname mouseHelpText] 0]]
}
set count 0
foreach {type varcol defTitle} $desc {
set col 0
set lin 0
set title [lindex [BWidget::getname "${type}Colors"] 0]
if {![string length $title]} {
set title $defTitle
}
set titf [TitleFrame $fg.$type -text $title]
set subf [$titf getframe]
foreach color [set $varcol] {
set fround [frame $fg.round$count \
-highlightthickness 1 \
-relief sunken -borderwidth 2]
set fcolor [frame $fg.color$count -width 16 -height 12 \
-highlightthickness 0 \
-relief flat -borderwidth 0 \
-background $color]
pack $fcolor -in $fround
grid $fround -in $subf -row $lin -column $col -padx 1 -pady 1
bind $fround <ButtonPress-1> [list SelectColor::_select_rgb $count]
bind $fcolor <ButtonPress-1> [list SelectColor::_select_rgb $count]
DynamicHelp::add $fround -text $mouseHelpText
DynamicHelp::add $fcolor -text $mouseHelpText
bind $fround <Double-1> \
"SelectColor::_select_rgb [list $count]; [list $top] invoke 0"
bind $fcolor <Double-1> \
"SelectColor::_select_rgb [list $count]; [list $top] invoke 0"
# Record list of $fround values in _rounds
lappend _rounds $fround
incr count
if {[incr col] == 6} {
incr lin
set col 0
}
}
pack $titf -anchor w -pady 2
}
# Record these colors for later use
set _fgColor [$fg.round0 cget -highlightcolor]
# Add a TitleFrame $titf to wrap $fg.round and $fg.value
set name [lindex [BWidget::getname yourSelection] 0]
set titf [TitleFrame $fg.choice -text $name]
set subf [$titf getframe]
pack $titf -anchor w -pady 2 -expand yes -fill both
# Add an entry widget $fg.value for the #RRGGBB value
if {$::tk_version > 8.4} {
set fixedFont TkFixedFont
} else {
set fixedFont Courier
}
set subf2 $fg.vround
frame $subf2 -highlightthickness 0 -relief sunken -borderwidth 2
entry $fg.value -width 8 -relief sunken -bd 0 -highlightthickness 0 \
-bg white -textvariable ::SelectColor::_entryColor -font $fixedFont
pack $subf2 -in $subf -anchor w -side left
pack $fg.value -in $subf2 -anchor w -side left
if {$help} {
DynamicHelp::add $fg.value -text [subst -nocommands -novariables\
[lindex [BWidget::getname keyboardHelpText] 0]]
}
# Remove focus from the entry widget by clicking anywhere...
bind $top <1> [list ::SelectColor::_CheckFocus %W]
# ... or by pressing Return/Escape.
bind $fg.value <Return> [list ::SelectColor::_CheckFocus .]
bind $fg.value <Escape> [list ::SelectColor::_CheckFocus .]
bind $fg.value <Return> {+break}
bind $fg.value <Escape> {+break}
# Break so that the bindings to these events on the toplevel are not
# executed.
# MODS - record the Tk window path for the entry widget.
set _widget(en) $fg.value
set fround [frame $fg.round \
-highlightthickness 0 \
-relief sunken -borderwidth 2]
set fcolor [frame $fg.color \
-width 50 \
-highlightthickness 0 \
-relief flat -borderwidth 0]
pack $fcolor -in $fround -fill y -expand yes
pack $fround -in $subf -side right -anchor e -pady 2 -fill y -expand yes
# Add a TitleFrame $dlgf.fd to wrap the canvas selectors. The
# labels are referenced by the DynamicHelp tooltip.
set name [lindex [BWidget::getname colorSelectors] 0]
set fd0 [TitleFrame $dlgf.fd -text $name]
set fd [$fd0 getframe]
set f1 [frame $fd.f1 -relief sunken -borderwidth 2]
set f2 [frame $fd.f2 -relief sunken -borderwidth 2]
set c1 [canvas $f1.c -width 200 -height 200 -bd 0 -highlightthickness 0]
set c2 [canvas $f2.c -width 15 -height 200 -bd 0 -highlightthickness 0]
for {set val 0} {$val < 40} {incr val} {
$c2 create rectangle 0 [expr {5*$val}] 15 [expr {5*$val+5}] -tags val[expr {39-$val}]
}
$c2 create polygon 0 0 10 5 0 10 -fill black -outline white -tags target
pack $c1 $c2
pack $f1 $f2 -side left -padx 10 -anchor n
pack $fg $fd0 -side left -anchor n -fill y
pack configure $fd0 -pady 2 -padx {4 0}
bind $c1 <ButtonPress-1> [list SelectColor::_select_hue_sat %x %y]
bind $c1 <B1-Motion> [list SelectColor::_select_hue_sat %x %y]
bind $c2 <ButtonPress-1> [list SelectColor::_select_value %x %y]
bind $c2 <B1-Motion> [list SelectColor::_select_value %x %y]
if {![info exists _image] || [catch {image type $_image}]} {
set _image [image create photo -width 200 -height 200]
for {set x 0} {$x < 200} {incr x 4} {
for {set y 0} {$y < 200} {incr y 4} {
$_image put \
[eval [list format "\#%04x%04x%04x"] \
[hsvToRgb [expr {$x/196.0}] [expr {(196-$y)/196.0}] 0.85]] \
-to $x $y [expr {$x+4}] [expr {$y+4}]
}
}
}
$c1 create image 0 0 -anchor nw -image $_image
$c1 create bitmap 0 0 \
-bitmap @[file join $::BWIDGET::LIBRARY "images" "target.xbm"] \
-anchor nw -tags target
set _selection -1
set _widget(fcolor) $fg
set _widget(chs) $c1
set _widget(cv) $c2
set rgb [winfo rgb $path [Widget::cget $path:SelectColor -color]]
set _hsv [eval rgbToHsv $rgb]
_set_rgb [eval [list format "\#%04x%04x%04x"] $rgb]
_set_hue_sat [lindex $_hsv 0] [lindex $_hsv 1]
_set_value [lindex $_hsv 2]
# Initialize _oldColor which is used to reset the color supplied to
# _userCommand if the user cancels.
set _oldColor [set _unsavedSelection]
set tmp24 [::SelectColor::_24BitRgb $_oldColor]
if {[_ValidateColorEntry forced $tmp24]} {
set ::SelectColor::_entryColor $tmp24
} else {
# Value $tmp24 does not pass entry widget validation and if used
# would disable validation. Use this default instead.
set _entryColor #
}
# Validate input to the entry field.
# To avoid conflict with the entry -variable (_entryColor), do not set the
# latter directly (because a failed validation will switch off subsequent
# validations). Either call _SetEntryValue, or set _unsavedSelection which
# triggers the trace.
$fg.value configure -validate all -validatecommand \
[list SelectColor::_ValidateColorEntry %V %P]
# Trace _unsavedSelection
# Subsequent modifications to _unsavedSelection will update the entry
# widget, if the value is valid.
# From now on, this is the only way that:
# (1) ::SelectColor::_SetEntryValue is called
# (2) ::SelectColor::_entryColor is modified (except by the user typing in
# the entry widget)
trace add variable ::SelectColor::_unsavedSelection write ::SelectColor::_SetEntryValue
$top add -text [lindex [BWidget::getname ok] 0]
$top add -text [lindex [BWidget::getname cancel] 0]
# Override background color
ReColor $path $_bgColor
set res [$top draw]
if {$res == 0} {
set color [$fg.color cget -background]
} else {
# User has cancelled - call _userCommand to undo any changes made
# in the caller.
_userCommand $_oldColor
set color ""
}
trace remove variable ::SelectColor::_unsavedSelection write ::SelectColor::_SetEntryValue
destroy $top
return $color
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectColor::setbasecolor
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Exported command, to allow the caller to set the base colors of the palette.
proc SelectColor::setbasecolor { idx color } {
variable _baseColors
set _baseColors [lreplace $_baseColors $idx $idx $color]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectColor::setcolor
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectColor::setcolor { idx color } {
variable _userColors
set _userColors [lreplace $_userColors $idx $idx $color]
}
proc SelectColor::_select_rgb {count} {
variable _baseColors
variable _userColors
variable _selection
variable _widget
variable _hsv
variable _unsavedSelection
variable _bgColor
variable _fgColor
set frame $_widget(fcolor)
# Use highlight color instead of focus to identify the selected
# palette color. Tab traversal of focus now works correctly.
if {$_selection >= 0} {
$frame.round$_selection configure \
-relief sunken -highlightthickness 1 -borderwidth 2 \
-highlightbackground $_bgColor
}
$frame.round$count configure \
-relief flat -highlightthickness 2 -borderwidth 1 \
-highlightbackground $_fgColor
set _selection $count
set bg [$frame.color$count cget -background]
set user [expr {$_selection-[llength $_baseColors]}]
if {$user >= 0 &&
[string equal \
[winfo rgb $frame.color$_selection $bg] \
[winfo rgb $frame.color$_selection white]]} {
set bg [$frame.color cget -bg]
$frame.color$_selection configure -background $bg
set _userColors [lreplace $_userColors $user $user $bg]
} else {
set _hsv [eval rgbToHsv [winfo rgb $frame.color$count $bg]]
_set_hue_sat [lindex $_hsv 0] [lindex $_hsv 1]
_set_value [lindex $_hsv 2]
$frame.color configure -background $bg
# Display selected color in entry widget (via trace on
# ::SelectColor::_unsavedSelection), and notify caller.
set ::SelectColor::_unsavedSelection $bg
_userCommand $bg
}
}
proc SelectColor::_set_rgb {rgb} {
variable _selection
variable _baseColors
variable _userColors
variable _widget
variable _unsavedSelection
set frame $_widget(fcolor)
$frame.color configure -background $rgb
# Display selected color in entry widget (via trace on
# ::SelectColor::_unsavedSelection), and notify caller.
set ::SelectColor::_unsavedSelection $rgb
_userCommand $rgb
set user [expr {$_selection-[llength $_baseColors]}]
if {$user >= 0} {
$frame.color$_selection configure -background $rgb
set _userColors [lreplace $_userColors $user $user $rgb]
}
}
proc SelectColor::_select_hue_sat {x y} {
variable _widget
variable _hsv
if {$x < 0} {
set x 0
} elseif {$x > 200} {
set x 200
}
if {$y < 0 } {
set y 0
} elseif {$y > 200} {
set y 200
}
set hue [expr {$x/200.0}]
set sat [expr {(200-$y)/200.0}]
set _hsv [lreplace $_hsv 0 1 $hue $sat]
$_widget(chs) coords target [expr {$x-9}] [expr {$y-9}]
_draw_values $hue $sat
_set_rgb [eval [list format "\#%04x%04x%04x"] [eval [list hsvToRgb] $_hsv]]
}
proc SelectColor::_set_hue_sat {hue sat} {
variable _widget
set x [expr {$hue*200-9}]
set y [expr {(1-$sat)*200-9}]
$_widget(chs) coords target $x $y
_draw_values $hue $sat
}
proc SelectColor::_select_value {x y} {
variable _widget
variable _hsv
if {$y < 0} {
set y 0
} elseif {$y > 200} {
set y 200
}
$_widget(cv) coords target 0 [expr {$y-5}] 10 $y 0 [expr {$y+5}]
set _hsv [lreplace $_hsv 2 2 [expr {(200-$y)/200.0}]]
_set_rgb [eval [list format "\#%04x%04x%04x"] [eval [list hsvToRgb] $_hsv]]
}
proc SelectColor::_draw_values {hue sat} {
variable _widget
for {set val 0} {$val < 40} {incr val} {
set l [hsvToRgb $hue $sat [expr {$val/39.0}]]
set col [eval [list format "\#%04x%04x%04x"] $l]
$_widget(cv) itemconfigure val$val -fill $col -outline $col
}
}
proc SelectColor::_set_value {value} {
variable _widget
set y [expr {int((1-$value)*200)}]
$_widget(cv) coords target 0 [expr {$y-5}] 10 $y 0 [expr {$y+5}]
}
# --
# Taken from tk8.0/demos/tcolor.tcl
# --
# The procedure below converts an HSB value to RGB. It takes hue, saturation,
# and value components (floating-point, 0-1.0) as arguments, and returns a
# list containing RGB components (integers, 0-65535) as result. The code
# here is a copy of the code on page 616 of "Fundamentals of Interactive
# Computer Graphics" by Foley and Van Dam.
proc SelectColor::hsvToRgb {hue sat val} {
set v [expr {round(65535.0*$val)}]
if {$sat == 0} {
return [list $v $v $v]
} else {
set hue [expr {$hue*6.0}]
if {$hue >= 6.0} {
set hue 0.0
}
set i [expr {int($hue)}]
set f [expr {$hue-$i}]
set p [expr {round(65535.0*$val*(1 - $sat))}]
set q [expr {round(65535.0*$val*(1 - ($sat*$f)))}]
set t [expr {round(65535.0*$val*(1 - ($sat*(1 - $f))))}]
switch $i {
0 {return [list $v $t $p]}
1 {return [list $q $v $p]}
2 {return [list $p $v $t]}
3 {return [list $p $q $v]}
4 {return [list $t $p $v]}
5 {return [list $v $p $q]}
}
}
}
# --
# Taken from tk8.0/demos/tcolor.tcl
# --
# The procedure below converts an RGB value to HSB. It takes red, green,
# and blue components (0-65535) as arguments, and returns a list containing
# HSB components (floating-point, 0-1) as result. The code here is a copy
# of the code on page 615 of "Fundamentals of Interactive Computer Graphics"
# by Foley and Van Dam.
proc SelectColor::rgbToHsv {red green blue} {
if {$red > $green} {
set max $red.0
set min $green.0
} else {
set max $green.0
set min $red.0
}
if {$blue > $max} {
set max $blue.0
} else {
if {$blue < $min} {
set min $blue.0
}
}
set range [expr {$max-$min}]
if {$max == 0} {
set sat 0
} else {
set sat [expr {($max-$min)/$max}]
}
if {$sat == 0} {
set hue 0
} else {
set rc [expr {($max - $red)/$range}]
set gc [expr {($max - $green)/$range}]
set bc [expr {($max - $blue)/$range}]
if {$red == $max} {
set hue [expr {.166667*($bc - $gc)}]
} else {
if {$green == $max} {
set hue [expr {.166667*(2 + $rc - $bc)}]
} else {
set hue [expr {.166667*(4 + $gc - $rc)}]
}
}
if {$hue < 0.0} {
set hue [expr {$hue + 1.0}]
}
}
return [list $hue $sat [expr {$max/65535}]]
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectColor::ReColor
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command to change the background color for the dialog.
#
# FIXME Ideally this would be called by "$w configure -background $value".
# Currently a "configure -background" command is passed to Dialog and Widget
# but does not change SelectColor.
# HaO: it might also be possible that this is controled by the option data base.
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectColor::ReColor {path newColor} {
variable _bgColor
variable _rounds
set _bgColor $newColor
$path configure -bg $_bgColor
# Use the internal names of the dialog widget - it would be nicer to
# use a colored dialog widget.
foreach child {
fd fd.f.f1 fd.f.f2
fg fg.base fg.choice
fg.user fg.round fg.vround
} {
$path.frame.$child configure -background $_bgColor
}
# Special treatment for Aqua native buttons.
# FIXME implement a general fix for BWidget Button/ButtonBox/Dialog
if {[string equal [tk windowingsystem] "aqua"]} {
$path.bbox.b0 configure -highlightbackground $_bgColor \
-highlightthickness 0
$path.bbox.b1 configure -highlightbackground $_bgColor \
-highlightthickness 0
} else {
$path.bbox.b0 configure -bg $_bgColor -activebackground $_bgColor \
-highlightbackground $_bgColor
$path.bbox.b1 configure -bg $_bgColor -activebackground $_bgColor \
-highlightbackground $_bgColor
}
foreach fround $_rounds {
$fround configure -highlightbackground $_bgColor -bg $_bgColor
}
return
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectColor::_24BitRgb
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command to convert a hex 12n-bit RGB color to 24-bit, n > 0.
# Convert anything else to {}.
# Used to process the display in the entry widget.
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectColor::_24BitRgb {col} {
set lenny [string length $col]
incr lenny -1
if { ($lenny % 3)
|| ($lenny == 0)
|| (![regexp {^#[a-fA-F0-9]*$} $col])
} {
# Not a multiple of 3, or not leading #, or nothing after #,
# or non-HEX digits.
return {}
} elseif {$lenny == 3} {
# 12-bit, pad to 24-bit
set val $col
set val [string replace $val 3 3 "[string index $val 3]0"]
set val [string replace $val 2 2 "[string index $val 2]0"]
set val [string replace $val 1 1 "[string index $val 1]0"]
return $val
} elseif {$lenny == 6} {
# 24-bit, return unchanged
return $col
} else {
# Truncate to 24-bit
set delta [expr {$lenny / 3}]
set delta2 [expr {$delta * 2}]
set deltaP1 [incr delta]
set deltaP2 [incr delta]
set delta2P1 [incr delta2]
set delta2P2 [incr delta2]
set result #
append result [string range $col 1 2]
append result [string range $col $deltaP1 $deltaP2]
append result [string range $col $delta2P1 $delta2P2]
return $result
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectColor::_SetEntryValue
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command to update the (hexadecimal color displayed in the) entry widget
# when there is a change in the color currently selected in the GUI, which is
# stored in _unsavedSelection.
#
# This command is called by a write trace on _unsavedSelection; if the
# value of this variable is a valid color (i.e. "#" followed by 3N hex digits),
# this command converts the value to 24 bits and sets ::SelectColor::_entryColor
# to the result, thereby displaying it in the entry widget. Therefore,
# when the user chooses a color by means other than the entry widget, this
# command updates the entry widget.
#
# This command does not update the GUI when the user changes the value in the
# entry widget: that is done instead by the -vcmd of the entry widget, which
# is SelectColor::_ValidateColorEntry. When the user chooses a color by typing
# in the entry widget, the command _ValidateColorEntry copies the value to
# _unsavedSelection if a keystroke in the widget makes its contents 3N hex
# digits long.
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectColor::_SetEntryValue {argVarName var2 op} {
variable _entryColor
variable _unsavedSelection
if {[string equal $argVarName ::SelectColor::_unsavedSelection] &&
[string equal $var2 {}] && [string equal $op "write"]} {
# OK
} else {
# Unexpected call
return -code error "Unexpected trace of variable\
\"$argVarName\", \"$var2\", \"$op\""
}
set col24bit [::SelectColor::_24BitRgb [set $argVarName]]
if {[_ValidateColorEntry forced $col24bit]} {
set ::SelectColor::_entryColor $col24bit
} else {
# Value is invalid, and if written to _entryColor this would disable
# validation.
}
return
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectColor::_CheckFocus
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# This command is called with argument %W as a binding to <1> on the toplevel.
# It is also called with argument {.}, by bindings on the entry widget to
# <Escape>, <Return>.
#
# The command does something only if the entry widget has focus, and the
# argument (the clicked window) is the Tk window path of somewhere else. Then,
# the command removes focus from the entry widget to the default button.
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectColor::_CheckFocus {w} {
variable _widget
if { (! [string equal $w $_widget(en)]) &&
([string equal [focus] $_widget(en)])} {
set top [winfo toplevel $_widget(en)]
$top setfocus default
}
return
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectColor::_ValidateColorEntry
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# This command is the "-validate all -vcmd" of the entry widget.
# It is also called by SelectColor::dialog and SelectColor::_SetEntryValue to
# check values assigned to _entryColor.
#
# When the user chooses a color by typing in the entry widget, this command
# copies the value to _unsavedSelection if a keystroke in the widget makes its
# contents 3N hex digits long.
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectColor::_ValidateColorEntry {percentV percentP} {
variable _unsavedSelection
set result [regexp -- {^#[0-9a-fA-F]*$} $percentP]
set lenny [string length $percentP]
if {$result} {
if {[string equal $percentV "forced"]} {
# Validation only. Don't want a loop.
} elseif {[string equal $percentV "key"]} {
# Copy to GUI if a valid color.
if {($lenny - 1) % 3 || $lenny == 1} {
# Not a valid color, which needs 3n+1 characters, n > 0
} else {
after idle [list SelectColor::_SetWithoutTrace $percentP]
}
} elseif {[string equal $percentV "focusout"]} {
# If the color is valid it will already have been copied to the GUI
# and to _userCommand by the "key" validation above.
#
# The code below only needs to reset the value in the entry widget.
# Remove an invalid value, convert a valid one to 24-bit.
# Ignore $percentP, just fire the trace on _unsavedSelection.
set color $_unsavedSelection
after idle [list set ::SelectColor::_unsavedSelection $color]
}
}
return $result
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectColor::_SetWithoutTrace
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# This command sets _unsavedSelection (using _set_rgb) without firing the trace
# that copies the value to _entryColor.
# The command is called by SelectColor::_ValidateColorEntry to avoid a loop.
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectColor::_SetWithoutTrace {value} {
trace remove variable ::SelectColor::_unsavedSelection write ::SelectColor::_SetEntryValue
_set_rgb $value
set _hsv [eval rgbToHsv [winfo rgb . $value]]
_set_hue_sat [lindex $_hsv 0] [lindex $_hsv 1]
_set_value [lindex $_hsv 2]
trace add variable ::SelectColor::_unsavedSelection write ::SelectColor::_SetEntryValue
return
}

955
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/combobox.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,955 @@
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# combobox.tcl
# This file is part of Unifix BWidget Toolkit
# $Id: combobox.tcl,v 1.42.2.3 2012/04/02 09:53:41 oehhar Exp $
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Index of commands:
# - ComboBox::create
# - ComboBox::configure
# - ComboBox::cget
# - ComboBox::setvalue
# - ComboBox::getvalue
# - ComboBox::clearvalue
# - ComboBox::getentry
# - ComboBox::_create_popup
# - ComboBox::_mapliste
# - ComboBox::_unmapliste
# - ComboBox::_select
# - ComboBox::_modify_value
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# ComboBox uses the 8.3 -listvariable listbox option
package require Tk 8.3
namespace eval ComboBox {
Widget::define ComboBox combobox ArrowButton Entry ListBox
Widget::tkinclude ComboBox frame :cmd \
include {-relief -borderwidth -bd -background} \
initialize {-relief sunken -borderwidth 2}
if {[Widget::theme]} {
Widget::bwinclude ComboBox Entry .e
} else {
Widget::bwinclude ComboBox Entry .e \
remove {-relief -bd -borderwidth -bg} \
rename {-background -entrybg}
}
Widget::declare ComboBox {
{-height TkResource 0 0 listbox}
{-values String "" 0}
{-images String "" 0}
{-indents String "" 0}
{-modifycmd String "" 0}
{-postcommand String "" 0}
{-expand Enum none 0 {none tab}}
{-autocomplete Boolean 0 0}
{-autopost Boolean 0 0}
{-bwlistbox Boolean 0 0}
{-listboxwidth Int 0 0}
{-hottrack Boolean 0 0}
}
if {[Widget::theme]} {
Widget::addmap ComboBox ArrowButton .a {
-background {} -state {}
}
} else {
Widget::addmap ComboBox ArrowButton .a {
-background {} -foreground {} -disabledforeground {} -state {}
}
}
::bind BwComboBox <FocusIn> [list after idle {BWidget::refocus %W %W.e}]
::bind BwComboBox <Destroy> [list ComboBox::_destroy %W]
::bind ListBoxHotTrack <Motion> {
%W selection clear 0 end
%W activate @%x,%y
%W selection set @%x,%y
}
variable _index
}
# ComboBox::create --
#
# Create a combobox widget with the given options.
#
# Arguments:
# path name of the new widget.
# args optional arguments to the widget.
#
# Results:
# path name of the new widget.
proc ComboBox::create { path args } {
array set maps [list ComboBox {} :cmd {} .e {} .a {}]
array set maps [Widget::parseArgs ComboBox $args]
eval [list frame $path] $maps(:cmd) \
[list -highlightthickness 0 -takefocus 0 -class ComboBox]
Widget::initFromODB ComboBox $path $maps(ComboBox)
bindtags $path [list $path BwComboBox [winfo toplevel $path] all]
if {[Widget::theme]} {
set entry [eval [list Entry::create $path.e] $maps(.e) \
[list -takefocus 1]]
} else {
set entry [eval [list Entry::create $path.e] $maps(.e) \
[list -relief flat -borderwidth 0 -takefocus 1]]
}
::bind $path.e <FocusOut> [list $path _focus_out]
::bind $path <<TraverseIn>> [list $path _traverse_in]
if {[Widget::cget $path -autocomplete]} {
::bind $path.e <KeyRelease> [list $path _auto_complete %K]
}
if {[Widget::cget $path -autopost]} {
::bind $path.e <KeyRelease> +[list $path _auto_post %K]
} else {
::bind $entry <Key-Up> [list ComboBox::_unmapliste $path]
::bind $entry <Key-Down> [list ComboBox::_mapliste $path]
}
if {[string equal [tk windowingsystem] "x11"]} {
set ipadx 0
set width 11
} else {
set ipadx 2
set width 15
}
set height [winfo reqheight $entry]
set arrow [eval [list ArrowButton::create $path.a] $maps(.a) \
[list -width $width -height $height \
-highlightthickness 0 -borderwidth 1 -takefocus 0 \
-dir bottom -type button -ipadx $ipadx \
-command [list ComboBox::_mapliste $path] \
]]
pack $arrow -side right -fill y
pack $entry -side left -fill both -expand yes
set editable [Widget::cget $path -editable]
Entry::configure $path.e -editable $editable
if {$editable} {
::bind $entry <ButtonPress-1> [list ComboBox::_unmapliste $path]
} else {
::bind $entry <ButtonPress-1> [list ArrowButton::invoke $path.a]
if { ![string equal [Widget::cget $path -state] "disabled"] } {
Entry::configure $path.e -takefocus 1
}
}
::bind $path <ButtonPress-1> [list ComboBox::_unmapliste $path]
::bind $entry <Control-Up> [list ComboBox::_modify_value $path previous]
::bind $entry <Control-Down> [list ComboBox::_modify_value $path next]
::bind $entry <Control-Prior> [list ComboBox::_modify_value $path first]
::bind $entry <Control-Next> [list ComboBox::_modify_value $path last]
if {$editable} {
set expand [Widget::cget $path -expand]
if {[string equal "tab" $expand]} {
# Expand entry value on Tab (from -values)
::bind $entry <Tab> "[list ComboBox::_expand $path]; break"
} elseif {[string equal "auto" $expand]} {
# Expand entry value anytime (from -values)
#::bind $entry <Key> "[list ComboBox::_expand $path]; break"
}
}
## If we have images, we have to use a BWidget ListBox.
set bw [Widget::cget $path -bwlistbox]
if {[llength [Widget::cget $path -images]]} {
Widget::configure $path [list -bwlistbox 1]
} else {
Widget::configure $path [list -bwlistbox $bw]
}
set ComboBox::_index($path) -1
return [Widget::create ComboBox $path]
}
# ComboBox::configure --
#
# Configure subcommand for ComboBox widgets. Works like regular
# widget configure command.
#
# Arguments:
# path Name of the ComboBox widget.
# args Additional optional arguments:
# ?-option?
# ?-option value ...?
#
# Results:
# Depends on arguments. If no arguments are given, returns a complete
# list of configuration information. If one argument is given, returns
# the configuration information for that option. If more than one
# argument is given, returns nothing.
proc ComboBox::configure { path args } {
set res [Widget::configure $path $args]
set entry $path.e
set list [list -images -values -bwlistbox -hottrack -autocomplete -autopost]
foreach {ci cv cb ch cac cap} [eval [linsert $list 0 Widget::hasChangedX $path]] { break }
if { $ci } {
set images [Widget::cget $path -images]
if {[llength $images]} {
Widget::configure $path [list -bwlistbox 1]
} else {
Widget::configure $path [list -bwlistbox 0]
}
}
## If autocomplete toggled, turn bindings on/off
if { $cac } {
if {[Widget::cget $path -autocomplete]} {
::bind $entry <KeyRelease> +[list $path _auto_complete %K]
} else {
set bindings [split [::bind $entry <KeyRelease>] \n]
if {[set idx [lsearch $bindings [list $path _auto_complete %K]]] != -1} {
::bind $entry <KeyRelease> [join [lreplace $bindings $idx $idx] \n]
}
}
}
## If autopost toggled, turn bindings on/off
if { $cap } {
if {[Widget::cget $path -autopost]} {
::bind $entry <KeyRelease> +[list $path _auto_post %K]
set bindings [split [::bind $entry <Key-Up>] \n]
if {[set idx [lsearch $bindings [list ComboBox::_unmapliste $path]]] != -1} {
::bind $entry <Key-Up> [join [lreplace $bindings $idx $idx] \n]
}
set bindings [split [::bind $entry <Key-Down>] \n]
if {[set idx [lsearch $bindings [list ComboBox::_mapliste $path]]] != -1} {
::bind $entry <Key-Down> [join [lreplace $bindings $idx $idx] \n]
}
} else {
set bindings [split [::bind $entry <KeyRelease>] \n]
if {[set idx [lsearch $bindings [list $path _auto_post %K]]] != -1} {
::bind $entry <KeyRelease> [join [lreplace $bindings $idx $idx] \n]
}
::bind $entry <Key-Up> +[list ComboBox::_unmapliste $path]
::bind $entry <Key-Down> +[list ComboBox::_mapliste $path]
}
}
set bw [Widget::cget $path -bwlistbox]
## If the images, bwlistbox, hottrack or values have changed,
## destroy the shell so that it will re-create itself the next
## time around.
if { $ci || $cb || $ch || ($bw && $cv) } {
destroy $path.shell
}
set chgedit [Widget::hasChangedX $path -editable]
if {$chgedit} {
if {[Widget::cget $path -editable]} {
::bind $entry <ButtonPress-1> [list ComboBox::_unmapliste $path]
Entry::configure $entry -editable true
} else {
::bind $entry <ButtonPress-1> [list ArrowButton::invoke $path.a]
Entry::configure $entry -editable false
# Make sure that non-editable comboboxes can still be tabbed to.
if { ![string equal [Widget::cget $path -state] "disabled"] } {
Entry::configure $entry -takefocus 1
}
}
}
if {$chgedit || [Widget::hasChangedX $path -expand]} {
# Unset what we may have created.
::bind $entry <Tab> {}
if {[Widget::cget $path -editable]} {
set expand [Widget::cget $path -expand]
if {[string equal "tab" $expand]} {
# Expand entry value on Tab (from -values)
::bind $entry <Tab> "[list ComboBox::_expand $path]; break"
} elseif {[string equal "auto" $expand]} {
# Expand entry value anytime (from -values)
#::bind $entry <Key> "[list ComboBox::_expand $path]; break"
}
}
}
# if state changed to normal and -editable false, the edit must take focus
if { [Widget::hasChangedX $path -state] \
&& ![string equal [Widget::cget $path -state] "disabled"] \
&& ![Widget::cget $path -editable] } {
Entry::configure $entry -takefocus 1
}
# if the dropdown listbox is shown, simply force the actual entry
# colors into it. If it is not shown, the next time the dropdown
# is shown it'll get the actual colors anyway
if {[winfo exists $path.shell.listb]} {
$path.shell.listb configure \
-bg [_getbg $path] \
-fg [_getfg $path]
if {![Widget::theme]} {
$path.shell.listb configure \
-selectbackground [Widget::cget $path -selectbackground] \
-selectforeground [Widget::cget $path -selectforeground]
}
}
return $res
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::cget
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::cget { path option } {
return [Widget::cget $path $option]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::setvalue
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::setvalue { path index } {
variable _index
set values [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -values]
set value [Entry::cget $path.e -text]
switch -- $index {
next {
if { [set idx [lsearch -exact $values $value]] != -1 } {
incr idx
} else {
set idx [lsearch -exact $values "$value*"]
}
}
previous {
if { [set idx [lsearch -exact $values $value]] != -1 } {
incr idx -1
} else {
set idx [lsearch -exact $values "$value*"]
}
}
first {
set idx 0
}
last {
set idx [expr {[llength $values]-1}]
}
default {
if { [string index $index 0] == "@" } {
set idx [string range $index 1 end]
if { ![string is integer -strict $idx] } {
return -code error "bad index \"$index\""
}
} else {
return -code error "bad index \"$index\""
}
}
}
if { $idx >= 0 && $idx < [llength $values] } {
set newval [lindex $values $idx]
set _index($path) $idx
Entry::configure $path.e -text $newval
return 1
}
return 0
}
proc ComboBox::icursor { path idx } {
return [$path.e icursor $idx]
}
proc ComboBox::get { path } {
return [$path.e get]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::getvalue
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::getvalue { path } {
variable _index
set values [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -values]
set value [Entry::cget $path.e -text]
# Check if an index was saved by the last setvalue operation
# If this index still matches it is returned
# This is necessary for the case when values is not unique
if { $_index($path) >= 0 \
&& $_index($path) < [llength $values] \
&& $value eq [lindex $values $_index($path)]} {
return $_index($path)
}
return [lsearch -exact $values $value]
}
proc ComboBox::getlistbox { path } {
_create_popup $path
return $path.shell.listb
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::post
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::post { path } {
_mapliste $path
return
}
proc ComboBox::unpost { path } {
_unmapliste $path
return
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::bind
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::bind { path args } {
return [eval [list ::bind $path.e] $args]
}
proc ComboBox::insert { path idx args } {
upvar #0 [Widget::varForOption $path -values] values
if {[Widget::cget $path -bwlistbox]} {
set l [$path getlistbox]
set i [eval [linsert $args 0 $l insert $idx #auto]]
set text [$l itemcget $i -text]
if {$idx == "end"} {
lappend values $text
} else {
set values [linsert $values $idx $text]
}
} else {
set values [eval [list linsert $values $idx] $args]
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::clearvalue
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::clearvalue { path } {
Entry::configure $path.e -text ""
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::getentry
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::getentry { path } {
return $path.e
}
proc ComboBox::_getfg {path} {
# First try to retrieve option
set fg [Widget::cget $path -foreground];
if { 0 == [string length $fg] && [Widget::theme] } {
# fall back to style settings when not configured for widget
return [::ttk::style lookup TEntry -foreground];
}
return $fg;
}
proc ComboBox::_getbg {path} {
if {[Widget::theme]} {
# First try to retrieve option
set bg [Widget::cget $path -background];
if {0 == [string length $bg]} {
# fall back to style settings when not configured for widget
return [::ttk::style lookup TEntry -backround];
}
} else {
# fetch the entrybg resource value
set bg [Widget::cget $path -entrybg]
}
return $bg;
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::_create_popup
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::_create_popup { path } {
set shell $path.shell
if {[winfo exists $shell]} { return }
set lval [Widget::cget $path -values]
set h [Widget::cget $path -height]
set bw [Widget::cget $path -bwlistbox]
if { $h <= 0 } {
set len [llength $lval]
if { $len < 3 } {
set h 3
} elseif { $len > 10 } {
set h 10
} else {
set h $len
}
}
if {[string equal [tk windowingsystem] "x11"]} {
set sbwidth 11
} else {
set sbwidth 15
}
toplevel $shell -relief solid -bd 1
wm withdraw $shell
wm overrideredirect $shell 1
# these commands cause the combobox to behave strangely on OS X
if {! $Widget::_aqua } {
update idle
wm transient $shell [winfo toplevel $path]
catch { wm attributes $shell -topmost 1 }
}
set sw [ScrolledWindow $shell.sw -managed 1 -size $sbwidth -ipad 0]
if {$bw} {
if {[Widget::theme]} {
set listb [ListBox $shell.listb \
-relief flat -borderwidth 0 -highlightthickness 0 \
-selectmode single -selectfill 1 -autofocus 0 -height $h \
-font [Widget::cget $path -font] \
-bg [_getbg $path] \
-fg [_getfg $path]]
} else {
set listb [ListBox $shell.listb \
-relief flat -borderwidth 0 -highlightthickness 0 \
-selectmode single -selectfill 1 -autofocus 0 -height $h \
-font [Widget::cget $path -font] \
-bg [_getbg $path] \
-fg [_getfg $path] \
-selectbackground [Widget::cget $path -selectbackground] \
-selectforeground [Widget::cget $path -selectforeground]]
}
set values [Widget::cget $path -values]
set images [Widget::cget $path -images]
foreach value $values image $images {
$listb insert end #auto -text $value -image $image
}
$listb bindText <1> [list ComboBox::_select $path]
$listb bindImage <1> [list ComboBox::_select $path]
if {[Widget::cget $path -hottrack]} {
$listb bindText <Enter> [list $listb selection set]
$listb bindImage <Enter> [list $listb selection set]
}
} else {
if {[Widget::theme]} {
set listb [listbox $shell.listb \
-relief flat -borderwidth 0 -highlightthickness 0 \
-exportselection false \
-font [Widget::cget $path -font] \
-height $h \
-bg [_getbg $path] \
-fg [_getfg $path] \
-listvariable [Widget::varForOption $path -values]]
} else {
set listb [listbox $shell.listb \
-relief flat -borderwidth 0 -highlightthickness 0 \
-exportselection false \
-font [Widget::cget $path -font] \
-height $h \
-bg [_getbg $path] \
-fg [_getfg $path] \
-selectbackground [Widget::cget $path -selectbackground] \
-selectforeground [Widget::cget $path -selectforeground] \
-listvariable [Widget::varForOption $path -values]]
}
::bind $listb <ButtonRelease-1> [list ComboBox::_select $path @%x,%y]
if {[Widget::cget $path -hottrack]} {
bindtags $listb [concat [bindtags $listb] ListBoxHotTrack]
}
}
pack $sw -fill both -expand yes
$sw setwidget $listb
::bind $listb <Return> "ComboBox::_select [list $path] \[$listb curselection\]"
::bind $listb <Escape> [list ComboBox::_unmapliste $path]
::bind $listb <FocusOut> [list ComboBox::_focus_out $path]
}
proc ComboBox::_recreate_popup { path } {
variable background
variable foreground
set shell $path.shell
set lval [Widget::cget $path -values]
set h [Widget::cget $path -height]
set bw [Widget::cget $path -bwlistbox]
if { $h <= 0 } {
set len [llength $lval]
if { $len < 3 } {
set h 3
} elseif { $len > 10 } {
set h 10
} else {
set h $len
}
}
if { [string equal [tk windowingsystem] "x11"] } {
set sbwidth 11
} else {
set sbwidth 15
}
_create_popup $path
if {![Widget::cget $path -editable]} {
if {[info exists background]} {
$path.e configure -bg $background
$path.e configure -fg $foreground
unset background
unset foreground
}
}
set listb $shell.listb
destroy $shell.sw
set sw [ScrolledWindow $shell.sw -managed 1 -size $sbwidth -ipad 0]
$listb configure \
-height $h \
-font [Widget::cget $path -font] \
-bg [_getbg $path] \
-fg [_getfg $path]
if {![Widget::theme]} {
$listb configure \
-selectbackground [Widget::cget $path -selectbackground] \
-selectforeground [Widget::cget $path -selectforeground]
}
pack $sw -fill both -expand yes
$sw setwidget $listb
raise $listb
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::_mapliste
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::_mapliste { path } {
set listb $path.shell.listb
if {[winfo exists $path.shell] &&
[string equal [wm state $path.shell] "normal"]} {
_unmapliste $path
return
}
if { [Widget::cget $path -state] == "disabled" } {
return
}
if {[llength [set cmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -postcommand]]]} {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
if { ![llength [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -values]] } {
return
}
_recreate_popup $path
ArrowButton::configure $path.a -relief sunken
update
set bw [Widget::cget $path -bwlistbox]
$listb selection clear 0 end
set values [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -values]
set curval [Entry::cget $path.e -text]
if { [set idx [lsearch -exact $values $curval]] != -1 ||
[set idx [lsearch -exact $values "$curval*"]] != -1 } {
if {$bw} {
set idx [$listb items $idx]
} else {
$listb activate $idx
}
$listb selection set $idx
$listb see $idx
} else {
set idx 0
if {$bw} {
set idx [$listb items 0]
} else {
$listb activate $idx
}
$listb selection set $idx
$listb see $idx
}
set width [Widget::cget $path -listboxwidth]
if {!$width} { set width [winfo width $path] }
BWidget::place $path.shell $width 0 below $path
wm deiconify $path.shell
raise $path.shell
BWidget::focus set $listb
if {! $Widget::_aqua } {
BWidget::grab global $path
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::_unmapliste
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::_unmapliste { path {refocus 1} } {
# On aqua, state is zoomed, otherwise normal
if {[winfo exists $path.shell] && \
( [string equal [wm state $path.shell] "normal"] ||
[string equal [wm state $path.shell] "zoomed"] ) } {
if {! $Widget::_aqua } {
BWidget::grab release $path
BWidget::focus release $path.shell.listb $refocus
# Update now because otherwise [focus -force...] makes the app hang!
if {$refocus} {
update
focus -force $path.e
}
}
wm withdraw $path.shell
ArrowButton::configure $path.a -relief raised
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::_select
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::_select { path index } {
set index [$path.shell.listb index $index]
_unmapliste $path
if { $index != -1 } {
if { [setvalue $path @$index] } {
set cmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -modifycmd]
if {[llength $cmd]} {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
}
}
$path.e selection clear
if {[$path.e cget -exportselection]} {
$path.e selection range 0 end
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::_modify_value
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::_modify_value { path direction } {
if {[setvalue $path $direction]
&& [llength [set cmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -modifycmd]]]} {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::_expand
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::_expand {path} {
set values [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -values]
if {![llength $values]} {
bell
return 0
}
set found {}
set curval [Entry::cget $path.e -text]
set curlen [$path.e index insert]
if {$curlen < [string length $curval]} {
# we are somewhere in the middle of a string.
# if the full value matches some string in the listbox,
# reorder values to start matching after that string.
set idx [lsearch -exact $values $curval]
if {$idx >= 0} {
set values [concat [lrange $values [expr {$idx+1}] end] \
[lrange $values 0 $idx]]
}
}
if {$curlen == 0} {
set found $values
} else {
foreach val $values {
if {[string equal -length $curlen $curval $val]} {
lappend found $val
}
}
}
if {[llength $found]} {
Entry::configure $path.e -text [lindex $found 0]
if {[llength $found] > 1} {
set best [_best_match $found [string range $curval 0 $curlen]]
set blen [string length $best]
$path.e icursor $blen
$path.e selection range $blen end
}
} else {
bell
}
return [llength $found]
}
# best_match --
# finds the best unique match in a list of names
# The extra $e in this argument allows us to limit the innermost loop a
# little further.
# Arguments:
# l list to find best unique match in
# e currently best known unique match
# Returns:
# longest unique match in the list
#
proc ComboBox::_best_match {l {e {}}} {
set ec [lindex $l 0]
if {[llength $l]>1} {
set e [string length $e]; incr e -1
set ei [string length $ec]; incr ei -1
foreach l $l {
while {$ei>=$e && [string first $ec $l]} {
set ec [string range $ec 0 [incr ei -1]]
}
}
}
return $ec
}
# possibly faster
#proc match {string1 string2} {
# set i 1
# while {[string equal -length $i $string1 $string2]} { incr i }
# return [string range $string1 0 [expr {$i-2}]]
#}
#proc matchlist {list} {
# set list [lsort $list]
# return [match [lindex $list 0] [lindex $list end]]
#}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::_traverse_in
# Called when widget receives keyboard focus due to keyboard traversal.
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::_traverse_in { path } {
if {[$path.e selection present] != 1} {
# Autohighlight the selection, but not if one existed
$path.e selection range 0 end
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::_focus_out
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::_focus_out { path } {
if {[string first $path [focus]] != 0} {
# we lost focus to some other app or window, so remove the listbox
return [_unmapliste $path 0]
}
}
proc ComboBox::_auto_complete { path key } {
## Any key string with more than one character and is not entirely
## lower-case is considered a function key and is thus ignored.
if {[string length $key] > 1 && [string tolower $key] != $key} { return }
set text [string map [list {[} {\[} {]} {\]}] [$path.e get]]
if {[string equal $text ""]} { return }
set values [Widget::cget $path -values]
set x [lsearch $values $text*]
if {$x < 0} { return }
set idx [$path.e index insert]
$path.e configure -text [lindex $values $x]
$path.e icursor $idx
$path.e select range insert end
}
proc ComboBox::_auto_post { path key } {
if {[string equal $key "Escape"] || [string equal $key "Return"]} {
_unmapliste $path
return
}
if {[catch {$path.shell.listb curselection} x] || $x == ""} {
if {[string equal $key "Up"]} {
_unmapliste $path
return
}
set x -1
}
if {([string length $key] > 1 && [string tolower $key] != $key) && \
[string equal $key "BackSpace"] != 0 && \
[string equal $key "Up"] != 0 && \
[string equal $key "Down"] != 0} {
return
}
# post the listbox
_create_popup $path
set width [Widget::cget $path -listboxwidth]
if {!$width} { set width [winfo width $path] }
BWidget::place $path.shell $width 0 below $path
wm deiconify $path.shell
BWidget::grab release $path
BWidget::focus release $path.shell.listb 1
focus -force $path.e
set values [Widget::cget $path -values]
switch -- $key {
Up {
if {[incr x -1] < 0} {
set x 0
} else {
Entry::configure $path.e -text [lindex $values $x]
}
}
Down {
if {[incr x] >= [llength $values]} {
set x [expr {[llength $values] - 1}]
} else {
Entry::configure $path.e -text [lindex $values $x]
}
}
default {
# auto-select within the listbox the item closest to the entry's value
set text [string map [list {[} {\[} {]} {\]}] [$path.e get]]
if {[string equal $text ""]} {
set x 0
} else {
set x [lsearch $values $text*]
}
}
}
if {$x >= 0} {
$path.shell.listb selection clear 0 end
$path.shell.listb selection set $x
$path.shell.listb see $x
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command ComboBox::_destroy
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc ComboBox::_destroy { path } {
variable _index
Widget::destroy $path
unset _index($path)
}

357
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/dialog.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,357 @@
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# dialog.tcl
# This file is part of Unifix BWidget Toolkit
# $Id: dialog.tcl,v 1.15.2.1 2010/08/04 13:07:59 oehhar Exp $
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Index of commands:
# - Dialog::create
# - Dialog::configure
# - Dialog::cget
# - Dialog::getframe
# - Dialog::add
# - Dialog::itemconfigure
# - Dialog::itemcget
# - Dialog::invoke
# - Dialog::setfocus
# - Dialog::enddialog
# - Dialog::draw
# - Dialog::withdraw
# - Dialog::_destroy
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# JDC: added -transient and -place flag
namespace eval Dialog {
Widget::define Dialog dialog ButtonBox
Widget::bwinclude Dialog ButtonBox .bbox \
remove {-orient} \
initialize {-spacing 10 -padx 10}
Widget::declare Dialog {
{-title String "" 0}
{-geometry String "" 0}
{-modal Enum local 0 {none local global}}
{-bitmap TkResource "" 1 label}
{-image TkResource "" 1 label}
{-separator Boolean 0 1}
{-cancel Int -1 0 "%d >= -1"}
{-parent String "" 0}
{-side Enum bottom 1 {bottom left top right}}
{-anchor Enum c 1 {n e w s c}}
{-class String Dialog 1}
{-transient Boolean 1 1}
{-place Enum center 0 {none center left right above below}}
}
Widget::addmap Dialog "" :cmd {-background {}}
Widget::addmap Dialog "" .frame {-background {}}
bind BwDialog <Destroy> [list Dialog::_destroy %W]
variable _widget
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::create
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::create { path args } {
global tcl_platform
variable _widget
array set maps [list Dialog {} .bbox {}]
array set maps [Widget::parseArgs Dialog $args]
# Check to see if the -class flag was specified
set dialogClass "Dialog"
array set dialogArgs $maps(Dialog)
if { [info exists dialogArgs(-class)] } {
set dialogClass $dialogArgs(-class)
}
if { [string equal $tcl_platform(platform) "unix"] } {
set re raised
set bd 1
} else {
set re flat
set bd 0
}
toplevel $path -relief $re -borderwidth $bd -class $dialogClass
wm withdraw $path
Widget::initFromODB Dialog $path $maps(Dialog)
bindtags $path [list $path BwDialog all]
wm overrideredirect $path 1
wm title $path [Widget::cget $path -title]
set parent [Widget::cget $path -parent]
if { ![winfo exists $parent] } {
set parent [winfo parent $path]
}
# JDC: made transient optional
if { [Widget::getoption $path -transient] } {
wm transient $path [winfo toplevel $parent]
}
set side [Widget::cget $path -side]
if { [string equal $side "left"] || [string equal $side "right"] } {
set orient vertical
} else {
set orient horizontal
}
set bbox [eval [list ButtonBox::create $path.bbox] $maps(.bbox) \
-orient $orient]
set frame [frame $path.frame -relief flat -borderwidth 0]
set bg [Widget::cget $path -background]
$path configure -background $bg
$frame configure -background $bg
if { [set bitmap [Widget::getoption $path -image]] != "" } {
set label [label $path.label -image $bitmap -background $bg]
} elseif { [set bitmap [Widget::getoption $path -bitmap]] != "" } {
set label [label $path.label -bitmap $bitmap -background $bg]
}
if { [Widget::getoption $path -separator] } {
Separator::create $path.sep -orient $orient -background $bg
}
set _widget($path,realized) 0
set _widget($path,nbut) 0
set cancel [Widget::getoption $path -cancel]
bind $path <Escape> [list ButtonBox::invoke $path.bbox $cancel]
if {$cancel != -1} {
wm protocol $path WM_DELETE_WINDOW [list ButtonBox::invoke $path.bbox $cancel]
}
bind $path <Return> [list ButtonBox::invoke $path.bbox default]
return [Widget::create Dialog $path]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::configure
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::configure { path args } {
set res [Widget::configure $path $args]
if { [Widget::hasChanged $path -title title] } {
wm title $path $title
}
if { [Widget::hasChanged $path -background bg] } {
if { [winfo exists $path.label] } {
$path.label configure -background $bg
}
if { [winfo exists $path.sep] } {
Separator::configure $path.sep -background $bg
}
}
if { [Widget::hasChanged $path -cancel cancel] } {
bind $path <Escape> [list ButtonBox::invoke $path.bbox $cancel]
if {$cancel == -1} {
wm protocol $path WM_DELETE_WINDOW ""
} else {
wm protocol $path WM_DELETE_WINDOW [list ButtonBox::invoke $path.bbox $cancel]
}
}
return $res
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::cget
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::cget { path option } {
return [Widget::cget $path $option]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::getframe
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::getframe { path } {
return $path.frame
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::add
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::add { path args } {
variable _widget
if {[string equal $::tcl_platform(platform) "windows"]
&& $::tk_version >= 8.4} {
set width -11
} else {
set width 8
}
set cmd [list ButtonBox::add $path.bbox -width $width \
-command [list Dialog::enddialog $path $_widget($path,nbut)]]
set res [eval $cmd $args]
incr _widget($path,nbut)
return $res
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::itemconfigure
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::itemconfigure { path index args } {
return [eval [list ButtonBox::itemconfigure $path.bbox $index] $args]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::itemcget
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::itemcget { path index option } {
return [ButtonBox::itemcget $path.bbox $index $option]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::invoke
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::invoke { path index } {
ButtonBox::invoke $path.bbox $index
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::setfocus
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::setfocus { path index } {
ButtonBox::setfocus $path.bbox $index
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::enddialog
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::enddialog { path result } {
variable _widget
set _widget($path,result) $result
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::draw
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::draw { path {focus ""} {overrideredirect 0} {geometry ""}} {
variable _widget
set parent [Widget::getoption $path -parent]
if { !$_widget($path,realized) } {
set _widget($path,realized) 1
if { [llength [winfo children $path.bbox]] } {
set side [Widget::getoption $path -side]
if {[string equal $side "left"] || [string equal $side "right"]} {
set pad -padx
set fill y
} else {
set pad -pady
set fill x
}
pack $path.bbox -side $side -padx 1m -pady 1m \
-anchor [Widget::getoption $path -anchor]
if { [winfo exists $path.sep] } {
pack $path.sep -side $side -fill $fill $pad 2m
}
}
if { [winfo exists $path.label] } {
pack $path.label -side left -anchor n -padx 3m -pady 3m
}
pack $path.frame -padx 1m -pady 1m -fill both -expand yes
}
set geom [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -geometry]
if { $geom != "" } {
wm geometry $path $geom
}
if { [string equal $geometry ""] && ($geom == "") } {
set place [Widget::getoption $path -place]
if { ![string equal $place none] } {
if { [winfo exists $parent] } {
BWidget::place $path 0 0 $place $parent
} else {
BWidget::place $path 0 0 $place
}
}
} else {
if { $geom != "" } {
wm geometry $path $geom
} else {
wm geometry $path $geometry
}
}
update idletasks
wm overrideredirect $path $overrideredirect
wm deiconify $path
# patch by Bastien Chevreux (bach@mwgdna.com)
# As seen on Windows systems *sigh*
# When the toplevel is withdrawn, the tkwait command will wait forever.
# So, check that we are not withdrawn
if {![winfo exists $parent] || \
([wm state [winfo toplevel $parent]] != "withdrawn")} {
tkwait visibility $path
}
BWidget::focus set $path
if { [winfo exists $focus] } {
focus -force $focus
} else {
ButtonBox::setfocus $path.bbox default
}
if { [set grab [Widget::cget $path -modal]] != "none" } {
BWidget::grab $grab $path
if {[info exists _widget($path,result)]} {
unset _widget($path,result)
}
tkwait variable Dialog::_widget($path,result)
if { [info exists _widget($path,result)] } {
set res $_widget($path,result)
unset _widget($path,result)
} else {
set res -1
}
withdraw $path
return $res
}
return ""
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::withdraw
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::withdraw { path } {
BWidget::grab release $path
BWidget::focus release $path
if { [winfo exists $path] } {
wm withdraw $path
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Dialog::_destroy
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Dialog::_destroy { path } {
variable _widget
Dialog::enddialog $path -1
BWidget::grab release $path
BWidget::focus release $path
if {[info exists _widget($path,result)]} {
unset _widget($path,result)
}
unset _widget($path,realized)
unset _widget($path,nbut)
Widget::destroy $path
}

197
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/dragsite.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# dragsite.tcl
# This file is part of Unifix BWidget Toolkit
# $Id: dragsite.tcl,v 1.8 2003/10/20 21:23:52 damonc Exp $
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Index of commands:
# - DragSite::include
# - DragSite::setdrag
# - DragSite::register
# - DragSite::_begin_drag
# - DragSite::_init_drag
# - DragSite::_end_drag
# - DragSite::_update_operation
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
namespace eval DragSite {
Widget::define DragSite dragsite -classonly
Widget::declare DragSite [list \
[list -dragevent Enum 1 0 [list 1 2 3]] \
[list -draginitcmd String "" 0] \
[list -dragendcmd String "" 0] \
]
variable _topw ".drag"
variable _tabops
variable _state
variable _x0
variable _y0
bind BwDrag1 <ButtonPress-1> {DragSite::_begin_drag press %W %s %X %Y}
bind BwDrag1 <B1-Motion> {DragSite::_begin_drag motion %W %s %X %Y}
bind BwDrag2 <ButtonPress-2> {DragSite::_begin_drag press %W %s %X %Y}
bind BwDrag2 <B2-Motion> {DragSite::_begin_drag motion %W %s %X %Y}
bind BwDrag3 <ButtonPress-3> {DragSite::_begin_drag press %W %s %X %Y}
bind BwDrag3 <B3-Motion> {DragSite::_begin_drag motion %W %s %X %Y}
proc use {} {}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DragSite::include
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DragSite::include { class type event } {
set dragoptions [list \
[list -dragenabled Boolean 0 0] \
[list -draginitcmd String "" 0] \
[list -dragendcmd String "" 0] \
[list -dragtype String $type 0] \
[list -dragevent Enum $event 0 [list 1 2 3]] \
]
Widget::declare $class $dragoptions
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DragSite::setdrag
# Widget interface to register
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DragSite::setdrag { path subpath initcmd endcmd {force 0}} {
set cen [Widget::hasChanged $path -dragenabled en]
set cdragevt [Widget::hasChanged $path -dragevent dragevt]
if { $en } {
if { $force || $cen || $cdragevt } {
register $subpath \
-draginitcmd $initcmd \
-dragendcmd $endcmd \
-dragevent $dragevt
}
} else {
register $subpath
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DragSite::register
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DragSite::register { path args } {
upvar \#0 DragSite::$path drag
if { [info exists drag] } {
bind $path $drag(evt) {}
unset drag
}
Widget::init DragSite .drag$path $args
set event [Widget::getMegawidgetOption .drag$path -dragevent]
set initcmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption .drag$path -draginitcmd]
set endcmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption .drag$path -dragendcmd]
set tags [bindtags $path]
set idx [lsearch $tags "BwDrag*"]
Widget::destroy .drag$path
if { $initcmd != "" } {
if { $idx != -1 } {
bindtags $path [lreplace $tags $idx $idx BwDrag$event]
} else {
bindtags $path [concat $tags BwDrag$event]
}
set drag(initcmd) $initcmd
set drag(endcmd) $endcmd
set drag(evt) $event
} elseif { $idx != -1 } {
bindtags $path [lreplace $tags $idx $idx]
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DragSite::_begin_drag
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DragSite::_begin_drag { event source state X Y } {
variable _x0
variable _y0
variable _state
switch -- $event {
press {
set _x0 $X
set _y0 $Y
set _state "press"
}
motion {
if { ![info exists _state] } {
# This is just extra protection. There seem to be
# rare cases where the motion comes before the press.
return
}
if { [string equal $_state "press"] } {
if { abs($_x0-$X) > 3 || abs($_y0-$Y) > 3 } {
set _state "done"
_init_drag $source $state $X $Y
}
}
}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DragSite::_init_drag
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DragSite::_init_drag { source state X Y } {
variable _topw
upvar \#0 DragSite::$source drag
destroy $_topw
toplevel $_topw
wm withdraw $_topw
wm overrideredirect $_topw 1
set info [uplevel \#0 $drag(initcmd) [list $source $X $Y .drag]]
if { $info != "" } {
set type [lindex $info 0]
set ops [lindex $info 1]
set data [lindex $info 2]
if { [winfo children $_topw] == "" } {
if { [string equal $type "BITMAP"] || [string equal $type "IMAGE"] } {
label $_topw.l -image [Bitmap::get dragicon] -relief flat -bd 0
} else {
label $_topw.l -image [Bitmap::get dragfile] -relief flat -bd 0
}
pack $_topw.l
}
wm geometry $_topw +[expr {$X+1}]+[expr {$Y+1}]
wm deiconify $_topw
if {[catch {tkwait visibility $_topw}]} {
return
}
BWidget::grab set $_topw
BWidget::focus set $_topw
bindtags $_topw [list $_topw DragTop]
DropSite::_init_drag $_topw $drag(evt) $source $state $X $Y $type $ops $data
} else {
destroy $_topw
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DragSite::_end_drag
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DragSite::_end_drag { source target op type data result } {
variable _topw
upvar \#0 DragSite::$source drag
BWidget::grab release $_topw
BWidget::focus release $_topw
destroy $_topw
if { $drag(endcmd) != "" } {
uplevel \#0 $drag(endcmd) [list $source $target $op $type $data $result]
}
}

456
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/dropsite.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,456 @@
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# dropsite.tcl
# This file is part of Unifix BWidget Toolkit
# $Id: dropsite.tcl,v 1.8 2009/06/30 16:17:37 oehhar Exp $
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Index of commands:
# - DropSite::include
# - DropSite::setdrop
# - DropSite::register
# - DropSite::setcursor
# - DropSite::setoperation
# - DropSite::_update_operation
# - DropSite::_compute_operation
# - DropSite::_draw_operation
# - DropSite::_init_drag
# - DropSite::_motion
# - DropSite::_release
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
namespace eval DropSite {
Widget::define DropSite dropsite -classonly
Widget::declare DropSite [list \
[list -dropovercmd String "" 0] \
[list -dropcmd String "" 0] \
[list -droptypes String "" 0] \
]
proc use {} {}
variable _top ".drag"
variable _opw ".drag.\#op"
variable _target ""
variable _status 0
variable _tabops
variable _defops
variable _source
variable _type
variable _data
variable _evt
# key win unix
# shift 1 | 1 -> 1
# control 4 | 4 -> 4
# alt 8 | 16 -> 24
# meta | 64 -> 88
array set _tabops {
mod,none 0
mod,shift 1
mod,control 4
mod,alt 24
ops,copy 1
ops,move 1
ops,link 1
}
if { $tcl_platform(platform) == "unix" } {
set _tabops(mod,alt) 8
} else {
set _tabops(mod,alt) 16
}
array set _defops \
[list \
copy,mod shift \
move,mod control \
link,mod alt \
copy,img @[file join $::BWIDGET::LIBRARY "images" "opcopy.xbm"] \
move,img @[file join $::BWIDGET::LIBRARY "images" "opmove.xbm"] \
link,img @[file join $::BWIDGET::LIBRARY "images" "oplink.xbm"]]
bind DragTop <KeyPress-Shift_L> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s | 1]}
bind DragTop <KeyPress-Shift_R> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s | 1]}
bind DragTop <KeyPress-Control_L> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s | 4]}
bind DragTop <KeyPress-Control_R> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s | 4]}
if { $tcl_platform(platform) == "unix" } {
bind DragTop <KeyPress-Alt_L> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s | 8]}
bind DragTop <KeyPress-Alt_R> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s | 8]}
} else {
bind DragTop <KeyPress-Alt_L> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s | 16]}
bind DragTop <KeyPress-Alt_R> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s | 16]}
}
bind DragTop <KeyRelease-Shift_L> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s & ~1]}
bind DragTop <KeyRelease-Shift_R> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s & ~1]}
bind DragTop <KeyRelease-Control_L> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s & ~4]}
bind DragTop <KeyRelease-Control_R> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s & ~4]}
if { $tcl_platform(platform) == "unix" } {
bind DragTop <KeyRelease-Alt_L> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s & ~8]}
bind DragTop <KeyRelease-Alt_R> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s & ~8]}
} else {
bind DragTop <KeyRelease-Alt_L> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s & ~16]}
bind DragTop <KeyRelease-Alt_R> {DropSite::_update_operation [expr %s & ~16]}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DropSite::include
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DropSite::include { class types } {
set dropoptions [list \
[list -dropenabled Boolean 0 0] \
[list -dropovercmd String "" 0] \
[list -dropcmd String "" 0] \
[list -droptypes String $types 0] \
]
Widget::declare $class $dropoptions
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DropSite::setdrop
# Widget interface to register
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DropSite::setdrop { path subpath dropover drop {force 0}} {
set cen [Widget::hasChanged $path -dropenabled en]
set ctypes [Widget::hasChanged $path -droptypes types]
if { $en } {
if { $force || $cen || $ctypes } {
register $subpath \
-droptypes $types \
-dropcmd $drop \
-dropovercmd $dropover
}
} else {
register $subpath
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DropSite::register
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DropSite::register { path args } {
variable _tabops
variable _defops
upvar \#0 DropSite::$path drop
Widget::init DropSite .drop$path $args
if { [info exists drop] } {
unset drop
}
set dropcmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption .drop$path -dropcmd]
set types [Widget::getMegawidgetOption .drop$path -droptypes]
set overcmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption .drop$path -dropovercmd]
Widget::destroy .drop$path
if { $dropcmd != "" && $types != "" } {
set drop(dropcmd) $dropcmd
set drop(overcmd) $overcmd
foreach {type ops} $types {
set drop($type,ops) {}
set masklist {}
foreach {descop lmod} $ops {
if { ![llength $descop] || [llength $descop] > 3 } {
return -code error "invalid operation description \"$descop\""
}
foreach {subop baseop imgop} $descop {
set subop [string trim $subop]
if { ![string length $subop] } {
return -code error "sub operation is empty"
}
if { ![string length $baseop] } {
set baseop $subop
}
if { [info exists drop($type,ops,$subop)] } {
return -code error "operation \"$subop\" already defined"
}
if { ![info exists _tabops(ops,$baseop)] } {
return -code error "invalid base operation \"$baseop\""
}
if { ![string equal $subop $baseop] &&
[info exists _tabops(ops,$subop)] } {
return -code error "sub operation \"$subop\" is a base operation"
}
if { ![string length $imgop] } {
set imgop $_defops($baseop,img)
}
}
if { [string equal $lmod "program"] } {
set drop($type,ops,$subop) $baseop
set drop($type,img,$subop) $imgop
} else {
if { ![string length $lmod] } {
set lmod $_defops($baseop,mod)
}
set mask 0
foreach mod $lmod {
if { ![info exists _tabops(mod,$mod)] } {
return -code error "invalid modifier \"$mod\""
}
set mask [expr {$mask | $_tabops(mod,$mod)}]
}
if { ($mask == 0) != ([string equal $subop "default"]) } {
return -code error "sub operation default can only be used with modifier \"none\""
}
set drop($type,mod,$mask) $subop
set drop($type,ops,$subop) $baseop
set drop($type,img,$subop) $imgop
lappend masklist $mask
}
}
if { ![info exists drop($type,mod,0)] } {
set drop($type,mod,0) default
set drop($type,ops,default) copy
set drop($type,img,default) $_defops(copy,img)
lappend masklist 0
}
set drop($type,ops,force) copy
set drop($type,img,force) $_defops(copy,img)
foreach mask [lsort -integer -decreasing $masklist] {
lappend drop($type,ops) $mask $drop($type,mod,$mask)
}
}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DropSite::setcursor
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DropSite::setcursor { cursor } {
catch {.drag configure -cursor $cursor}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DropSite::setoperation
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DropSite::setoperation { op } {
variable _curop
variable _dragops
variable _target
variable _type
upvar \#0 DropSite::$_target drop
if { [info exist drop($_type,ops,$op)] &&
$_dragops($drop($_type,ops,$op)) } {
set _curop $op
} else {
# force to a copy operation
set _curop force
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DropSite::_init_drag
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DropSite::_init_drag { top evt source state X Y type ops data } {
variable _top
variable _source
variable _type
variable _data
variable _target
variable _status
variable _state
variable _dragops
variable _opw
variable _evt
if {[info exists _dragops]} {
unset _dragops
}
array set _dragops {copy 1 move 0 link 0}
foreach op $ops {
set _dragops($op) 1
}
set _target ""
set _status 0
set _top $top
set _source $source
set _type $type
set _data $data
label $_opw -relief flat -bd 0 -highlightthickness 0 \
-foreground black -background white
bind $top <ButtonRelease-$evt> {DropSite::_release %X %Y}
bind $top <B$evt-Motion> {DropSite::_motion %X %Y}
bind $top <Motion> {DropSite::_release %X %Y}
set _state $state
set _evt $evt
_motion $X $Y
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DropSite::_update_operation
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DropSite::_update_operation { state } {
variable _top
variable _status
variable _state
if { $_status & 3 } {
set _state $state
_motion [winfo pointerx $_top] [winfo pointery $_top]
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DropSite::_compute_operation
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DropSite::_compute_operation { target state type } {
variable _curop
variable _dragops
upvar \#0 DropSite::$target drop
foreach {mask op} $drop($type,ops) {
if { ($state & $mask) == $mask } {
if { $_dragops($drop($type,ops,$op)) } {
set _curop $op
return
}
}
}
set _curop force
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DropSite::_draw_operation
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DropSite::_draw_operation { target type } {
variable _opw
variable _curop
variable _dragops
variable _tabops
variable _status
upvar \#0 DropSite::$target drop
if { !($_status & 1) } {
catch {place forget $_opw}
return
}
if { 0 } {
if { ![info exist drop($type,ops,$_curop)] ||
!$_dragops($drop($type,ops,$_curop)) } {
# force to a copy operation
set _curop copy
catch {
$_opw configure -bitmap $_tabops(img,copy)
place $_opw -relx 1 -rely 1 -anchor se
}
}
} elseif { [string equal $_curop "default"] } {
catch {place forget $_opw}
} else {
catch {
$_opw configure -bitmap $drop($type,img,$_curop)
place $_opw -relx 1 -rely 1 -anchor se
}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DropSite::_motion
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DropSite::_motion { X Y } {
variable _top
variable _target
variable _status
variable _state
variable _curop
variable _type
variable _data
variable _source
variable _evt
set script [bind $_top <B$_evt-Motion>]
bind $_top <B$_evt-Motion> {}
bind $_top <Motion> {}
wm geometry $_top "+[expr {$X+1}]+[expr {$Y+1}]"
update
if { ![winfo exists $_top] } {
return
}
set path [winfo containing $X $Y]
if { ![string equal $path $_target] } {
# path != current target
if { $_status & 2 } {
# current target is valid and has recall status
# generate leave event
upvar \#0 DropSite::$_target drop
uplevel \#0 $drop(overcmd) [list $_target $_source leave $X $Y $_curop $_type $_data]
}
set _target $path
upvar \#0 DropSite::$_target drop
if { [info exists drop($_type,ops)] } {
# path is a valid target
_compute_operation $_target $_state $_type
if { $drop(overcmd) != "" } {
set arg [list $_target $_source enter $X $Y $_curop $_type $_data]
set _status [uplevel \#0 $drop(overcmd) $arg]
} else {
set _status 1
catch {$_top configure -cursor based_arrow_down}
}
_draw_operation $_target $_type
update
catch {
bind $_top <B$_evt-Motion> {DropSite::_motion %X %Y}
bind $_top <Motion> {DropSite::_release %X %Y}
}
return
} else {
set _status 0
catch {$_top configure -cursor dot}
_draw_operation "" ""
}
} elseif { $_status & 2 } {
upvar \#0 DropSite::$_target drop
_compute_operation $_target $_state $_type
set arg [list $_target $_source motion $X $Y $_curop $_type $_data]
set _status [uplevel \#0 $drop(overcmd) $arg]
_draw_operation $_target $_type
}
update
catch {
bind $_top <B$_evt-Motion> {DropSite::_motion %X %Y}
bind $_top <Motion> {DropSite::_release %X %Y}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DropSite::_release
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DropSite::_release { X Y } {
variable _target
variable _status
variable _curop
variable _source
variable _type
variable _data
if { $_status & 1 } {
upvar \#0 DropSite::$_target drop
set res [uplevel \#0 $drop(dropcmd) [list $_target $_source $X $Y $_curop $_type $_data]]
DragSite::_end_drag $_source $_target $drop($_type,ops,$_curop) $_type $_data $res
} else {
if { $_status & 2 } {
# notify leave event
upvar \#0 DropSite::$_target drop
uplevel \#0 $drop(overcmd) [list $_target $_source leave $X $Y $_curop $_type $_data]
}
DragSite::_end_drag $_source "" "" $_type $_data 0
}
}

796
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/dynhelp.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,796 @@
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# dynhelp.tcl
# This file is part of Unifix BWidget Toolkit
# $Id: dynhelp.tcl,v 1.20.2.1 2009/08/12 07:20:21 oehhar Exp $
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Index of commands:
# - DynamicHelp::configure
# - DynamicHelp::include
# - DynamicHelp::sethelp
# - DynamicHelp::register
# - DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon
# - DynamicHelp::_motion_info
# - DynamicHelp::_leave_info
# - DynamicHelp::_menu_info
# - DynamicHelp::_show_help
# - DynamicHelp::_init
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
namespace eval DynamicHelp {
Widget::define DynamicHelp dynhelp -classonly
if {$::tcl_version >= 8.5} {
set fontdefault TkTooltipFont
} elseif {$Widget::_aqua} {
set fontdefault {helvetica 11}
} else {
set fontdefault {helvetica 8}
}
Widget::declare DynamicHelp [list\
{-foreground TkResource black 0 label}\
{-topbackground TkResource black 0 {label -foreground}}\
{-background TkResource "#FFFFC0" 0 label}\
{-borderwidth TkResource 1 0 label}\
{-justify TkResource left 0 label}\
[list -font TkResource $fontdefault 0 label]\
{-delay Int 600 0 "%d >= 100 & %d <= 2000"}\
{-state Enum "normal" 0 {normal disabled}}\
{-padx TkResource 1 0 label}\
{-pady TkResource 1 0 label}\
{-bd Synonym -borderwidth}\
{-bg Synonym -background}\
{-fg Synonym -foreground}\
{-topbg Synonym -topbackground}\
]
proc use {} {}
variable _registered
variable _canvases
variable _texts
variable _top ".help_shell"
variable _id ""
variable _delay 600
variable _current_balloon ""
variable _current_variable ""
variable _saved
Widget::init DynamicHelp $_top {}
bind BwHelpBalloon <Enter> {DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon enter %W %X %Y}
bind BwHelpBalloon <Motion> {DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon motion %W %X %Y}
bind BwHelpBalloon <Leave> {DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon leave %W %X %Y}
bind BwHelpBalloon <Button> {DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon button %W %X %Y}
bind BwHelpBalloon <Destroy> {DynamicHelp::_unset_help %W}
bind BwHelpVariable <Enter> {DynamicHelp::_motion_info %W}
bind BwHelpVariable <Leave> {DynamicHelp::_leave_info %W}
bind BwHelpVariable <Destroy> {DynamicHelp::_unset_help %W}
bind BwHelpMenu <<MenuSelect>> {DynamicHelp::_menu_info select %W}
bind BwHelpMenu <Unmap> {DynamicHelp::_menu_info unmap %W}
bind BwHelpMenu <Destroy> {DynamicHelp::_unset_help %W}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DynamicHelp::configure
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DynamicHelp::configure { args } {
variable _top
variable _delay
set res [Widget::configure $_top $args]
if { [Widget::hasChanged $_top -delay val] } {
set _delay $val
}
return $res
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DynamicHelp::include
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DynamicHelp::include { class type } {
set helpoptions [list \
[list -helptext String "" 0] \
[list -helpvar String "" 0] \
[list -helpcmd String "" 0] \
[list -helptype Enum $type 0 [list balloon variable]] \
]
Widget::declare $class $helpoptions
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DynamicHelp::sethelp
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DynamicHelp::sethelp { path subpath {force 0}} {
foreach {ctype ctext cvar} [Widget::hasChangedX $path \
-helptype -helptext -helpvar] break
if { $force || $ctype || $ctext || $cvar } {
set htype [Widget::cget $path -helptype]
switch -- $htype {
balloon {
return [register $subpath balloon \
[Widget::cget $path -helptext]]
}
variable {
return [register $subpath variable \
[Widget::cget $path -helpvar] \
[Widget::cget $path -helptext]]
}
}
return [register $subpath $htype]
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DynamicHelp::register
#
# DynamicHelp::register path balloon ?itemOrTag? text
# DynamicHelp::register path variable ?itemOrTag? text varName
# DynamicHelp::register path menu varName
# DynamicHelp::register path menuentry index text
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DynamicHelp::register { path type args } {
variable _registered
set len [llength $args]
if {$type == "balloon" && $len > 1} {
switch -exact -- [winfo class $path] {
"Canvas" { set type canvasBalloon }
"Text" -
"Ctext" { set type textBalloon }
}
}
if {$type == "variable" && $len > 2} {
switch -exact -- [winfo class $path] {
"Canvas" { set type canvasVariable }
"Text" -
"Ctext" { set type textVariable }
}
}
if { ![winfo exists $path] } {
_unset_help $path
return 0
}
switch $type {
balloon {
set text [lindex $args 0]
if {$text == ""} {
if {[info exists _registered($path,balloon)]} {
unset _registered($path,balloon)
}
return 0
}
_add_balloon $path $text
}
canvasBalloon {
set tagOrItem [lindex $args 0]
set text [lindex $args 1]
if {$text == ""} {
if {[info exists _registered($path,$tagOrItem,balloon)]} {
unset _registered($path,$tagOrItem,balloon)
}
return 0
}
_add_canvas_balloon $path $text $tagOrItem
}
textBalloon {
set tagOrItem [lindex $args 0]
set text [lindex $args 1]
if {$text == ""} {
if {[info exists _registered($path,$tagOrItem,balloon)]} {
unset _registered($path,$tagOrItem,balloon)
}
return 0
}
_add_text_balloon $path $text $tagOrItem
}
variable {
set var [lindex $args 0]
set text [lindex $args 1]
if {$text == "" || $var == ""} {
if {[info exists _registered($path,variable)]} {
unset _registered($path,variable)
}
return 0
}
_add_variable $path $text $var
}
canvasVariable {
set tagOrItem [lindex $args 0]
set var [lindex $args 1]
set text [lindex $args 2]
if {$text == "" || $var == ""} {
if {[info exists _registered($path,$tagOrItem,variable)]} {
unset _registered($path,$tagOrItem,variable)
}
return 0
}
_add_canvas_variable $path $text $var $tagOrItem
}
textVariable {
set tagOrItem [lindex $args 0]
set var [lindex $args 1]
set text [lindex $args 2]
if {$text == "" || $var == ""} {
if {[info exists _registered($path,$tagOrItem,variable)]} {
unset _registered($path,$tagOrItem,variable)
}
return 0
}
_add_text_variable $path $text $var $tagOrItem
}
menu {
set var [lindex $args 0]
if {$var == ""} {
set cpath [BWidget::clonename $path]
if {[winfo exists $cpath]} { set path $cpath }
if {[info exists _registered($path)]} {
unset _registered($path)
}
return 0
}
_add_menu $path $var
}
menuentry {
set cpath [BWidget::clonename $path]
if { [winfo exists $cpath] } { set path $cpath }
if {![info exists _registered($path)]} { return 0 }
set text [lindex $args 1]
set index [lindex $args 0]
if {$text == "" || $index == ""} {
set idx [lsearch $_registered($path) [list $index *]]
set _registered($path) [lreplace $_registered($path) $idx $idx]
return 0
}
_add_menuentry $path $text $index
}
default {
_unset_help $path
return 0
}
}
return 1
}
proc DynamicHelp::add { path args } {
variable _registered
array set data {
-type balloon
-text ""
-item ""
-index -1
-command ""
-variable ""
}
if {[winfo exists $path] && [winfo class $path] == "Menu"} {
set data(-type) menu
}
array set data $args
set item $path
switch -- $data(-type) {
"balloon" {
if {$data(-item) != ""} {
switch -exact -- [winfo class $path] {
"Canvas" {
_add_canvas_balloon $path $data(-text) $data(-item)
set item $path,$data(-item)
}
"Text" -
"Ctext" {
_add_text_balloon $path $data(-text) $data(-item)
set item $path,$data(-item)
}
default {
_add_balloon $path $data(-text)
}
}
} else {
_add_balloon $path $data(-text)
}
if {$data(-variable) != ""} {
set _registered($item,balloonVar) $data(-variable)
}
}
"variable" {
set var $data(-variable)
if {$data(-item) != ""} {
switch -exact -- [winfo class $path] {
"Canvas" {
_add_canvas_variable $path $data(-text) $var $data(-item)
set item $path,$data(-item)
}
"Text" -
"Ctext" {
_add_text_variable $path $data(-text) $var $data(-item)
set item $path,$data(-item)
}
default {
_add_variable $path $data(-text) $var
}
}
} else {
_add_variable $path $data(-text) $var
}
}
"menu" {
if {$data(-index) != -1} {
set cpath [BWidget::clonename $path]
if { [winfo exists $cpath] } { set path $cpath }
if {![info exists _registered($path)]} { return 0 }
_add_menuentry $path $data(-text) $data(-index)
set item $path,$data(-index)
} else {
_add_menu $path $data(-variable)
}
}
default {
return 0
}
}
if {$data(-command) != ""} {set _registered($item,command) $data(-command)}
return 1
}
proc DynamicHelp::delete { path } {
_unset_help $path
}
proc DynamicHelp::_add_bind_tag { path tag } {
set evt [bindtags $path]
set idx [lsearch $evt $tag]
set evt [lreplace $evt $idx $idx]
lappend evt $tag
bindtags $path $evt
}
proc DynamicHelp::_add_balloon { path text } {
variable _registered
set _registered($path,balloon) $text
_add_bind_tag $path BwHelpBalloon
}
proc DynamicHelp::_add_canvas_balloon { path text tagOrItem } {
variable _canvases
variable _registered
set _registered($path,$tagOrItem,balloon) $text
if {![info exists _canvases($path,balloon)]} {
## This canvas doesn't have the bindings yet.
_add_bind_tag $path BwHelpBalloon
$path bind BwHelpBalloon <Enter> \
{DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon enter %W %X %Y 1}
$path bind BwHelpBalloon <Motion> \
{DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon motion %W %X %Y 1}
$path bind BwHelpBalloon <Leave> \
{DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon leave %W %X %Y 1}
$path bind BwHelpBalloon <Button> \
{DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon button %W %X %Y 1}
set _canvases($path,balloon) 1
}
$path addtag BwHelpBalloon withtag $tagOrItem
}
proc DynamicHelp::_add_text_balloon { path text tagOrItem } {
variable _texts
variable _registered
set _registered($path,$tagOrItem,balloon) $text
if { ![info exists _texts($path,$tagOrItem,balloon)] } {
$path tag bind $tagOrItem <Enter> \
[list DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon enter $path %X %Y 0 1]
$path tag bind $tagOrItem <Motion> \
[list DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon motion $path %X %Y 0 1]
$path tag bind $tagOrItem <Leave> \
[list DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon leave $path %X %Y 0 1]
$path tag bind $tagOrItem <Button> \
[list DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon button $path %X %Y 0 1]
set _texts($path,$tagOrItem,balloon) 1
}
}
proc DynamicHelp::_add_variable { path text varName } {
variable _registered
set _registered($path,variable) [list $varName $text]
_add_bind_tag $path BwHelpVariable
}
proc DynamicHelp::_add_canvas_variable { path text varName tagOrItem } {
variable _canvases
variable _registered
set _registered($path,$tagOrItem,variable) [list $varName $text]
if {![info exists _canvases($path,variable)]} {
## This canvas doesn't have the bindings yet.
_add_bind_tag $path BwHelpVariable
$path bind BwHelpVariable <Enter> \
{DynamicHelp::_motion_info %W 1}
$path bind BwHelpVariable <Motion> \
{DynamicHelp::_motion_info %W 1}
$path bind BwHelpVariable <Leave> \
{DynamicHelp::_leave_info %W 1}
set _canvases($path,variable) 1
}
$path addtag BwHelpVariable withtag $tagOrItem
}
proc DynamicHelp::_add_text_variable { path text varName tagOrItem } {
variable _texts
variable _registered
set _registered($path,$tagOrItem,variable) [list $varName $text]
if {![info exists _texts($path,$tagOrItem,variable)]} {
$path tag bind $tagOrItem <Enter> \
[list DynamicHelp::_motion_info $path 0 1]
$path tag bind $tagOrItem <Motion> \
[list DynamicHelp::_motion_info $path 0 1]
$path tag bind $tagOrItem <Leave> \
[list DynamicHelp::_leave_info $path 0 1]
set _texts($path,$tagOrItem,variable) 1
}
}
proc DynamicHelp::_add_menu { path varName } {
variable _registered
set cpath [BWidget::clonename $path]
if { [winfo exists $cpath] } { set path $cpath }
set _registered($path) [list $varName]
_add_bind_tag $path BwHelpMenu
}
proc DynamicHelp::_add_menuentry { path text index } {
variable _registered
set idx [lsearch $_registered($path) [list $index *]]
set list [list $index $text]
if { $idx == -1 } {
lappend _registered($path) $list
} else {
set _registered($path) \
[lreplace $_registered($path) $idx $idx $list]
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DynamicHelp::_motion_balloon { type path x y {isCanvasItem 0} {isTextItem 0} } {
variable _top
variable _id
variable _delay
variable _current_balloon
set w $path
if {$isCanvasItem} {
set path [_get_canvas_path $path balloon]
} elseif {$isTextItem} {
set path [_get_text_path $path balloon]
}
if { $_current_balloon != $path && $type == "enter" } {
set _current_balloon $path
set type "motion"
destroy $_top
}
if { $_current_balloon == $path } {
if { $_id != "" } {
after cancel $_id
set _id ""
}
if { $type == "motion" } {
if { ![winfo exists $_top] } {
set cmd [list DynamicHelp::_show_help $path $w $x $y]
set _id [after $_delay $cmd]
}
# Bug 923942 proposes to destroy on motion to remove dynhelp on motion.
# this might be an optional behaviour in future versions
} else {
destroy $_top
set _current_balloon ""
}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DynamicHelp::_motion_info
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DynamicHelp::_motion_info { path {isCanvasItem 0} {isTextItem 0} } {
variable _saved
variable _registered
variable _current_variable
if {$isCanvasItem} {
set path [_get_canvas_path $path variable]
} elseif {$isTextItem} {
set path [_get_text_path $path variable]
}
if { $_current_variable != $path
&& [info exists _registered($path,variable)] } {
set varName [lindex $_registered($path,variable) 0]
if {![info exists _saved]} { set _saved [GlobalVar::getvar $varName] }
set string [lindex $_registered($path,variable) 1]
if {[info exists _registered($path,command)]} {
set string [uplevel #0 $_registered($path,command)]
}
GlobalVar::setvar $varName $string
set _current_variable $path
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DynamicHelp::_leave_info
# Leave event may be called twice (in case of pointer grab)
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DynamicHelp::_leave_info { path {isCanvasItem 0} {isTextItem 0} } {
variable _saved
variable _registered
variable _current_variable
if {$isCanvasItem} {
set path [_get_canvas_path $path variable]
} elseif {$isTextItem} {
set path [_get_text_path $path variable]
}
if { [string equal $_current_variable $path] \
&& [info exists _registered($path,variable)] } {
set varName [lindex $_registered($path,variable) 0]
GlobalVar::setvar $varName $_saved
unset _saved
set _current_variable ""
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DynamicHelp::_menu_info
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# We have to check for unmap event on Unix. On Windows, unmap
# is not delivered, but <<MenuSelect>> is triggered appropriately when menu
# is unmapped.
proc DynamicHelp::_menu_info { event path } {
variable _registered
if { [info exists _registered($path)] } {
set index [$path index active]
set varName [lindex $_registered($path) 0]
if { ![string equal $event "unmap"] &&
![string equal $index "none"] &&
[set idx [lsearch $_registered($path) [list $index *]]] != -1 } {
set string [lindex [lindex $_registered($path) $idx] 1]
if {[info exists _registered($path,$index,command)]} {
set string [uplevel #0 $_registered($path,$index,command)]
}
GlobalVar::setvar $varName $string
} else {
GlobalVar::setvar $varName ""
}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DynamicHelp::_show_help
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DynamicHelp::_show_help { path w x y } {
variable _top
variable _registered
variable _id
variable _delay
if { [Widget::getoption $_top -state] == "disabled" } { return }
if { [info exists _registered($path,balloon)] } {
destroy $_top
set string $_registered($path,balloon)
if {[info exists _registered($path,balloonVar)]} {
upvar #0 $_registered($path,balloonVar) var
if {[info exists var]} { set string $var }
}
if {[info exists _registered($path,command)]} {
set string [uplevel #0 $_registered($path,command)]
}
if {$string == ""} { return }
toplevel $_top -relief flat \
-bg [Widget::getoption $_top -topbackground] \
-bd [Widget::getoption $_top -borderwidth] \
-screen [winfo screen $w]
wm withdraw $_top
if { $Widget::_aqua } {
::tk::unsupported::MacWindowStyle style $_top help none
} else {
wm overrideredirect $_top 1
}
catch { wm attributes $_top -topmost 1 }
label $_top.label -text $string \
-relief flat -bd 0 -highlightthickness 0 \
-padx [Widget::getoption $_top -padx] \
-pady [Widget::getoption $_top -pady] \
-foreground [Widget::getoption $_top -foreground] \
-background [Widget::getoption $_top -background] \
-font [Widget::getoption $_top -font] \
-justify [Widget::getoption $_top -justify]
pack $_top.label -side left
update idletasks
if {![winfo exists $_top]} {return}
set scrwidth [winfo vrootwidth .]
set scrheight [winfo vrootheight .]
set width [winfo reqwidth $_top]
set height [winfo reqheight $_top]
# On windows multi screen configurations, the virtual screen may start
# at negative positions.
set scrrootx [winfo vrootx .]
set scrrooty [winfo vrooty .]
# Increment the required size by the deplacement from the passed point
incr width 8
incr height 12
# Put at the right border if going over it
if { $x+$width > $scrrootx+$scrwidth } {
set x [expr {$scrwidth + $scrrootx - $width + 8}]
} else {
incr x 8
}
# Put above widget if below is no space
if { $y+$height > $scrrooty+$scrheight } {
set y [expr {$y - $height}]
} else {
incr y 12
}
wm geometry $_top "+$x+$y"
update idletasks
if {![winfo exists $_top]} { return }
wm deiconify $_top
raise $_top
# Sometimes the tooltip does not occur under
# gnome/metacity on ubuntu.
after 5;
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DynamicHelp::_unset_help
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DynamicHelp::_unset_help { path } {
variable _canvases
variable _texts
variable _registered
variable _top
variable _current_balloon
if {[info exists _registered($path)]} { unset _registered($path) }
if {[winfo exists $path]} {
set cpath [BWidget::clonename $path]
if {[info exists _registered($cpath)]} { unset _registered($cpath) }
}
array unset _canvases $path,*
array unset _texts $path,*
array unset _registered $path,*
if {[string equal $path $_current_balloon]} {destroy $_top}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DynamicHelp::_get_canvas_path
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DynamicHelp::_get_canvas_path { path type {item ""} } {
variable _registered
if {$item == ""} { set item [$path find withtag current] }
## Check the tags related to this item for the one that
## represents our text. If we have text specific to this
## item or for 'all' items, they override any other tags.
eval [list lappend tags $item all] [$path itemcget $item -tags]
foreach tag $tags {
set check $path,$tag
if {![info exists _registered($check,$type)]} { continue }
return $check
}
return $path
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command DynamicHelp::_get_text_path
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc DynamicHelp::_get_text_path { path type {item ""} } {
variable _registered
if {$item == ""} { set item [$path tag names current] }
## Check the tags related to this item for the one that
## represents our text. If we have text specific to this
## item or for 'all' items, they override any other tags.
eval [list lappend tags $item all] $item
foreach tag $tags {
set check $path,$tag
if {![info exists _registered($check,$type)]} { continue }
return $check
}
return $path
}

525
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/entry.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,525 @@
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# entry.tcl
# This file is part of Unifix BWidget Toolkit
# $Id: entry.tcl,v 1.22.2.2 2012/04/02 09:53:41 oehhar Exp $
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Index of commands:
# - Entry::create
# - Entry::configure
# - Entry::cget
# - Entry::_destroy
# - Entry::_init_drag_cmd
# - Entry::_end_drag_cmd
# - Entry::_drop_cmd
# - Entry::_over_cmd
# - Entry::_auto_scroll
# - Entry::_scroll
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
namespace eval Entry {
Widget::define Entry entry DragSite DropSite DynamicHelp
# Note: -textvariable is pulled off of the tk entry and put onto the
# BW Entry so that we avoid the TkResource test for it, which screws up
# the existance/non-existance bits of the -textvariable.
if {[Widget::theme]} {
Widget::tkinclude Entry ttk::entry :cmd \
remove { -state -textvariable }
} else {
Widget::tkinclude Entry entry :cmd \
remove { -state -background -foreground -textvariable
-disabledforeground -disabledbackground }
}
set declare [list \
[list -state Enum normal 0 [list normal disabled]] \
[list -text String "" 0] \
[list -textvariable String "" 0] \
[list -editable Boolean 1 0] \
[list -command String "" 0] \
]
if {![Widget::theme]} {
lappend declare \
[list -background TkResource "" 0 entry] \
[list -foreground TkResource "" 0 entry] \
[list -relief TkResource "" 0 entry] \
[list -borderwidth TkResource "" 0 entry] \
[list -fg Synonym -foreground] \
[list -bg Synonym -background] \
[list -bd Synonym -borderwidth]
if {![package vsatisfies [package provide Tk] 8.4]} {
## If we're not running version 8.4 or higher, get our
## disabled resources from the button widget.
lappend declare [list -disabledforeground TkResource "" 0 button]
lappend declare [list -disabledbackground TkResource "" 0 \
{button -background}]
} else {
lappend declare [list -disabledforeground TkResource "" 0 entry]
lappend declare [list -disabledbackground TkResource "" 0 entry]
}
}
Widget::declare Entry $declare
Widget::addmap Entry "" :cmd { -textvariable {} }
DynamicHelp::include Entry balloon
DragSite::include Entry "" 3
DropSite::include Entry {
TEXT {move {}}
FGCOLOR {move {}}
BGCOLOR {move {}}
COLOR {move {}}
}
if {[Widget::theme]} {
foreach event [bind TEntry] {
bind BwEntry $event [bind TEntry $event]
}
} else {
foreach event [bind Entry] {
bind BwEntry $event [bind Entry $event]
}
}
# Copy is kind of a special event. It should be enabled when the
# widget is editable but not disabled, and not when the widget is disabled.
# To make this a bit easier to manage, we will handle it separately.
bind BwEntry <<Copy>> {}
bind BwEditableEntry <<Copy>> [bind Entry <<Copy>>]
bind BwEntry <Return> [list Entry::invoke %W]
bind BwEntry <Destroy> [list Entry::_destroy %W]
bind BwDisabledEntry <Destroy> [list Entry::_destroy %W]
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Entry::create
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Entry::create { path args } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
array set maps [list Entry {} :cmd {}]
array set maps [Widget::parseArgs Entry $args]
set data(afterid) ""
if {[Widget::theme]} {
eval [list ttk::entry $path] $maps(:cmd)
} else {
eval [list entry $path] $maps(:cmd)
}
Widget::initFromODB Entry $path $maps(Entry)
set state [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -state]
set editable [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -editable]
set text [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -text]
if { $editable && [string equal $state "normal"] } {
bindtags $path [list $path BwEntry [winfo toplevel $path] all]
if {[Widget::theme]} {
$path configure -takefocus 1
} else {
$path configure -takefocus 1 -insertontime 600
}
} else {
bindtags $path [list $path BwDisabledEntry [winfo toplevel $path] all]
if {[Widget::theme]} {
$path configure -takefocus 0
} else {
$path configure -takefocus 0 -insertontime 0
}
}
if { $editable == 0 } {
$path configure -cursor left_ptr
}
if { [string equal $state "disabled"] } {
if {[Widget::theme]} {
$path state disabled
} else {
$path configure \
-foreground [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -disabledforeground] \
-background [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -disabledbackground]
}
} else {
if {![Widget::theme]} {
$path configure \
-foreground [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -foreground] \
-background [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -background]
}
bindtags $path [linsert [bindtags $path] 2 BwEditableEntry]
}
if { [string length $text] } {
set varName [$path cget -textvariable]
if { ![string equal $varName ""] } {
uplevel \#0 [list set $varName [Widget::cget $path -text]]
} else {
set validateState [$path cget -validate]
$path configure -validate none
$path delete 0 end
$path configure -validate $validateState
$path insert 0 [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -text]
}
}
DragSite::setdrag $path $path Entry::_init_drag_cmd Entry::_end_drag_cmd 1
DropSite::setdrop $path $path Entry::_over_cmd Entry::_drop_cmd 1
DynamicHelp::sethelp $path $path 1
Widget::create Entry $path
proc ::$path { cmd args } \
"return \[Entry::_path_command [list $path] \$cmd \$args\]"
return $path
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Entry::configure
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Entry::configure { path args } {
# Cheat by setting the -text value to the current contents of the entry
# This might be better hidden behind a function in ::Widget.
set Widget::Entry::${path}:opt(-text) [$path:cmd get]
set res [Widget::configure $path $args]
# Extract the modified bits that we are interested in.
if {[Widget::theme]} {
set vars [list chstate cheditable chtext]
set opts [list -state -editable -text]
} else {
set vars [list chstate cheditable chfg chdfg chbg chdbg chtext]
set opts [list -state -editable -foreground -disabledforeground \
-background -disabledbackground -text]
}
foreach $vars [eval [linsert $opts 0 Widget::hasChangedX $path]] { break }
if { $chstate || $cheditable } {
set state [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -state]
set editable [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -editable]
set btags [bindtags $path]
if { $editable && [string equal $state "normal"] } {
set idx [lsearch $btags BwDisabledEntry]
if { $idx != -1 } {
bindtags $path [lreplace $btags $idx $idx BwEntry]
}
if {[Widget::theme]} {
$path:cmd configure -takefocus 1
} else {
$path:cmd configure -takefocus 1 -insertontime 600
}
} else {
set idx [lsearch $btags BwEntry]
if { $idx != -1 } {
bindtags $path [lreplace $btags $idx $idx BwDisabledEntry]
}
if {[Widget::theme]} {
$path:cmd configure -takefocus 0
} else {
$path:cmd configure -takefocus 0 -insertontime 0
}
if { [string equal [focus] $path] } {
focus .
}
}
}
if { [Widget::theme] && $chstate } {
set state [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -state]
if { [string equal $state "disabled"] } {
$path:cmd state disabled
} else {
$path:cmd state !disabled
}
}
if { ![Widget::theme] && ($chstate || $chfg || $chdfg || $chbg || $chdbg) } {
set state [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -state]
if { [string equal $state "disabled"] } {
$path:cmd configure \
-fg [Widget::cget $path -disabledforeground] \
-bg [Widget::cget $path -disabledbackground]
} else {
$path:cmd configure \
-fg [Widget::cget $path -foreground] \
-bg [Widget::cget $path -background]
}
}
if { $chstate } {
if { [string equal $state "disabled"] } {
set idx [lsearch -exact [bindtags $path] BwEditableEntry]
if { $idx != -1 } {
bindtags $path [lreplace [bindtags $path] $idx $idx]
}
} else {
set idx [expr {[lsearch [bindtags $path] Bw*Entry] + 1}]
bindtags $path [linsert [bindtags $path] $idx BwEditableEntry]
}
}
if { $cheditable } {
if { $editable } {
$path:cmd configure -cursor xterm
} else {
$path:cmd configure -cursor left_ptr
}
}
if { $chtext } {
# Oh my lordee-ba-goordee
# Do some magic to prevent multiple validation command firings.
# If there is a textvariable, set that to the right value; if not,
# disable validation, delete the old text, enable, then set the text.
set varName [$path:cmd cget -textvariable]
if { ![string equal $varName ""] } {
uplevel \#0 [list set $varName \
[Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -text]]
} else {
set validateState [$path:cmd cget -validate]
$path:cmd configure -validate none
$path:cmd delete 0 end
$path:cmd configure -validate $validateState
$path:cmd insert 0 [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -text]
}
}
DragSite::setdrag $path $path Entry::_init_drag_cmd Entry::_end_drag_cmd
DropSite::setdrop $path $path Entry::_over_cmd Entry::_drop_cmd
DynamicHelp::sethelp $path $path
return $res
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Entry::cget
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Entry::cget { path option } {
if { [string equal "-text" $option] } {
return [$path:cmd get]
}
Widget::cget $path $option
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Entry::invoke
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Entry::invoke { path } {
if {[llength [set cmd [Widget::getMegawidgetOption $path -command]]]} {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Entry::_path_command
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Entry::_path_command { path cmd larg } {
switch -exact -- $cmd {
configure - cget - invoke {
return [eval [linsert $larg 0 Entry::$cmd $path]]
}
default {
return [uplevel 2 [linsert $larg 0 $path:cmd $cmd]]
}
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Entry::_init_drag_cmd
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Entry::_init_drag_cmd { path X Y top } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
if {[llength [set cmd [Widget::getoption $path -draginitcmd]]]} {
return [uplevel \#0 $cmd [list $path $X $Y $top]]
}
set type [Widget::getoption $path -dragtype]
if { $type == "" } {
set type "TEXT"
}
if { [set drag [$path get]] != "" } {
if { [$path:cmd selection present] } {
set idx [$path:cmd index @[expr {$X-[winfo rootx $path]}]]
set sel0 [$path:cmd index sel.first]
set sel1 [expr {[$path:cmd index sel.last]-1}]
if { $idx >= $sel0 && $idx <= $sel1 } {
set drag [string range $drag $sel0 $sel1]
set data(dragstart) $sel0
set data(dragend) [expr {$sel1+1}]
if { ![Widget::getoption $path -editable] ||
[Widget::getoption $path -state] == "disabled" } {
return [list $type {copy} $drag]
} else {
return [list $type {copy move} $drag]
}
}
} else {
set data(dragstart) 0
set data(dragend) end
if { ![Widget::getoption $path -editable] ||
[Widget::getoption $path -state] == "disabled" } {
return [list $type {copy} $drag]
} else {
return [list $type {copy move} $drag]
}
}
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Entry::_end_drag_cmd
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Entry::_end_drag_cmd { path target op type dnddata result } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
if {[llength [set cmd [Widget::getoption $path -dragendcmd]]]} {
return [uplevel \#0 $cmd [list $path $target $op $type $dnddata $result]]
}
if { $result && $op == "move" && $path != $target } {
$path:cmd delete $data(dragstart) $data(dragend)
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Entry::_drop_cmd
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Entry::_drop_cmd { path source X Y op type dnddata } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
if { $data(afterid) != "" } {
after cancel $data(afterid)
set data(afterid) ""
}
if {[llength [set cmd [Widget::getoption $path -dropcmd]]]} {
set idx [$path:cmd index @[expr {$X-[winfo rootx $path]}]]
return [uplevel \#0 $cmd [list $path $source $idx $op $type $dnddata]]
}
if { $type == "COLOR" || $type == "FGCOLOR" } {
configure $path -foreground $dnddata
} elseif { $type == "BGCOLOR" } {
configure $path -background $dnddata
} else {
$path:cmd icursor @[expr {$X-[winfo rootx $path]}]
if { $op == "move" && $path == $source } {
$path:cmd delete $data(dragstart) $data(dragend)
}
set sel0 [$path index insert]
$path:cmd insert insert $dnddata
set sel1 [$path index insert]
$path:cmd selection range $sel0 $sel1
}
return 1
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Entry::_over_cmd
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Entry::_over_cmd { path source event X Y op type dnddata } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
set x [expr {$X-[winfo rootx $path]}]
if { [string equal $event "leave"] } {
if { [string length $data(afterid)] } {
after cancel $data(afterid)
set data(afterid) ""
}
} elseif { [_auto_scroll $path $x] } {
return 2
}
if {[llength [set cmd [Widget::getoption $path -dropovercmd]]]} {
set x [expr {$X-[winfo rootx $path]}]
set idx [$path:cmd index @$x]
set res [uplevel \#0 $cmd [list $path $source $event $idx $op $type $dnddata]]
return $res
}
if { [string equal $type "COLOR"] ||
[string equal $type "FGCOLOR"] ||
[string equal $type "BGCOLOR"] } {
DropSite::setcursor based_arrow_down
return 1
}
if { [Widget::getoption $path -editable]
&& [string equal [Widget::getoption $path -state] "normal"] } {
if { ![string equal $event "leave"] } {
$path:cmd selection clear
$path:cmd icursor @$x
DropSite::setcursor based_arrow_down
return 3
}
}
DropSite::setcursor dot
return 0
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Entry::_auto_scroll
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Entry::_auto_scroll { path x } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
set xmax [winfo width $path]
if { $x <= 10 && [$path:cmd index @0] > 0 } {
if { $data(afterid) == "" } {
set data(afterid) [after 100 [list Entry::_scroll $path -1 $x $xmax]]
DropSite::setcursor sb_left_arrow
}
return 1
} else {
if { $x >= $xmax-10 && [$path:cmd index @$xmax] < [$path:cmd index end] } {
if { $data(afterid) == "" } {
set data(afterid) [after 100 [list Entry::_scroll $path 1 $x $xmax]]
DropSite::setcursor sb_right_arrow
}
return 1
} else {
if { $data(afterid) != "" } {
after cancel $data(afterid)
set data(afterid) ""
}
}
}
return 0
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Entry::_scroll
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Entry::_scroll { path dir x xmax } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
$path:cmd xview scroll $dir units
$path:cmd icursor @$x
if { ($dir == -1 && [$path:cmd index @0] > 0) ||
($dir == 1 && [$path:cmd index @$xmax] < [$path:cmd index end]) } {
set data(afterid) [after 100 [list Entry::_scroll $path $dir $x $xmax]]
} else {
set data(afterid) ""
DropSite::setcursor dot
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Entry::_destroy
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Entry::_destroy { path } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
Widget::destroy $path
unset data
}

571
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/font.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,571 @@
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# font.tcl
# This file is part of Unifix BWidget Toolkit
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Index of commands:
# - SelectFont::create
# - SelectFont::configure
# - SelectFont::cget
# - SelectFont::_draw
# - SelectFont::_destroy
# - SelectFont::_modstyle
# - SelectFont::_update
# - SelectFont::_getfont
# - SelectFont::_init
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
namespace eval SelectFont {
Widget::define SelectFont font Dialog LabelFrame ScrolledWindow
Widget::declare SelectFont {
{-title String "Font selection" 0}
{-parent String "" 0}
{-background TkResource "" 0 frame}
{-type Enum dialog 0 {dialog toolbar}}
{-font TkResource "" 0 label}
{-initialcolor String "" 0}
{-families String "all" 1}
{-querysystem Boolean 1 0}
{-nosizes Boolean 0 1}
{-styles String "bold italic underline overstrike" 1}
{-command String "" 0}
{-sampletext String "Sample Text" 0}
{-bg Synonym -background}
}
variable _families
variable _styleOff
array set _styleOff [list bold normal italic roman]
variable _sizes {4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 \
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24}
# Set up preset lists of fonts, so the user can avoid the painfully slow
# loadfont process if desired.
if { [string equal $::tcl_platform(platform) "windows"] } {
set presetVariable [list \
7x14 \
Arial \
{Arial Narrow} \
{Lucida Sans} \
{MS Sans Serif} \
{MS Serif} \
{Times New Roman} \
]
set presetFixed [list \
6x13 \
{Courier New} \
FixedSys \
Terminal \
]
set presetAll [list \
6x13 \
7x14 \
Arial \
{Arial Narrow} \
{Courier New} \
FixedSys \
{Lucida Sans} \
{MS Sans Serif} \
{MS Serif} \
Terminal \
{Times New Roman} \
]
} else {
set presetVariable [list \
helvetica \
lucida \
lucidabright \
{times new roman} \
]
set presetFixed [list \
courier \
fixed \
{lucida typewriter} \
screen \
serif \
terminal \
]
set presetAll [list \
courier \
fixed \
helvetica \
lucida \
lucidabright \
{lucida typewriter} \
screen \
serif \
terminal \
{times new roman} \
]
}
array set _families [list \
presetvariable $presetVariable \
presetfixed $presetFixed \
presetall $presetAll \
]
variable _widget
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectFont::create
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectFont::create { path args } {
variable _families
variable _sizes
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
# Initialize the internal rep of the widget options
Widget::init SelectFont "$path#SelectFont" $args
if { [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -querysystem] } {
loadfont [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -families]
}
set bg [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -background]
set _styles [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -styles]
if { [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -type] == "dialog" } {
Dialog::create $path -modal local -anchor e -default 0 -cancel 1 \
-background $bg \
-title [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -title] \
-parent [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -parent]
set frame [Dialog::getframe $path]
set topf [frame $frame.topf -relief flat -borderwidth 0 -background $bg]
set labf1 [LabelFrame::create $topf.labf1 -text "Font" -name font \
-side top -anchor w -relief flat -background $bg]
set sw [ScrolledWindow::create [LabelFrame::getframe $labf1].sw \
-background $bg]
set lbf [listbox $sw.lb \
-height 5 -width 25 -exportselection false -selectmode browse]
ScrolledWindow::setwidget $sw $lbf
LabelFrame::configure $labf1 -focus $lbf
if { [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -querysystem] } {
set fam [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -families]
} else {
set fam "preset"
append fam [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -families]
}
eval [list $lbf insert end] $_families($fam)
set script "set [list SelectFont::${path}(family)] \[%W curselection\];\
SelectFont::_update [list $path]"
bind $lbf <ButtonRelease-1> $script
bind $lbf <space> $script
bind $lbf <1> [list focus %W]
bind $lbf <Up> $script
bind $lbf <Down> $script
pack $sw -fill both -expand yes
set labf2 [LabelFrame::create $topf.labf2 -text "Size" -name size \
-side top -anchor w -relief flat -background $bg]
set sw [ScrolledWindow::create [LabelFrame::getframe $labf2].sw \
-scrollbar vertical -background $bg]
set lbs [listbox $sw.lb \
-height 5 -width 6 -exportselection false -selectmode browse]
ScrolledWindow::setwidget $sw $lbs
LabelFrame::configure $labf2 -focus $lbs
eval [list $lbs insert end] $_sizes
set script "set [list SelectFont::${path}(size)] \[%W curselection\];\
SelectFont::_update [list $path]"
bind $lbs <ButtonRelease-1> $script
bind $lbs <space> $script
bind $lbs <1> [list focus %W]
bind $lbs <Up> $script
bind $lbs <Down> $script
pack $sw -fill both -expand yes
set labf3 [LabelFrame::create $topf.labf3 -text "Style" -name style \
-side top -anchor w -relief sunken -bd 1 -background $bg]
set subf [LabelFrame::getframe $labf3]
foreach st $_styles {
set name [lindex [BWidget::getname $st] 0]
if { $name == "" } {
set name [string toupper $name 0]
}
checkbutton $subf.$st -text $name \
-variable SelectFont::$path\($st\) \
-background $bg \
-command [list SelectFont::_update $path]
bind $subf.$st <Return> break
pack $subf.$st -anchor w
}
LabelFrame::configure $labf3 -focus $subf.[lindex $_styles 0]
pack $labf1 -side left -anchor n -fill both -expand yes
if { ![Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -nosizes] } {
pack $labf2 -side left -anchor n -fill both -expand yes -padx 8
}
pack $labf3 -side left -anchor n -fill both -expand yes
set botf [frame $frame.botf -width 100 -height 50 \
-bg white -bd 0 -relief flat \
-highlightthickness 1 -takefocus 0 \
-highlightbackground black \
-highlightcolor black]
set lab [label $botf.label \
-background white -foreground black \
-borderwidth 0 -takefocus 0 -highlightthickness 0 \
-text [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -sampletext]]
place $lab -relx 0.5 -rely 0.5 -anchor c
pack $topf -pady 4 -fill both -expand yes
if { [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -initialcolor] != ""} {
set thecolor [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -initialcolor]
set colf [frame $frame.colf]
set frc [frame $colf.frame -width 50 -height 20 -bg $thecolor -bd 0 -relief flat\
-highlightthickness 1 -takefocus 0 \
-highlightbackground black \
-highlightcolor black]
set script "set [list SelectFont::${path}(fontcolor)] \[tk_chooseColor -parent $colf.button -initialcolor \[set [list SelectFont::${path}(fontcolor)]\]\];\
SelectFont::_update [list $path]"
set name [lindex [BWidget::getname colorPicker] 0]
if { $name == "" } {
set name "Color..."
}
set but [button $colf.button -command $script \
-text $name]
$lab configure -foreground $thecolor
$frc configure -bg $thecolor
pack $but -side left
pack $frc -side left -padx 5
set data(frc) $frc
set data(fontcolor) $thecolor
pack $colf -pady 4 -fill x -expand true
} else {
set data(fontcolor) -1
}
pack $botf -pady 4 -fill x
Dialog::add $path -name ok
Dialog::add $path -name cancel
set data(label) $lab
set data(lbf) $lbf
set data(lbs) $lbs
_getfont $path
Widget::create SelectFont $path 0
return [_draw $path]
} else {
if { [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -querysystem] } {
set fams [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -families]
} else {
set fams "preset"
append fams [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -families]
}
if {[Widget::theme]} {
ttk::frame $path
set lbf [ttk::combobox $path.font \
-takefocus 0 -exportselection 0 \
-values $_families($fams) \
-textvariable SelectFont::${path}(family) \
-state readonly]
set lbs [ttk::combobox $path.size \
-takefocus 0 -exportselection 0 \
-width 4 \
-values $_sizes \
-textvariable SelectFont::${path}(size) \
-state readonly]
bind $lbf <<ComboboxSelected>> [list SelectFont::_update $path]
bind $lbs <<ComboboxSelected>> [list SelectFont::_update $path]
ttk::style configure BWSlim.Toolbutton -padding 0
} else {
frame $path -background $bg
set lbf [ComboBox::create $path.font \
-highlightthickness 0 -takefocus 0 -background $bg \
-values $_families($fams) \
-textvariable SelectFont::$path\(family\) \
-editable 0 \
-modifycmd [list SelectFont::_update $path]]
set lbs [ComboBox::create $path.size \
-highlightthickness 0 -takefocus 0 -background $bg \
-width 4 \
-values $_sizes \
-textvariable SelectFont::$path\(size\) \
-editable 0 \
-modifycmd [list SelectFont::_update $path]]
}
bind $path <Destroy> [list SelectFont::_destroy $path]
pack $lbf -side left -anchor w
pack $lbs -side left -anchor w -padx 4
foreach st $_styles {
if {[Widget::theme]} {
ttk::checkbutton $path.$st -takefocus 0 \
-style BWSlim.Toolbutton \
-image [Bitmap::get $st] \
-variable SelectFont::${path}($st) \
-command [list SelectFont::_update $path]
} else {
button $path.$st \
-highlightthickness 0 -takefocus 0 -padx 0 -pady 0 \
-background $bg \
-image [Bitmap::get $st] \
-command [list SelectFont::_modstyle $path $st]
}
pack $path.$st -side left -anchor w
}
set data(label) ""
set data(lbf) $lbf
set data(lbs) $lbs
_getfont $path
return [Widget::create SelectFont $path]
}
return $path
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectFont::configure
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectFont::configure { path args } {
set _styles [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -styles]
set res [Widget::configure "$path#SelectFont" $args]
if { [Widget::hasChanged "$path#SelectFont" -font font] } {
_getfont $path
}
if { [Widget::hasChanged "$path#SelectFont" -background bg] } {
switch -- [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -type] {
dialog {
Dialog::configure $path -background $bg
set topf [Dialog::getframe $path].topf
$topf configure -background $bg
foreach labf {labf1 labf2} {
LabelFrame::configure $topf.$labf -background $bg
set subf [LabelFrame::getframe $topf.$labf]
ScrolledWindow::configure $subf.sw -background $bg
$subf.sw.lb configure -background $bg
}
LabelFrame::configure $topf.labf3 -background $bg
set subf [LabelFrame::getframe $topf.labf3]
foreach w [winfo children $subf] {
$w configure -background $bg
}
}
toolbar {
$path configure -background $bg
ComboBox::configure $path.font -background $bg
ComboBox::configure $path.size -background $bg
foreach st $_styles {
$path.$st configure -background $bg
}
}
}
}
return $res
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectFont::cget
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectFont::cget { path option } {
return [Widget::cget "$path#SelectFont" $option]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectFont::loadfont
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectFont::loadfont {{which all}} {
variable _families
# initialize families
if {![info exists _families(all)]} {
set _families(all) [lsort -dictionary [font families]]
}
if {[regexp {fixed|variable} $which] \
&& ![info exists _families($which)]} {
# initialize families
set _families(fixed) {}
set _families(variable) {}
foreach family $_families(all) {
if { [font metrics [list $family] -fixed] } {
lappend _families(fixed) $family
} else {
lappend _families(variable) $family
}
}
}
return
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectFont::_draw
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectFont::_draw { path } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
$data(lbf) selection clear 0 end
$data(lbf) selection set $data(family)
$data(lbf) activate $data(family)
$data(lbf) see $data(family)
$data(lbs) selection clear 0 end
$data(lbs) selection set $data(size)
$data(lbs) activate $data(size)
$data(lbs) see $data(size)
_update $path
if { [Dialog::draw $path] == 0 } {
set result [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -font]
set color $data(fontcolor)
if { $color == "" } {
set color #000000
}
} else {
set result ""
if {$data(fontcolor) == -1} {
set color -1
} else {
set color ""
}
}
unset data
Widget::destroy "$path#SelectFont"
destroy $path
if { $color != -1 } {
return [list $result $color]
} else {
return $result
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectFont::_modstyle
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectFont::_modstyle { path style } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
$path.$style configure -relief [expr {$data($style) ? "raised" : "sunken"}]
set data($style) [expr {!$data($style)}]
_update $path
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectFont::_update
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectFont::_update { path } {
variable _families
variable _sizes
variable _styleOff
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
set type [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -type]
set _styles [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -styles]
if { [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -querysystem] } {
set fams [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -families]
} else {
set fams "preset"
append fams [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -families]
}
if { $type == "dialog" } {
set curs [$path:cmd cget -cursor]
$path:cmd configure -cursor watch
}
if { [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -type] == "dialog" } {
set font [list [lindex $_families($fams) $data(family)] \
[lindex $_sizes $data(size)]]
} else {
set font [list $data(family) $data(size)]
}
foreach st $_styles {
if { $data($st) } {
lappend font $st
} elseif {[info exists _styleOff($st)]} {
# This adds the default bold/italic value to a font
#lappend font $_styleOff($st)
}
}
Widget::setoption "$path#SelectFont" -font $font
if { $type == "dialog" } {
$data(label) configure -font $font
$path:cmd configure -cursor $curs
if { ($data(fontcolor) != "") && ($data(fontcolor) != -1) } {
$data(label) configure -foreground $data(fontcolor)
$data(frc) configure -bg $data(fontcolor)
} elseif { $data(fontcolor) == "" } {
#If no color is selected, restore previous one
set data(fontcolor) [$data(label) cget -foreground]
}
} elseif { [set cmd [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -command]] != "" } {
uplevel \#0 $cmd
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectFont::_getfont
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectFont::_getfont { path } {
variable _families
variable _sizes
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
array set font [font actual [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -font]]
set data(bold) [expr {![string equal $font(-weight) "normal"]}]
set data(italic) [expr {![string equal $font(-slant) "roman"]}]
set data(underline) $font(-underline)
set data(overstrike) $font(-overstrike)
set _styles [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -styles]
if { [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -querysystem] } {
set fams [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -families]
} else {
set fams "preset"
append fams [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -families]
}
if { [Widget::getoption "$path#SelectFont" -type] == "dialog" } {
set idxf [lsearch $_families($fams) $font(-family)]
set idxs [lsearch $_sizes $font(-size)]
set data(family) [expr {$idxf >= 0 ? $idxf : 0}]
set data(size) [expr {$idxs >= 0 ? $idxs : 0}]
} else {
set data(family) $font(-family)
set data(size) $font(-size)
if {![Widget::theme]} {
foreach st $_styles {
$path.$st configure \
-relief [expr {$data($st) ? "sunken":"raised"}]
}
}
}
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command SelectFont::_destroy
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc SelectFont::_destroy { path } {
variable $path
upvar 0 $path data
unset data
Widget::destroy "$path#SelectFont"
}

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/bold.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 118 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/copy.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 145 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/cut.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 130 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/dragfile.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 949 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/dragicon.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 1012 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/error.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 259 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/file.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 860 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/folder.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 139 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/hourglass.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 211 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/info.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 256 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/italic.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 111 B

5
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/minus.xbm Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
#define minus_width 9
#define minus_height 9
static char minus_bits[] = {
0xff,0x01,0x01,0x01,0x01,0x01,0x01,0x01,0x7d,0x01,0x01,0x01,0x01,0x01,0x01,
0x01,0xff,0x01};

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/new.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 131 B

5
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/opcopy.xbm Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
#define opcopy_width 11
#define opcopy_height 11
static char opcopy_bits[] = {
0xff,0xff,0x01,0xfc,0x21,0xfc,0x21,0xfc,0x21,0xfc,0xfd,0xfd,0x21,0xfc,0x21,
0xfc,0x21,0xfc,0x01,0xfc,0xff,0xff};

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/open.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 139 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/openfold.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 146 B

5
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/oplink.xbm Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
#define oplink_width 11
#define oplink_height 11
static char oplink_bits[] = {
0xff,0xff,0x01,0xfc,0xf1,0xfc,0xe1,0xfc,0xf1,0xfc,0xb9,0xfc,0x19,0xfc,0x09,
0xfc,0x11,0xfc,0x01,0xfc,0xff,0xff};

5
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/opmove.xbm Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
#define opmove_width 11
#define opmove_height 11
static char opmove_bits[] = {
0xff,0xff,0x01,0xfc,0x01,0xfc,0x51,0xfc,0x89,0xfc,0xfd,0xfd,0x89,0xfc,0x51,
0xfc,0x01,0xfc,0x01,0xfc,0xff,0xff};

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/overstrike.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 119 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/palette.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 151 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/passwd.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 481 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/paste.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 159 B

5
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/plus.xbm Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
#define plus_width 9
#define plus_height 9
static char plus_bits[] = {
0xff,0x01,0x01,0x01,0x11,0x01,0x11,0x01,0x7d,0x01,0x11,0x01,0x11,0x01,0x01,
0x01,0xff,0x01};

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/print.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 140 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/question.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 265 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/redo.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 70 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/save.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 138 B

9
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/target.xbm Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
#define target_width 24
#define target_height 24
static unsigned char target_bits[] = {
0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x07, 0x00, 0x00, 0x07, 0x00, 0x00, 0x07, 0x00,
0x00, 0x07, 0x00, 0x00, 0x07, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
0x3e, 0xe0, 0x03, 0x3e, 0xe0, 0x03, 0x3e, 0xe0, 0x03, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x07, 0x00, 0x00, 0x07, 0x00, 0x00, 0x07, 0x00,
0x00, 0x07, 0x00, 0x00, 0x07, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00};

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/underline.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 119 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/undo.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 115 B

BIN
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/images/warning.gif Executable file
View File

Binary file not shown.
Side by Side

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 254 B

55
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/init.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
namespace eval Widget {}
proc Widget::_opt_defaults {{prio widgetDefault}} {
if {$::tcl_version >= 8.4} {
set plat [tk windowingsystem]
} else {
set plat $::tcl_platform(platform)
}
switch -exact $plat {
"aqua" {
}
"win32" -
"windows" {
#option add *Listbox.background SystemWindow $prio
option add *ListBox.background SystemWindow $prio
#option add *Button.padY 0 $prio
option add *ButtonBox.padY 0 $prio
option add *Dialog.padY 0 $prio
option add *Dialog.anchor e $prio
}
"x11" -
default {
option add *Scrollbar.width 12 $prio
option add *Scrollbar.borderWidth 1 $prio
option add *Dialog.separator 1 $prio
option add *MainFrame.relief raised $prio
option add *MainFrame.separator none $prio
}
}
}
Widget::_opt_defaults
# Try to load lang file corresponding to current msgcat locale
proc Widget::_opt_lang {} {
if {0 != [llength [info commands ::msgcat::mcpreferences]]} {
set langs [::msgcat::mcpreferences]
}
lappend langs en
foreach lang $langs {
set l [file join $::BWIDGET::LIBRARY "lang" "$lang.rc"]
if {(![catch {file readable $l} result]) && ($result)} {
option read $l
break
}
}
}
Widget::_opt_lang
## Add a TraverseIn binding to standard Tk widgets to handle some of
## the BWidget-specific things we do.
bind Entry <<TraverseIn>> { %W selection range 0 end; %W icursor end }
bind Spinbox <<TraverseIn>> { %W selection range 0 end; %W icursor end }
bind all <Key-Tab> { Widget::traverseTo [Widget::focusNext %W] }
bind all <<PrevWindow>> { Widget::traverseTo [Widget::focusPrev %W] }

327
R_portable/R/App/R-portable/Tcl/bin64/lib/bwidget-1.9.12/label.tcl Executable file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,327 @@
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# label.tcl
# This file is part of Unifix BWidget Toolkit
# $Id: label.tcl,v 1.10.2.3 2011/04/26 08:24:28 oehhar Exp $
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Index of commands:
# - Label::create
# - Label::configure
# - Label::cget
# - Label::setfocus
# - Label::_drag_cmd
# - Label::_drop_cmd
# - Label::_over_cmd
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
namespace eval Label {
Widget::define Label label DragSite DropSite DynamicHelp
if {$::Widget::_theme} {
Widget::tkinclude Label label .l \
remove { -foreground -text -textvariable -underline -state}
} else {
Widget::tkinclude Label label .l \
remove { -foreground -text -textvariable -underline }
}
Widget::declare Label {
{-name String "" 0}
{-text String "" 0}
{-textvariable String "" 0}
{-underline Int -1 0 "%d >= -1"}
{-focus String "" 0}
{-foreground TkResource "" 0 label}
{-disabledforeground TkResource "" 0 button}
{-state Enum normal 0 {normal disabled}}
{-fg Synonym -foreground}
}
DynamicHelp::include Label balloon
DragSite::include Label "" 1
DropSite::include Label {
TEXT {move {}}
IMAGE {move {}}
BITMAP {move {}}
FGCOLOR {move {}}
BGCOLOR {move {}}
COLOR {move {}}
}
bind BwLabel <FocusIn> [list Label::setfocus %W]
bind BwLabel <Destroy> [list Label::_destroy %W]
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Label::create
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Label::create { path args } {
array set maps [list Label {} .l {}]
array set maps [Widget::parseArgs Label $args]
frame $path -class Label -borderwidth 0 -highlightthickness 0 -relief flat -padx 0 -pady 0
Widget::initFromODB Label $path $maps(Label)
if {$::Widget::_theme} {
eval [list ttk::label $path.l] $maps(.l)
} else {
eval [list label $path.l] $maps(.l)
}
if {$::Widget::_theme} {
if { [Widget::cget $path -state] != "normal" } {
$path.l state disabled
}
} else {
if { [Widget::cget $path -state] == "normal" } {
set fg [Widget::cget $path -foreground]
} else {
set fg [Widget::cget $path -disabledforeground]
}
$path.l configure -foreground $fg
}
set var [Widget::cget $path -textvariable]
if { $var == "" &&
[Widget::cget $path -image] == "" &&
($::Widget::_theme || [Widget::cget $path -bitmap] == "")} {
set desc [BWidget::getname [Widget::cget $path -name]]
if { $desc != "" } {
set text [lindex $desc 0]
set under [lindex $desc 1]
} else {
set text [Widget::cget $path -text]
set under [Widget::cget $path -underline]
}
} else {
set under -1
set text ""
}
$path.l configure -text $text -textvariable $var \
-underline $under
set accel [string tolower [string index $text $under]]
if { $accel != "" } {
bind [winfo toplevel $path] <Alt-$accel> "Label::setfocus $path"
}
bindtags $path [list BwLabel [winfo toplevel $path] all]
bindtags $path.l [list $path.l $path Label [winfo toplevel $path] all]
pack $path.l -expand yes -fill both
set dragendcmd [Widget::cget $path -dragendcmd]
DragSite::setdrag $path $path.l Label::_init_drag_cmd $dragendcmd 1
DropSite::setdrop $path $path.l Label::_over_cmd Label::_drop_cmd 1
DynamicHelp::sethelp $path $path.l 1
return [Widget::create Label $path]
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Label::configure
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Label::configure { path args } {
set oldunder [$path.l cget -underline]
if { $oldunder != -1 } {
set oldaccel [string tolower [string index [$path.l cget -text] $oldunder]]
} else {
set oldaccel ""
}
set res [Widget::configure $path $args]
set cfg [Widget::hasChanged $path -foreground fg]
set cst [Widget::hasChanged $path -state state]
if {$::Widget::_theme} {
if { $cfg } {
$path.l configure -foreground $fg
}
if { $cst } {
if { $state == "normal" } {
$path.l state !disabled
} else {
$path.l state disabled
}
}
} else {
set cdfg [Widget::hasChanged $path -disabledforeground dfg]
if { $cst || $cfg || $cdfg } {
if { $state == "normal" } {
$path.l configure -fg $fg
} else {
$path.l configure -fg $dfg
}
}
}
set cv [Widget::hasChanged $path -textvariable var]
set cb [Widget::hasChanged $path -image img]
if {$::Widget::_theme} {
set ci 0
set bmp ""
} else {
set ci [Widget::hasChanged $path -bitmap bmp]
}
set cn [Widget::hasChanged $path -name name]
set ct [Widget::hasChanged $path -text text]
set cu [Widget::hasChanged $path -underline under]
if { $cv || $cb || $ci || $cn || $ct || $cu } {
if { $var == "" && $img == "" && $bmp == "" } {
set desc [BWidget::getname $name]
if { $desc != "" } {
set text [lindex $desc 0]
set under [lindex $desc 1]
}
} else {
set under -1
set text ""
}
set top [winfo toplevel $path]
if { $oldaccel != "" } {
bind $top <Alt-$oldaccel> {}
}
set accel [string tolower [string index $text $under]]
if { $accel != "" } {
bind $top <Alt-$accel> [list Label::setfocus $path]
}
$path.l configure -text $text -underline $under -textvariable $var
}
set force [Widget::hasChanged $path -dragendcmd dragend]
DragSite::setdrag $path $path.l Label::_init_drag_cmd $dragend $force
DropSite::setdrop $path $path.l Label::_over_cmd Label::_drop_cmd
DynamicHelp::sethelp $path $path.l
return $res
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Label::cget
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Label::cget { path option } {
return [Widget::cget $path $option]
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Label::identify
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Label::identify { path args } {
eval $path.l identify $args
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Label::instate
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Label::instate { path args } {
eval $path.l instate $args
}
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Label::state
# ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Label::state { path args } {
eval $path.l state $args
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Label::setfocus
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Label::setfocus { path } {
if { [string equal [Widget::cget $path -state] "normal"] } {
set w [Widget::cget $path -focus]
if { [winfo exists $w] && [Widget::focusOK $w] } {
focus $w
}
}
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Label::_init_drag_cmd
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Label::_init_drag_cmd { path X Y top } {
set path [winfo parent $path]
if { [set cmd [Widget::cget $path -draginitcmd]] != "" } {
return [uplevel \#0 $cmd [list $path $X $Y $top]]
}
if { [set data [$path.l cget -image]] != "" } {
set type "IMAGE"
pack [label $top.l -image $data]
} elseif { [set data [$path.l cget -bitmap]] != "" } {
set type "BITMAP"
pack [label $top.l -bitmap $data]
} else {
set data [$path.l cget -text]
set type "TEXT"
}
set usertype [Widget::getoption $path -dragtype]
if { $usertype != "" } {
set type $usertype
}
return [list $type {copy} $data]
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Label::_drop_cmd
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Label::_drop_cmd { path source X Y op type data } {
set path [winfo parent $path]
if { [set cmd [Widget::cget $path -dropcmd]] != "" } {
return [uplevel \#0 $cmd [list $path $source $X $Y $op $type $data]]
}
if { $type == "COLOR" || $type == "FGCOLOR" } {
configure $path -foreground $data
} elseif { $type == "BGCOLOR" } {
configure $path -background $data
} else {
set text ""
set image ""
set bitmap ""
switch -- $type {
IMAGE {set image $data}
BITMAP {set bitmap $data}
default {
set text $data
if { [set var [$path.l cget -textvariable]] != "" } {
configure $path -image "" -bitmap ""
GlobalVar::setvar $var $data
return
}
}
}
configure $path -text $text -image $image -bitmap $bitmap
}
return 1
}
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Command Label::_over_cmd
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
proc Label::_over_cmd { path source event X Y op type data } {
set path [winfo parent $path]
if { [set cmd [Widget::cget $path -dropovercmd]] != "" } {
return [uplevel \#0 $cmd [list $path $source $event $X $Y $op $type $data]]
}
if { [Widget::getoption $path -state] == "normal" ||
$type == "COLOR" || $type == "FGCOLOR" || $type == "BGCOLOR" } {
DropSite::setcursor based_arrow_down
return 1
}
DropSite::setcursor dot
return 0
}
proc Label::_destroy { path } {
Widget::destroy $path
}

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More